1029 - 248 Hylab 5

Operator’s Manual
Crane Serial Number

The crane serial number is written on the Crane Rating In the event the serial number can not be found on the
Manual located in the operator’s cab. The crane serial Crane Rating Manual, a number is stamped on the
number should always be furnished when ordering front face of the upper frame between the boom foot
parts for the crane, or when corresponding with the dis- mounting lugs and also stamped on a plate inside the
tributor or factory regarding the crane. The serial num- operator’s cab to the left of the operator. This number
ber is the only method the distributor or factory has of can then be used to identify the crane.
ensuring that the correct parts will be furnished.
BOOK1029 N5112006RSW Preface

This crane was manufactured before November 8, 2011.
Operator’s Manual
WARNING
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT CAN BE DANGEROUS IF
IMPROPERLY OPERATED OR MAINTAINED. THIS
MACHINE SHOULD BE OPERATED AND MAINTAINED
ONLY BY TRAINED AND EXPERIENCED PEOPLE WHO
HAVE READ, UNDERSTOOD, AND COMPLY WITH THE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
The productive life of construction equipment depends and upkeep of this crane which are not covered in this
largely on the care and consideration given to it. This manual should be directed to your nearest distributor.
especially holds true for crawler cranes. This Opera- In addition to this Operator’s & Maintenance Manual, a
tor’s & Maintenance Manual was compiled to explain Crane Rating Manual and Safety Manual are supplied
the procedures and adjustments necessary for proper with the crane. The Crane Rating Manual lists all the
operation of this crane. maximum lift capacities for the crane. Read and under-
A study of this manual will acquaint the operator and stand all information in the Crane Rating Manual before
service personnel with the construction of this crane. It making a lift. Read and understand all safety guide-
will enable them to identify and remedy most problems lines before operating the crane. Additional copies of
that may occur. Any questions pertaining to the care all manuals are available through your distributor.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemical known to the State
of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other
reproductive harm.
Preface
Operator’s Manual
Throughout this manual, reference is made to the left, right, front, and rear pertaining to direction and locations.
These reference directions are relative to the operator sitting in the operator’s seat with the travel motor to the rear,
unless otherwise stated.
Danger, warning, and caution captions as well as special notes are used throughout this manual and on the crane to
emphasize important and critical instructions. Labels, plates, decals, etc. should be periodically inspected and
cleaned as necessary to maintain good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction, caution, warning, or danger
labels, decals, or plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they must be replaced. Information contained
on such labels, decals, and plates is important and failure to follow the information they contain could result in an
accident. Replacement labels, decals, and plates can be ordered through your distributor. For the purpose of this
manual, and the labels which are placed on the crane, danger, warning, and caution captions and notes are defined
as follows:
DANGER
An operating procedure, practice, etc. which,
if not correctly followed, may result in severe
personal injury, dismemberment, or loss of
life.
WARNING
if not correctly followed, may result in per-
sonal injury.
CAUTION
if not correctly followed, may result in damage
to or destruction of equipment or property.
NOTE
Note: An operating procedure step, condition,
etc. which is essential in order for the process to
be completed properly.
Preface
Operator’s Manual
General Index
A detailed table of contents for each section of this manual is included at the
beginning of each section. The following is a description of each section:
Section 1 − Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1−1 Thru 1−106

Section 1 includes the necessary information for safe, productive crane operation. It includes the nomenclature and
operation of all control switches, levers, pedals, and instrumentation of the crane.
Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 2−1 Thru 2−30

Section 2 includes the necessary information for proper lubrication and preventive maintenance for daily opera-
tions. It includes the check/change intervals and procedures for maximizing the service life of the crane under nor-
mal working conditions. It also includes lubrication types and specifications approved for use in the crane.
Section 3 − Periodic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3−1 Thru 3−24

Section 3 includes the adjustments which must be made periodically to keep the crane in proper, safe working order.
It includes the procedures and necessary information for adjusting the brakes, mechanical linkages, and hydraulic
pressures on the crane.
Section 4 − Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 4−1 Thru 4−42

Section 4 includes the use and operation of the crane attachments. It includes the necessary information for installa-
tion, erection, storage, and removal of the boom and jib.
Section 5 − General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 5−1 Thru 5−32

Section 5 includes general information on the Crane Rating Manual and serial number used for the crane. It also
includes general information on wire rope specifications, inspection, replacement, connections, reeving, and gen-
eral specifications used for the crane.
Section 6 − Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 6−1 Thru 6−6

Section 6 includes a list of terms which are used to refer to crane functions, assembly, operation, and maintenance.
These terms are defined as to how they are used in this manual.
Preface
Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−1
Operating Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
General Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
Operator Awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2
Boom Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−8
Electrical Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−12
Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−15
Signalmen And Bystanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−15
Crane Inspections And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−16
Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−18
Crane And Area Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−18
Weights, Lengths, And Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−19
Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−23
Leaving The Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−25
Personnel Handling Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−25
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−26
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−26
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−27
Additional Requirements for Offshore Cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−27
Inspection and Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−27
Crane Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−28
Operation And Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−28
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−29
Operator’s Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−29
Overhead Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−31
Load Moment Limiter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−31
Left Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−33
Right Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−35
Front Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−36
Air Conditioner Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−38
Section 1 − Operating Instructions i

Operator’s Manual
Crane System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39
Engine Throttle Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39
Pump Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39
Boom Hoist Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39
Boom Limit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41
Boom Hoist Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41
Luffing Boom Backstop Limit (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41
Boom Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41
Boom Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42
Drum Control Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42
Front And Rear Drum Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42
Operating In AUTO BRAKE" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−43
Operating In FREE" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−43
Third Drum Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44
Drum Rotation Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44
Upper Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44
Swing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44
Swing (Park) Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44
Travel Swing Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−45
To Swing The Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−45
Steering And Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46
Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46
Anti-Two Block System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46
Load Moment Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−49
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−49
Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−49
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−54
System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−54
Configuration Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−55
Rigging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−60
Operator Settable Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−61
Setting Tip Height Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−61
ii Section 1 − Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
Setting Radius Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−62
Overload Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−63
Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−64
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−68
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−68
Monthly Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−68
Inspection Of Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−68
Function Accuracy Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−68
Periodic Replacement Of The Internal Dry Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−69
Functions To Be Adjusted With The Crane Set-up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−70
Boom Angle/Radius Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−71
Self-weight Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−73
Resetting Self-weight Corrected Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−75
Boom Hoist Limit Stop And Boom Backstop Limit Stop Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−76
Boom Angles For Activating Boom Upper Limit Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−78
Automatic Limiting Function Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−78
Operator’s Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−81
Entering And Exiting The Operator’s Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−81
Gate Lock Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−81
Before Starting Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−82
Engine Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−82
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−83
Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−83
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−84
Lift Crane Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−84
Crane Assembly And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−85
Crane Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−85
Crane Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−85
Side Frame Installation And Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−85
Side Frame Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−85
Side Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−88
Section 1 − Operating Instructions iii

Operator’s Manual
Counterweight Installation And Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−91
Counterweight Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−91
Counterweight Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−92
Counterweight Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−94
Third Drum Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−96
Blocking For Over End Blocked Lifting Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−97
Hand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−98
10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section − Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−99
Boom Transporting/Traveling Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−100
Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−101
Traveling Without A Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−101
Traveling With A Load (Pick & Carry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−101
Traveling On A Slope (Without A Load Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−102
Transporting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−102
Transporting The Tubular Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−103
Crane Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−105
Short Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−105
Long Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−105
iv Section 1 − Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
10
12 11
3
13
1. Crawler 5. Boom Top Section 8. Bridle 11. Bail

2. Operator’s Cab 6. Boom Head Machinery 9. Live Mast 12. Counterweights
3. Boom Base Section 7. Basic Pendants 10. Boom Backstops 13. House
4. Hook Block
Figure 1−1
Crane Nomenclature
Section 1 − Operating Instructions 1−1

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Keep clear of
moving parts to
prevent serious
bodily injury.
Figure 1−2 Figure 1−3

Keep hands and tools clear of moving parts. Make sure the load will clear any obstruction.
3. Don’t smoke when fueling, or fuel up near an open

Operating Safety flame. Keep the nozzle in contact with the filler
neck to prevent static electric sparks. Shutdown
Remember SAFETY every day. Someone’s LIFE may the engine when fueling.
depend on it, MAYBE YOUR OWN. 4. Start and operate engine in a well ventilated area.
Safe operations of a crane requires a well trained, Diesel exhaust fumes can be harmful. If it is neces-
qualified operator. Crane operation is more involved sary to operate in an enclosed area, vent the ex-
than it may appear, and operation by a careless or un- haust to the outside. Properly maintain the exhaust
qualified person can result in a serious accident. system to its original design.
5. Keep your shoes clean. Before entering the opera-
When a crane is maintained and used properly it can
tor’s cab, wipe clean any mud, gravel, moisture or
be a safe, highly productive piece of equipment, but if
grease from your feet. Slippery shoes could cause
not used properly, it can be dangerous.
momentary loss of control of crucial foot operated
Think Safety − You, the operator, are in charge of an controls.
important piece of equipment. It is very important that 6. Keep all walking surfaced non-skid materials on
you know what it can do. If is also important that you the crane clean. Non-skid materials are placed on
know what it should not do. No set of instructions can the crane assist operators and service personnel
anticipate all of the situations you will encounter. The with safe access/egress to/from the crane and to/
rules given here cover the general usage, and some of from adjustment and inspection areas. Do not al-
the more common specific cases. If conditions arise low non-skid materials to become contaminated
not covered by these rules, consult your nearest dis- with mud, oil, paint, wax, etc. Any contamination
tributor. A phone call could save someone’s life. can cause the non-skid materials to become slick,
reducing their effectiveness for safety while walk-
General Safety Rules ing on the crane. If any non-skid materials be-
The following is a list of safety rules which should be fol- comes ineffective due to wear, age, or destroyed in
lowed during all crane operations. any way, it must be replaced.
7. Keep fingers, feet, and clothing away from
Operator Awareness sheaves, drums, and ropes unless the crane is
1. Read, understand and follow all instructions given shutdown and everyone knows what you are do-
in this Operator’s Manual. The manual contains ing. Do not place a hand on wire ropes when
critical information. climbing on the crane. A sudden movement could
2. An operator must not eat, read, or otherwise divert pull them into the drums or sheaves. Never wear
his attention while operating a crane. Remem- loose clothing which may be caught in machinery.
ber−operating is a full-time job.
1−2 Section 1 − Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
Right
Wrong
Grade Ground Level Or Block

A 3 Degree Side Tilt Can Reduce Under Crane. The Load Should
Capacities By Over 50%. Hang Parallel With The Boom.
Figure 1−4
Level the crane.
8. The operator and person in charge of the load hoist wire rope, or any other parts of the crane
must observe the following rules: do not snag or strike any obstruction.
a. Loads must be well secured before lifting. Be g. Avoid sudden starts and stops. Lift carefully,
sure that the rigging cannot slip off or pull away swing gently, brake smoothly, lower and set
from the load, or get out of position on the load. loads carefully. Jerking the load, swinging and
Be sure the load is rigged so it will not turn over. engaging swing brake roughly, and lowering
b. Chains and slings must be of adequate size, in the load rapidly and slamming on brakes, will
good condition, and not twisted around each put shock loadings and possible side loadings
other. on the boom. Unnecessary abuse labels the
c. The load must not catch on an obstruction operator as a beginner. Be a professional.
when lifting or swinging. Be sure the load, h. Do not wrap the winch rope around the load.
hoist wire rope, or any other parts of the crane Do not use discarded, worn, or damaged wire
do not snag or strike any obstruction. ropes for slings. They may break and drop the
d. Do not allow the load to rotate out of control. load.
Personal injury to ground personnel, load i. The crane must be level before making a lift.
damage, crane damage, or damage to anti- Remember, a three degree side tilt can reduce
two block system may occur. capacities by 50% or more.
e. When hoisting with single part line, especially The hook block and hoist wire rope can also
in long falls applications, the design of wire be used as a plumb bob" to level a crane.
rope and hookball is crucial to minimize the po- Pick up a compact load 2,000−3,000 lbs.
tential for uncontrolled rope and/or load rota- (907−1360kg) a few inches above the
tion. Rotation-resistant wire rope is recom- ground. If crane is level, hoist wire rope will
mended for single part of line applications. hang directly between the boom feet. Now
See Wire Rope Capacity Chart in Crane Rating swing over the side. The lines should still
Manual for the specific types of rotation resist- hang directly between the boom feet. Be
ant wire rope recommended for your crane. extra careful when using this method on a
f. The load must not catch on an obstruction windy day.
when lifting or swinging. Be sure the load,

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Just A Little Bump Can Cause This!

Like This ........
Figure 1−5
Do not let the load hit the boom or jib.
9. Don’t let the load or bucket hit the boom or jib.

Don’t let the boom or attachment rest on, or hit, a
Wrong building or any other object. A dent or other dam-
age could result, which will weaken the boom or at-
tachment. If the damage is severe, the attachment
could collapse. If a lattice or diagonal bracing
member on the boom or jib is broken, cracked, or
bent, contact your local distributor for repair proce-
dures. If the boom or jib is struck, or damaged by
anything, STOP. The loading on a boom or attach-
ments increases as they are lowered, therefore
their suspension systems could collapse during
lowering. Use another crane to lower a damaged
boom or attachment.
10. Don’t pull sideways on the boom, not even a little.
Lift straight up on every load. Moving trucks, rail
cars, barges, or anything else pulling sideways on
the winch rope could buckle the boom. It could
also damage the swing mechanism. Pulling side-
ways on a boom can overturn the crane.
11. Do not two block" (pulling the hook block into the
head machinery) as this can cause winch rope
breakage, sheave damage, or could pull the boom
backwards over the crane resulting in an accident.
Figure 1−6
Do not use the boom to pull sideways.

Operator’s Manual
12. Be sure the boom hoist pawl is always engaged ex-
cept when lowering the boom. Don’t rely on the
boom hoist brake alone to hold the boom. Wear, Right
improper adjustment, water or oil on linings and
many other factors may affect the ability of the
brake to hold the boom.
13. Watch the load or signalman at all times. A sus-
pended load must have your undivided attention.
14. Operate the crane from the operator’s seat only.
Operating the crane from any other position, such
as reaching in a window, constitutes a safety haz-
ard.
15. After slack winch rope operation, make sure the
winch rope is properly seated in sheaves and on
drums before continuing to operate. Use a stick or
mallet to set the winch rope, not your hands.
16. Do not lower the load beyond the point where only
two full wraps of winch rope are left on the drum.
This condition could occur when lowering a load
beyond ground level. If all the winch rope runs off Figure 1−7
the drum, the load will jerk which could break the Use matting on soft ground.
winch rope.
17. Make sure there is a safety latch on the hook, and c. Cranes must be positioned so that each boom
that it works properly. Without a latch, it is possible point is directly over its load attaching point.
for slings or chains to come off the hook, allowing The winch lines must be vertical during all
the load to fall. phases of the lift.
18. Don’t alter any part of the crane. Additions to or d. The rigging must be placed so each crane lifts
changes in any part of the equipment can create a share of the load well within the crane’s ca-
loadings for which the crane was not designed. pacity.
Such changes may seriously affect the usable ca- e. Be sure that during handling more load is not
pacities and make the entire capacity chart invalid. transferred to any crane than it can handle.
Such changes can dangerously overload or f. Don’t attempt to travel when making multiple
weaken critical parts and may cause disastrous crane lifts.
failure. g. Coordinate plans with the other operator be-
19. Do not exceed the rated capacities of the crane un- fore beginning to lift.
der any circumstances. While a crane has more h. Use only one signalman.
stability when lifting over a corner (as compared to i. Use of an operable load and angle indicating
straight over the side) the crane capacity is not in- system is desirable.
creased. Any time the loads exceeds the rated ca- 21. When operating a crawler crane, where the tracks
pacities listed on the capacity charts in the Crane sink into the soil any noticeable amount, use mat-
Rating Manual, the crane is overloaded. Over- ting. Timbers used for matting should be at least
loads can damage the crane and such damage as long as the total width of the crawler and should
could cause failure and accidents. be heavy enough to withstand loadings without
20. Lifts where two or more cranes work together can damage. Timbers should be close enough to form
be hazardous and should be avoided. Such lifts a solid platform when lifting over crawler ends (or
should be made only under the direction of a quali- raising and lowering attachment). Block under
fied engineer. If a multiple crane lift is unavoidable, track ends so full support is provided where tracks
observe the following rules: leave the ground. This helps keep the tracks from
a. The cranes must be level and located on firm digging in and cuts down on crane rocking.
surfaces.
b. The cranes should be the same size and ca-
pacity, use the same boom length and be
reeved similarly.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong Wrong

Watch that crawler! Submerged Loads
22. When operating over the front or rear, use care not 25. Operating with auxiliary equipment such as pile
to hit the crawler with the load or boom. driver leads, pile hammers, or caisson boring at-
23. When lifting submerged loads, the suction caused tachments imposes additional loading in the
by the load resting on the bottom acts to increase crane. This causes a major reduction in lifting ca-
the weight of the load; in some cases many times pacities of the crane. Changes in auger and kelly
the actual load weight. This same effect can occur bar lengths with drilling attachments and in pile
on land, when a load is embedded in mud. To hammer attachments further complicate the man-
break a load loose from suction, don’t pull side- ner in which lifting capacities are reduced. The
ways or a boom may collapse. If possible, rig the weight of each piece of auxiliary equipment is to be
load so it is lifted from one end. Don’t jerk on the considered a part of the live load acting at the ra-
load. A steady pull, maintained for several minutes dius of the center of gravity of the piece.
will often free the load without over loading the 26. Demolition work can be particularly hazardous.
equipment. Shock loadings and side loadings from demolition
When a submerged load reaches the surface, ball and clamshell bucket work can be severe. The
don’t attempt to lift it out of the water all at once. It repetitive nature of such work imposes heavy de-
may be saturated with water and will weigh many mands on all parts of the crane. Restrict demolition
times what you expect. Allow it to drain as you ball weights to 50% of crane capacity, with the
raise the load slowly. Be patient, as draining may boom length you are using, at maximum load ra-
take a long time. A load when removed from the dius from the main boom. In no case however,
water, will have a greater effective weight than it will should the ball weight exceed 50% of the available
when submerged because of buoyancy. line pull. Do not use jib for demolition, drop ball,
24. Don’t extract piling, casings, or other such loads by drag line, or any other type of duty cycle applica-
jerking on them. The practice of pulling on the load tion.
until the crane has tipped, then releasing the hoist 27. When using demolition ball, avoid sudden clutch
line, allowing the crane to drop back and catching and brake applications. Work steadily and
the hoist line on a clutch or brake may break the smoothly. Don’t try to knock the whole structure
boom. If the piling or casing won’t pull out with a down with one blow. Use good aim. If the ball
smooth, steady pull, use an extractor, pulling misses its target, out swing could cause crane tip-
frame, or similar rigging intended for this purpose. ping or overload. When swinging back, ball may
Pulling on a load that is not free to be lifted can de- hit the boom and damage it.
velop loadings on the crane far in excess of the nor-
mal weight of the load. Imposing such loads on a
crane can damage the crane and may cause dis-
astrous failure. When using a pile extractor, use a
shock or vibration insulator unit.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong Wrong

Extracting Pilings Demolition Work
28. When using a clamshell bucket on demolition work b. If cold weather starting aids are provided on
and taking a bite on a piece of unknown weight, be the crane, use them. The use of aerosol start-
ready to release the closing line as more weight ing sprays can be dangerous if the manufac-
than can be lifted may break loose. Be prepared to turer’s directions are not closely followed.
drop the load. Be sure to stay within the boom c. Pay close attention to the gauges in the opera-
length and load limitations shown in the lifting ca- tor’s cab when starting the engine. Normal
pacity chart in the crane. Failure to do so may cre- warm up" times will be longer. Be sure pres-
ate fatigue which can lead to eventual failure. sures and temperatures are within normal
29. When dismantling a structure where a portion is ranges before beginning operations.
being cut loose while suspended by a crane, be d. Always handle flammable materials according
sure the weight of the portion being cut loose is to the supplier’s instructions. Propane or die-
known, and the crane pull on the load is equal to sel or other fuel, for auxiliary heaters, can be
the weight. The point of attachment must be di- dangerous if not properly handled. Do not
rectly above the center of gravity of the load. The store such fuels on the crane.
hoist wire rope must be vertical. This is an ex- e. Use caution when lifting any load during freez-
tremely hazardous operation. The services of a ing weather, as it may be frozen to the ground
professional engineer should be used to plan and or the supporting surface. The added tension,
supervise such lifts. to break the load free, could cause an unsus-
30. Cold weather operation requires some special at- pected overload situation. Also, when the load
tention by the operator to allow for changes in eve- does finally break loose it could create an er-
ryday routines: ratic motion causing damage or injury.
a. Clean the crane, especially the boom, of accu- f. At the end of the work shift, park the crane
mulated amounts of ice or snow. Operating where it will not freeze to the ground. Major
the crane with an ice covered boom is danger- damage to the drive train could occur while try-
ous. The added weight of the ice or snow can ing to free the crane from a frozen surface.
drastically reduce the capacity of the crane.
Also, falling ice may pose danger for ground
personel.

Operator’s Manual
Pendants Incorrectly Located

For Boom Disassembly.
Wrong
Do Not Stand Inside

Or Under The Boom.
Right
Pendants Correctly Located At Or Behind

Boom Connection To Be Disassembled.
Stand Outside The Boom.

Drive Connecting Pin To The Inside
Figure 1−12
Boom Safety
Boom Safety Instructions 1. Read and understand the step by step instructions
outlined in this manual before attempting to as-
Disassembly of any pin connected boom can be haz-
semble or disassemble the boom.
ardous. Removing the wrong connecting pins or re-
2. Do not stand inside, on top or under the boom at
moving the connecting pins without first properly posi-
any time while assembling or disassembling the
tioning pendants will cause the boom to fall. If you are
boom.
under the boom when it falls, you may be killed. If there
3. Do not climb, stand, or walk on the boom. Use a
is any doubt in your mind about the boom disassembly
ladder or similar device to reach necessary areas.
procedure, block tightly under both ends of each boom
4. When removing or installing the boom section
section before removing any of the connecting pins.
connecting pins, drive the pins from the outside of
The following points must be observed while the boom toward the inside.
performing any boom assembly or disassembly:

Operator’s Manual
Pendants Tight And

Located Behind Boom Right
Connection To Be
Disassembled.
Centerline Of
Boom Straight.
Boom Head Machinery
Just Resting On Blocking.
Lower Pins Only

May Be Removed.
Lower Pins Removed.
Pendants Incorrectly Wrong

Located In Front Of
Connection To Be
Disassembled.
WARNING − BOOM WILL FALL!
Pendants Were
Located Behind Boom
Connection To Be Wrong
Disassembled.
Boom Head Machinery
Was Not Resting On
Blocking When The Upper Pins Removed.
Pins Were Removed.
Figure 1−13
Pin Connected Boom Disassembly

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Point Of Suspension
Amount Of Boom
Being Cantilevered

Block under the boom top section. Cantilevering The Boom
5. Always wear proper eye protection when driving 9. Know the maximum amount of boom that can be
connecting pins. cantilevered, (projected beyond point of suspen-
6. Block under the boom top section before unpin- sion) during boom assembly and disassembly. Ex-
ning from extensions. Since the top section is ta- ceeding this amount can cause boom or boom
pered, it will fall to the ground when unpinned. This suspension failure. Refer to Section 4 of this Oper-
could result in an accident. ator’s Manual for specific boom assembly proce-
7. Do not remove any connecting pins which are dures.
located behind the pendants which are supporting 10. If the boom length is such that mid-point or inter-
the boom. mediate suspensions are required, make sure they
8. Stay clear of pinch points when aligning boom are installed and properly adjusted. Long booms
section connecting lugs. Never place your fingers may buckle in the middle from their own weight
in connecting pin holes. without this suspension.
11. Use caution when disconnecting the dead end of
wire ropes. Reeved rope can become twisted on
the sheaves. When the dead end pin or socket is
removed, the rope may spin.

Operator’s Manual
Right Right
Wrong
1 2
1. Use The Connecting Lugs Or Main Chords As Lifting Points.

2. Do Not Attach Slings To Lattices, They Will Bend.
Figure 1−16
Handling Lattice Boom Sections
12. Use care handling the boom and jib sections when
loading, transporting, and unloading. Also pay 1 2
attention to the bar pendants stored on top of each
boom section. Damage that occurs during these
operations can go undetected and could result in
failure of the attachment. Do not attach slings to
the lattices as they will bend. Use the connecting
lugs or main chords as the lifting points. Use only
soft nylon straps minimum 3 inches (7.62cm) in
width of sufficient strength to handle sections.
13. Block under and between the boom and jib sec-
tions when loading them on a transport vehicle.
When securing sections to a transport vehicle, it is
best to use synthetic webs or slings. If using wire
rope slings, pad the section to protect it from dam-
age. Do not overtighten the tie downs or you may
damage the section. Do not use chain tie downs, 3 6
as they may dent and damage the section. 5
4
14. Thoroughly inspect all the elements of each boom
or jib section before installing it on the crane. 1. Connecting Lug 4. Picture Frame
Check each main chord, picture frame, diagonal, 2. Bar Pendant 5. Lattices
3. Diagonal 6. Main Chord
lattice, connecting lug, and bar pendants, for
bends, dents, and cracked or corroded welds. Pic- Figure 1−17
ture frames must be square. Do not use any boom Boom Section Nomenclature
or jib section that is even slightly damaged. Con-
sult your local distributor for the proper repair pro-
cedures.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD.
Keep all parts of crane and
load at least 15 ft (4.57m)
from electrical lines or as
stated in local code. Consult
Operator’s Manual for
minimum required
clearances.
Stay away from crane

if close to power lines.
Crane, load, and
ground can become
electrified and deadly.
Consult Operator’s
Manual for minimum
required clearance.
Figure 1−18
Stay away from power lines.
Minimum Required Clearance For Normal Electrical Dangers

Voltage In Operation Near High Voltage Power 1. All electrical power lines are dangerous. Contact
Lines And Operation In Transit With No Load with them, whether insulated or not, can cause
And Boom Or Mast Lowered. death or injury. When operating near power lines,
Minimum Required the best rule is to have the power company turn off
Normal Voltage, kV
Clearance, ft (m) the power and ground the lines. However, in some
(Phase to Phase)
See Note 1 cases, the operator may be unable to have the
Operation Near High Voltage Power Lines power turned off. Follow these rules whether the
To 200 15 (4.57) power is turned off or not.
a. Be alert. You are working around conditions
Over 200 To 350 20 (6.10) which can cause death.
Over 350 To 500 25 (7.62) b. Keep all parts of the crane, fall lines, hook
Over 500 To 750 35 (10.67) block, and load, at least 15 ft (4.57m) away
Over 750 To 1000 45 (13.72) from power lines or as specified in the High
Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart" or other
Operation in Transit with no Load and Boom or
distances specified by applicable codes. Slow
Mast Lowered
down crane operation.
To 345 15 (4.57) c. Assume that every line is electrically energized
Over 345 To 750 16 (4.87) (Hot" or Live").
Over 750 To 1000 20 (6.10) d. Appoint a reliable person equipped with a loud
Note 1: Environmental conditions such as fog, signal (whistle or horn) to warn the operator
smoke, or precipitation may require increased when any part of the crane is working around
clearances. the power line. This person should have no
other duties while the crane is working around
High Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart
the power line.
e. Erect a suitable barricade to physically restrain
the crane and all attachments (including the
load) from entering an unsafe distance from
the power source.

Operator’s Manual
ÁÁÁ
Wrong Wrong
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Shaded area shows sensitivity zone" with full boom length Shaded area shows sensitivity zone" with the probe near the
sensor used, and adjusted for 15 ft (4.57m) clearance. Contact boom peak and adjusted for 15 ft (4.57m) clearance. Contact can
can be made outside this zone by the hoist wire rope, winch be made outside this zone by the hoist wire rope, winch rope, cab,
rope, cab, etc. In such cases, the alarm will not sound, but the etc. In such cases, the alarm will not sound, but the crane will be
crane will be electrified and deadly. electrified and deadly.

Crane equipped with proximity Crane equipped with proximity
warning device on the entire boom. warning device on the boom tip.
f. Warn all personnel of the potential danger. h. Grounding the crane can increase the danger.
Don’t allow unnecessary persons in the area. Poor grounding such as a pipe driven into the
Don’t allow anyone to lean against or touch the ground, will give little or no protection. In addi-
crane. Don’t allow ground workers to hold tion, a grounded crane may strike an arc so
load lines, or rigging gear unless absolutely heavy that a live line may be burned down.
necessary. In these cases use dry plastic This could cause the crane and the area
ropes as tether lines. Make certain everyone around it to be electrified.
stays at least 15 ft (4.57m) away from the load, i. When operating near radio or T.V. transmitting
or a distance specified in the High Voltage stations, high voltage can be induced in metal
Power Line Clearance Chart", or such distance parts of the crane, or in the load. This can oc-
as required by applicable codes. cur even if the crane is some distance from the
g. The use of boom point guards, proximity de- transmitter or antenna. Painful, dangerous
vices, insulated hooks or swing limit stops do shocks could occur. Consult trained electronic
not assure safety. Even if codes or regulations personnel before operating the crane to deter-
require the use of such devices, you must fol- mine how to avoid electrical hazards.
low rules listed here. If you do not follow them, j. Overhead lines can move when the wind blows
the result could be serious injury or death. against them. Allow for this when determining
safe operating distances.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong Wrong
1 1
This Man Is Not Protected.

1. Insulated Link if wet or contaminated will not provide
protection.
1. Insulated Link
Figure 1−22
Figure 1−21 Crane equipped with insulated link
Crane equipped with insulated link. and boom point guard.
2. What do you do if a power line is touched by a g. If you must leave the crane, don’t step off.
crane or load? Leap from the crane as far as you can, landing
a. Remain Calm − think − a mistake can kill with feet together, then hop away from the
someone. crane with feet together, or shuffle feet to keep
b. Warn all personnel to keep clear. them close together. This could help prevent
c. If crane will still operate, try to move it away personal injury.
from contact. You, the operator are reasonably 3. When using a magnet:
safe in the cab unless the crane is on fire or an a. Lifting magnet generators produce voltage in
arc is cutting through the cab. excess of 200 volts and present an electrical
d. Move away from contact in the reverse direc- shock hazard. Only trained personnel should
tion to that which caused the contact. Exam- work on the magnet, controller, or wiring.
ple: If you swing left to the wire, swing to the Don’t open the controller door with the genera-
right to break contact. Remember − once an tor running.
arc has been struck, it will stretch out much far- b. Do not let workmen touch magnet or load.
ther than you think before it breaks. Keep mov- c. Do not let workmen get between magnet and a
ing until the arc has been broken. metal object.
e. When the arc breaks, continue moving away d. If necessary to position a load, use a dry,
until you are at least 15 ft (4.57m) away (or a wooden stick.
distance specified in the High Voltage Power e. Open magnet disconnect switch at magnet
Line Clearance Chart" or as specified by local control panel before connecting or discon-
codes). Stop the crane. Make a thorough in- necting leads.
spection for crane damage before further use.
f. If you cannot disengage from the electrical
line, and the crane is not on fire or no arc is cut-
ting through the cab, stay in your seat until
power line can be turned off.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong Wrong

No hook riders! Use a signalman, back safely.
Protective Equipment can assist the operator in performing his duties,

but he should not rely on them to keep him out of
1. Always replace protective guards and panels be-
trouble.
fore operating the crane.
2. Always wear hard hats, safety glasses, steel toe Signalmen And Bystanders
shoes, hearing protection, and any other safety
1. Don’t allow crane boom or loads to pass over peo-
equipment required by local job conditions,
ple, or endanger their safety. Remove all loose ob-
OSHA, or regulations. Do not wear loose clothing
jects from load. All unnecessary personnel should
which could get caught in moving machinery.
leave the immediate area when crane is operating.
3. Always wear safety glasses when drilling, grinding
2. Do not allow anyone to ride on the hook ball, hook
or hammering. Flying chips could injure the eyes.
block, or any part of the load or attachment for
4. Keep a dry chemical or carbon dioxide fire extin-
construction work or recreational activities. (This
guisher of 5BC rating or larger in the cab or in the
applies to recreational activities such as bungee
immediate area of the crane at all times. Instruct all
jumping" or bungee cord jumping".) Cranes are
operating and maintenance personnel in proper
intended to lift objects, not people. They are not
use of the extinguisher. Check periodically to
elevators.
make sure it is fully charged and in working order.
3. Always look before you back up, or better yet, post
5. Do not tamper with safety devices. Keep them in
a signalman to guide you. If crane is equipped with
good repair and properly adjusted. They were put
a back up alarm, make sure it is working properly.
on the crane for your protection.
Use the horn as a signal. Use a code such as one
6. When operating a crane equipped with any form of
beep − stop, two beeps − forward, and three
load indicating mechanism, overload warning sys-
beeps − backward. Make sure everyone on the
tem, anti-two block system or any automatic safety
job site knows the code.
device, remember that such devices cannot re-
4. Do not make a lift which is not in plain sight. This
place the skill and judgment of a good operator.
can lead to an accident or crane damage. Post a
For instance, such devices cannot tell when a
signalman if necessary to fully observe the situ-
crane is located on a supporting surface that will
ation and guide the operator.
give away, that too few parts of line are being used
to lift a load, cannot correct for the effects of wind,
warn that the device may be improperly adjusted,
correct for side pulls on the boom, or for many con-
ditions which could occur and create hazards. It
requires all the skill, experience, judgment, and
safety consciousness that a good operator can de-
velop to attain safe operation. Many safety devices

Operator’s Manual
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 3. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe-
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci-
ties, an inspection of the major structural areas of
DANGER the crane, for cracks or other damage, should be
CRANE OUT OF SERVICE
conducted on a regular basis. (A non-destructive
test such as magnetic particle or dye penetrant
Do not operate the crane or start may even be considered.) Along with inspection
the engine without first notifying for cracks and damage, frequently check the criti-
cally loaded fasteners, such as the turntable bear-
this mechanic. Personnel within
the crane could be hurt or killed. ing mounting capscrews, to ensure they have not
Crane damage may also result from been stretched. Not only does frequent inspection
premature operation of systems promote safety, but it is also much easier and less
expensive to perform a repair when a crack is
which are still under repair.
Signed: small, before it has a chance to traverse through a
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ structural member. Any sign of cracks or damage

must be repaired before continuing operations.
Consult your distributor for repairs.
Figure 1−25
4. When performing maintenance on the crane, do
Remove the keys from the ignition and post a
the following:
sign to make others aware of repair activity.
a. Lower the boom to the ground.
b. Shutdown the engine and work all control lev-
ers back and forth to relieve pressure and relax
the attachment.
c. If the above instructions cannot be followed,
block securely under the attachment so it can-
not move.
d. Bleed any precharge off the hydraulic reservoir
before disconnecting any line.
e. Hydraulic oil becomes hot during operation. In
some cases it becomes hot enough to cause
severe burns. Be careful not to let hydraulic oil
come in contact with skin.
f. Disconnect battery cables and remove ignition
key so crane can’t be started. Post warning
signs in cab so no one will try to start the en-
gine. Never adjust, maintain or repair a crane
while it is in operation.
Figure 1−26 5. When making repairs, which require welding, use
Allow engine to cool before removing the proper welding procedures. Also the following
radiator cap. precautions must be taken:
a. All paint in the area should be removed to pre-
vent burning the paint. The smoke and fumes
Crane Inspections And Adjustments from the burning paint can be very hazardous.
1. Inspect crane daily. Do not operate a damaged or b. Disconnect the batteries from the upper.
poorly maintained crane. Pay particular attention c. The welding ground cable should be attached
to the clutches, brakes, attachments, and wire to the portion of the crane being welded. If
ropes. If a component is worn or damaged, re- welding on the upper, ground on the upper. If
place it before operating. Clutch and brake linings welding on the crawler ground on the crawler.
must be dry and oil free. Oil soaked linings must be Failure to take this precaution may result in
replaced. electrical arcs in the turntable bearing.
2. Labels, plates, decals, etc. should be periodically d. The welding ground cable should always be
inspected and cleaned as necessary to maintain connected as close as possible to the area be-
good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction, ing welded. This minimizes the distance that
caution, warning, or danger labels, decals, or electricity must travel.
plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they
must be replaced.

Operator’s Manual
e. Disconnect computers and other electronic
equipment (such as rated capacity limiters) to
prevent damage. Contact the distributor or
factory for proper procedures.
f. Remove all flammables from the proximity of
the welding area.
6. Keep the crane clean, in good repair, and in proper
adjustment. Oil or grease on the decks may cause
falls. Improper adjustments can lead to crane
damage, load dropping, or other malfunctions.
7. Use extreme caution when removing radiator
caps, hydraulic pressure caps, etc. They can fly off
and hit you, or you could be burned by hot oil,
water, or steam.
8. When checking battery fluid level, use a flashlight,
not an open flame. If the battery explodes, you can
get acid in your eyes, which could cause blind-
ness. Don’t check battery charge by shorting
across posts. The resulting spark could cause the
battery to explode. Check with a tester or hy-
drometer. Don’t smoke near batteries.
Figure 1−27
Do not use an open flame near the battery.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead 11. Always reduce pressure in hydraulic system to
compounds. Wash hands after handling. zero before working on any part of the system.
12. Use extreme care when working on circuits with
9. When using jumper cables to start an engine, be accumulators. Check that hydraulic pressure is re-
sure to connect negative post to negative post, and lieved before opening the circuit for repairs.
positive post to positive post. Always connect the 13. When setting pressures, never exceed the manu-
two positive posts first. Then make one negative facturer’s ratings. Always follow instructions ex-
post connection. Make the final negative connec- actly. Over pressurization can cause hydraulic
tion a safe distance from the battery. It can be component damage or failure of mechanical parts
made on almost any bare metal spot on the crane. on the crane. Either of the above can lead to an ac-
Any spark could cause the battery to explode. cident.
10. Test the winch brake by raising the load a few
inches and holding. It should hold without slip-
ping. It takes more braking power to hold a load in
the air when the drum is full of rope than when it is a
few inches above the ground with only a few wraps
on the drum.

Operator’s Manual
Thursday . . . . .
Wrong
I thought I could save

money by running this
rope until Friday".
Figure 1−29
Pinch Point Label
Figure 1−28 Crane And Area Clearance

Do not operate the crane 1. Know your job site conditions. Familiarize yourself
with worn or damaged wire rope. with work site obstructions and other potential haz-
ards in the area which might lead to mishaps.
Make any necessary arrangements to eliminate
Wire Rope
any potential hazards, if possible.
1. Inspect all wire rope thoroughly. OSHA (Occupa-
2. Erect barricades around the immediate work area
tional Safety And Health Act) regulations state a
to prevent unauthorized personnel from wander-
thorough inspection of all ropes shall be made
ing onto the job site.
once a day and a full written, dated, and signed re-
3. Be sure your work area is clear. Make sure you
port of the rope condition be kept on file where
have proper clearance for the crane, boom, and
readily available." Replace any worn or damaged
load. Don’t swing, travel, lift, or lower loads, raise
rope. Pay particular attention to winch ropes.
or lower jacks, without first making sure no one is in
Check end connections (pins, sockets, wedges,
the way. If your vision is obscured, locate a signal-
etc.) for wear or damage.
man so you can see him, and he can see all areas
2. Use at least the number or parts of winch line
you can’t. Follow his signals. Be sure you and the
specified on the Wire Rope Capacity chart located
signalman understand each other’s signals. See
in the Crane Rating Manual to handle the load. Lo-
Hand Signal Chart Figure 1−77. Use the horn to
cal codes may require more parts of line than is
signal or warn. Make sure everyone on the job site
shown. Check code requirements and use them
understands signals before starting operations.
where applicable.
4. When working inside a building, check overhead
3. Non-rotating, rotation-resistant, or spin-resistant
clearance to avoid a collision. Check load limits on
wire ropes are recommended for single part of line
floors or ramps so you won’t crash through.
applications. This is of utmost importance for long
5. Don’t operate close to an overhang or deep ditch.
fall hoist line applications. Only if certain criteria are
Avoid falling rocks, slides, etc. Don’t park crane
met may a swivel hook ball be used with rotation
where a bank can fall on it, or it can fall in an exca-
resistant rope. Refer to Single Part Line Hoisting"
vation. Don’t park where rain can wash out footing.
and Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant
6. Pinch points, which result from relative motion be-
Rope" found in section 5 of this Operator’s Manual.
tween mechanical parts, can cause injury. Keep
4. Do not handle wire rope with bare hands. Always
clear of the rotating upper or moving parts.
use gloves to prevent possible injury from frayed or
7. Watch the tailswing of the upper revolving frame
damaged areas in the rope.
and counterweight. Even though the original set
5. Inspect head machinery and hook block often as
up may have been clear, situations change.
damaged or deteriorating sheaves can cause un-
8. Do not store material under or near electrical
necessary wear of the wire rope.
power sources. Make material handlers aware of
6. When reeving wire rope on the crane, do not climb,
the dangers involved with storing material under
stand, or walk on the boom or jib. Use a ladder or
power lines or in the vicinity of any other hazards.
similar device to reach necessary areas.

Operator’s Manual
Weights, Lengths, And Radii
1. Know your load. Don’t try to guess or estimate the
Wrong
load. Use a scale or a load indicating system to de-
termine exact weight. Remember the weight you
are lifting includes the weight of any lifting slings or It looked like
gear, the hook block, and any other weight on the about 5 tons".
hook. If lifting off the boom with the jib installed, the
weight of the jib and rigging must also be consid-
ered as part of the load. Refer to the capacity de-
ductions chart located in the Crane Rating Manual
for amounts to be deducted.
The total load weight must never exceed the rated
capacity of the crane, as listed on the capacity
charts in the Crane Rating Manual for the position,
boom length, load radius, and condition of opera-
tion being used. Remember − the rating listed on
the capacity charts in the Crane Rating Manual are
based on ideal conditions:
a. Standing on firm, level surface.
b. Calm wind.
c. No side loads or out swing of load.
d. Good visibility.
Figure 1−30
e. Crane in top condition and equipped as when Know your load.
leaving the factory.
When such conditions can not be attained, loads 2. Avoid working a crane in high winds. If you must
being handled must be reduced to compensate. work in a wind, reduce capacities considerably be-
The amount loads are reduced depends upon how low those shown on the capacity chart in the Crane
good or how poor, the actual operating conditions Rating Manual. Wind blowing against the load and
are. It is a matter of judgment and experience. the boom produces a side load on the boom and
When in doubt, do not take a chance. Reduce rat- reduces its capacity.
ings more than you think you need. Some factors 3. When operating off the main boom with the jib or
which may require reduction of capacities are: other attachment erected, deductions must be
a. Soft or unpredictable supporting surfaces. made for its weight. The weight of the added at-
b. Wind. tachment, pendants, etc., must be considered to
c. Hazardous surroundings. obtain a NET" capacity. Failure to do so could re-
d. Inexperienced personnel. sult in an overloading condition and cause boom
e. Poor visibility. failure. Refer to the capacity deductions chart lo-
f. Fragile loads. cated in the Crane Rating Manual for amounts to
g. Crane in poor condition. be deducted.
When lifting loads with large surface areas, (such
as building panels), in a wind the movement of the
load may pose a danger to workmen or building
structures. Out swing of a load will increase the
load radius, and may overload the crane. This
could lead to boom failure or the crane tipping.

Operator’s Manual
service life, while performing repetitive lift applica-
tions, consider reducing the capacities to 70% of
Wrong maximum strength limited capacities to reduce fa-
tigue cracking. Frequently perform a thorough in-
spection of all the structural areas of the crane.
Any sign of cracks or damage must be repaired be-
fore continuing operations. Consult your distribu-
tor for repairs.
9. Always refer to the appropriate capacity chart in
the Crane Rating Manual after changing the ar-
rangement of the attachments for the correct lifting
capacities.
10. All booms must be assembled in the correct man-
ner before making a lift. The capacity charts in the
Crane Rating Manual for such booms is based on
proper boom make up. Correct placement of
boom extensions, based on length and chord wall
thickness, is crucial. Refer to Section 4 of this Op-
erator’s Manual for correct boom section arrange-
ments.
11. Do not use the boom to push or pull. It is not de-
signed for this purpose. Such action can damage
Figure 1−31 the boom and lead to an accident.
Do not lift two loads at the same time. 12. Know the load radius. Don’t guess at it. Determine
the load radius by using the boom angle indicator,
4. Do not lift loads on the boom and fly or tip extension the boom length and the capacity chart, or meas-
at the same time, even if the total load weight is ure it with a steel tape. Remember − Radius is the
within crane capacity. Loads on the boom and jib horizontal distance from the centerline of rotation
or tip extension at the same time, stress the boom of the upper to the center of gravity of the load,
and drastically reduce its ability to handle loads. when the load is hanging free.
Your full attention cannot be given to both loads, 13. Do not operate the crane at radii or lengths where
creating a dangerous situation. the capacity charts in the Crane Rating Manual
5. Some capacities on cranes are based on strength shows no capacity. Don’t use a boom or jib not
of materials. In these cases, overloads will cause shipped with or for your crane. Either of the above
something on the crane to break, before it will tip. can tip the crane over or cause attachment failure.
Do not use signs of tipping as a warning of over- In some cases, the crane can tip over with no load
load. on the hook, forward or backward! Also, if the
6. Don’t lash a crane down. Lashing a crane down boom is long at a low angle, the crane may tip until
encourages overloading. Crane damage or injury the boom touches the ground. In any of these
could result. cases, injury or crane damage could result.
7. Do not shock load and/or overload the crane at 14. When you lift a load with any crane, the load may
anytime. Shock loading or overloading the crane swing out, or sideways. The load radius will in-
will reduce the fatigue life of crane components crease. The increase or out swing of the load can
and could result in component failure. overload the boom, and lead to boom failure or tip-
8. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe- ping. Also, movement of the load can cause it to hit
cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci- something. Make sure the load being lifted will re-
ties, be aware that these applications may reduce main within capacity as it is lifted and the boom de-
component life. These applications include re- flects.
peated lifting (or lifting and swinging) of near 100% 15. When lowering a boom with a load, the load radius
strength limited capacities and repeated lifting increases. As the load radius increases, capacity
maximum moment loads. These applications may decreases. If capacity is exceeded, the boom may
fatigue the major structural portions of the crane. bend or the crane may tip. Sometimes at low an-
Although the crane may not break during these ap- gles, the boom can be lowered with a load, but
plications, they can reduce the fatigue life and cannot be raised. If an operator lowers the boom
shorten the service life of the crane. To improve the under load, he may not be able to raise the boom
and may get into a dangerous situation.

Operator’s Manual
Right
Wrong
Figure 1−33
Figure 1−32 Boom Angle And Single Part Line Operation.
Use caution when booming to minimum radius
18. When booming down, the load will move away
16. Use caution when booming up to minimum radius. from the crane and lower as well. To keep the load
Be prepared to stop boom travel. If the boom limit from lowering as it moves away from the crane, the
device malfunctions, the boom and backstops operator must hoist up on the winch rope simulta-
may be damaged, or someone may be hurt. Do neously. When booming up, the load will move to-
not intentionally boom into boom limit device dur- ward the crane as well as raise. When booming up,
ing normal operation. the operator must hoist down as well to keep from
17. When operating near minimum radius, be ready to raising the load. Booming up without winching
boom down as you set the load down, to compen- down, can lead to two blocking". This is when the
sate for the tendency of the boom to move back hook block or the hook ball contacts the head ma-
against the backstops when the load is released. chinery. Two blocking can lead to sheave or rope
This action occurs because of the elasticity in the damage.
boom and boom hoist system. Severe bending in 19. Know the boom length. Don’t guess. Use of an in-
the boom can occur if it is allowed to bear against correct boom length can cause an accident.
the backstops too heavily. 20. Use special care when handling loads on single
part line with boom at or near minimum radius. In
single line operation, make sure angle A" is always
greater than angle B", or the boom could fall back-
wards uncontrollably. Refer to Figure 1−33. This
situation is more likely when the winch line is off the
rear drum. Four (4) parts of hoist line and a hook
block must be used at or near minimum radius on
all booms 100 ft (30.5m) or less.

Operator’s Manual
Just a little side tilt when
working over the end. Wrong
SIDE TILT
Wrong
2 1
1. Load Radius At Rest
2. Load Radius Increases Due To Centrifugal Force
Look what happens Figure 1−35

over the side. . . . Watch that centrifugal force!
Wrong
This lean will increase operating radius so the load
will swing outward when it clears the ground. This
out swing is dangerous to anything in the path of
the load, and because of the increase in load ra-
dius may overload the crane. To overcome this out
swing, boom up as the load is lifted so winch ropes
remain vertical. When setting the load on the
ground, lower boom after the load touches down to
avoid hook block spinning when it is unhooked
from load, or the boom contacting the backstops.
22. Lifting heavy loads can cause the crane to tilt or
lean toward the load. When swinging a load from
over the end to over the side, the tilt of the crane will
increase. Since tilt acts to increase load radius, it
must be compensated for when swinging the load.
LOAD RADIUS INCREASES Swing slowly. Change boom angle (raise the
BY THE AMOUNT OF SIDE TILT! boom) while swinging, to maintain a constant ra-
dius, and prevent in swing or out swing of load. If
Figure 1−34
not, a dangerous condition could result.
Watch that side tilt!
23. Watch out for centrifugal force when swinging a
load. Swing gently. Centrifugal force tends to in-
21. The winch rope must be vertical when starting to crease load radius. This increase in radius could
lift. If not, the load will swing in, out, or sideways overload the crane and cause crane damage or tip-
when lifted from the ground. The crane will lean to- ping. When stopping the swing, over swing of the
ward the load when lifting heavy loads. This is load can side load the boom.
caused by elasticity of the crane and the boom.

Operator’s Manual
24. Keep the winch ropes as short as possible to pre-
vent excessive swinging. Always use the shortest
boom length which will do the job. Remember − Wrong
the shorter the boom, the better the capacity.
25. Do not move a crane away from the load while han-
dling near capacity loads. Due to load inertia
(weight) the load will tend to stay in position when
the crane starts to move, and then will swing in to-
wards the crane. The inertia effect will tend to in-
crease load radius and decrease stability. This
could lead to boom failure or crane tipping.
26. Know how much counterweight is on the crane.
The capacity chart may list different capacities for
differing amounts of counterweight. Make sure
you know how your crane is equipped and use the
correct column on the chart to ensure proper load
limitations. Figure 1−36
Don’t modify the counterweight(s). Don’t store If possible, go around obstacles.
anything on the crane that will act as additional
counterweight. Remember that anything which 2. Cross a gully or ditch at an angle and very slowly.
has weight, if carried behind the crane’s center of Carry boom at a low angle for increased stability.
gravity, acts as counterweight. Adding counter- 3. Avoid side-hill travel whenever possible. Travel up
weight affects backward stability of the crane, par- or down the slope. Shift crane to lowest speed
ticularly when working over the side. It also en- when starting up or down the slope. Keep the
courages overloading of the crane. boom facing downhill and close to the ground.
Traveling up the hill with the boom at a high angle
The 24,000 lb (10 886kg) A" auxiliary lower coun-
should be avoided. Depending upon the slope of
terweights (48,000 lb [21 773kg] total) must be
the grade, the angle may be such as to allow the
installed prior to ABC" upper counterweights be-
boom to fall backwards over the crawler. If the
ing installed. ABC" upper counterweights must
crane starts slipping sideways on a grade, immedi-
be removed prior to removal of A" auxiliary lower
ately turn the crane down the grade.
counterweights. Failure to do so will result in a
4. When moving the crane around on the job site with
backward tipping condition.
the attachment in the air, observe the following pre-
27. Working areas for cranes are defined per the Work-
cautions:
ing Areas Diagram located in the Crane Rating
a. Swing upper so it is in line with tracks over front
Manual. Permissible loads, per the Crane Rating
or rear of the crawler. Engage the swing lock.
Manual, may vary from lifting quadrant to lifting
b. Terrain must be smooth and solid. If not, grade
quadrant. The operator must make sure capacity
the area before moving the crane.
ratings are not exceeded regardless of which
c. Tie down the hook block to prevent its swing-
quadrant he is operating in, or when swinging from
ing when moving.
one quadrant to another.
d. The boom must be positioned at a boom angle
for which a capacity is given in the Crane Rat-
Traveling
ing Manual for the current configuration of the
1. Avoid traveling over obstacles: rough terrain,
crane. All other boom angles are considered
rocks, logs, curbs, ditches, etc. The size and type
out of the allowable working range of the crane
of obstacle that can be safely crossed will depend
and no travel is allowed. Position the boom at a
on many factors, including good judgment. When
lower boom angle when traveling up or down a
obstructions must be crossed, do so with extreme
grade as this is a more stable condition.
caution, at an angle if possible, and at slow speed.
e. Position a signalman to guide you.
Ease up to the break over point, balance on the ob-
f. Avoid traveling on a grade, particularly a side
struction, and then ease down to minimize jolt of
slope. If you must travel up a slope, back up
contact of the other side.
the grade for maximum crane stability and
minimum side loadings.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Figure 1−37
Watch for narrow or low clearances.
5. Traveling with a suspended load should be f. Use a signalman to warn of any danger or ob-
avoided if possible. It is especially hazardous struction along the route being traveled.
when terrain is rough or irregular, on a side slope, g. Don’t travel with a load on soft ground. If the
or in a hilly area. When traveling with a load, ob- crane sinks into ground, stability can be af-
serve the following rules: fected to the point of tipping the crane.
a. Use a hand line to control the load and reduce h. Keep all personnel clear of crane and load. Be
load swing. prepared to set load down quickly at any time.
b. Travel by the smoothest, most level route. If a 6. Road the crane safely. Watch for narrow bridges
smooth, level route is not available, don’t travel and low clearances. Check load limits, heights,
with a suspended load. Grade the route to pro- width and length restrictions in the area you are
vide a smooth, level path. If it is not possible to traveling. Make sure your crane complies with all
grade the route, move the load by stepping. regulations.
Level the crane, lift the load and set it down 7. When transporting the crane, note the following:
ahead of the crane. Travel the unloaded crane a. Operate with lights on. Use proper warning
beyond the load, level the crane, lift the load, signs, flags and other devices. Use an escort
swing and set it down farther along the route. service if required.
Continue this procedure until the load is at its b. Engage swing lock.
destination. c. Remove or restrain the hook block.
c. Carry loads as close to the ground as possible. d. Check for maximum allowable travel speed,
d. Do not allow side swing of the load. maximum amount of boom that can be trans-
e. Don’t attempt to carry loads which exceed the ported, and any other travel limitations. Don’t
crane’s rating as listed in the Crane Rating exceed these maximums. Crane damage or
Manual. an accident could result.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Figure 1−38
Do not leave the crane with a load suspended.
Leaving The Station Personnel Handling Guidelines

1. Do not get on or off a crane in motion. Remain in
three point contact at all times (two hands and one Introduction
foot or two feet and one hand) when climbing on or
The following information is intended to provide
off the crane. If a ladder is provided, use it.
Link-Belt’s recommended minimum requirements that
2. Whenever an operator leaves the control station for
must be followed when handling personnel with a
any reason, the following must be done:
personnel basket or work platform (hereafter referred
a. Lower the load to the ground.
to as a platform) suspended by wire rope from the
b. Engage the swing lock, engage all drum pawls
boom of Link-Belt cranes. These requirements are
and move the control lockout switch to the off
based upon several sources and are put forth in
position. Shutdown the engine and remove
recognition of current industry practices. However,
the keys.
safety, when handling personnel, remains the
c. Do not depend on a brake to suspend a load
responsibility of job site management and is
unless the operator is at the controls, alert and
dependent upon the responsible action of every
ready to handle the load. Brake pedal locks
person on the job involved in the related work.
are intended to allow the operator to rest his
legs when suspending a load, but the operator This information is intended to supplement and not to
must remain in his seat with his feet on the ped- supercede or replace any more restrictive federal,
als. Brake slippage, vandalism or mechanical state, or local regulations, safety codes, or insurance
malfunctions could cause the load to drop. requirements. It is intended to serve users of personnel
3. Do not leave crane unattended with engine run- platforms in achieving the following objectives.
ning. 1. Reduce risk of personal injuries to users and the
4. When changing work shifts be sure to notify the public.
next operator of any changes or problems with the 2. Inform users of their respective responsibilities.
crane. 3. Provide standards of equipment requirements.
4. Provide standards for tests and inspections.
5. Provide standards of operation to promote safety.

Operator’s Manual
Link-Belt cranes are designed and intended for han- meets applicable design standards (refer to ANSI
dling material. They are not normally equipped with A10−28).
secondary systems or other devices required by per- 5. Review of the personnel lifting operation practices
sonnel lift or elevator standards and are not intended specified in these instructions have been
for handling personnel for construction or amusement conducted with crane operator(s), foreman, signal
purposes. Use of cranes for these purposes is hazard- person, personnel to be lifted, safety supervisor,
ous and is not recommended by Link-Belt. However, and any other person who has jurisdiction over the
Link-Belt understands that circumstances may occur operation to ensure that they are aware of the haz-
(in construction work) when lifting or lowering person- ards of the operation and they are aware of provi-
nel on a materials handling crane load line is the only or sions of these instructions that must be adhered to
the least hazardous method available to position per- before and during the personnel lifting operation.
sonnel. In fact, Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
istration (OSHA) Part 29 CFR 1926.550(g) states The Equipment
use of a crane or derrick to hoist employees on a per- 1. The crane/platform system shall be equipped with
sonnel platform is prohibited, except when the erec- the following:
tion, use, and dismantling of conventional means of
reaching the work site, such as personnel hoist, ladder, Note: All these operational aids must be main-
stairway, aerial lift, elevating work platform, or scaffold tained in operable condition.
would be more hazardous or is not possible because of
a. An anti-two block device to prevent damage to
structural design or work site conditions."
the hoist rope, other crane components, or at-
Much corollary and supplementary information is con- tachments, and subsequent endangerment of
tained within the following resource documents per- personnel.
taining to both cranes and personnel platforms.
S It is required that the anti-two block device
S American National Standards Institute Reference −
warn both audibly and visually as well as
ANSI Standards A10.28, A92.2, A92.3, B30.5, and
have the capability to lockout those controls/
B30.23.
functions that may cause a two block condi-
S Power Crane and Shovel Association (PCSA) Bureau
of the Association of Equipment Manufacturers tion.
(AEM) Reference − PCSA Standard No. 4. b. Boom hoist and load line shall have power low-
S American Petroleum Institute (A.P.I.) Specification ering and raising and shall have an automatic
2C. brake which is applied when the applicable
S OSHA Part 29, CFR 1926.550 Cranes and Derricks. control is in neutral, or when the anti-two block
device is actuated.
Authorization c. If the crane is equipped with a free-fall" hoist,
Authorized use of a work platform may be permitted steps shall be taken to ensure its use is not
only after the following on-site procedures have been possible during the use of the work platform.
performed: (Note: A.P.I. applications do not permit the
1. The person on the job site specifically responsible crane to be equipped with free-fall.)
for the overall work function to be performed has d. A boom angle indicator.
determined that there is no practical alternate way S Cranes with extendable booms must utilize a
to perform the needed work and has authorized a boom angle indicator having high and low"
personnel lifting operation. set points and audible/ visual alarm(s) capa-
2. For each instance of such lifting, the person ble of activating function lockouts.
responsible for the task has attested to the need for S Cranes with fixed boom lengths must have
the operation by issuing a statement describing an accurate and reliable boom angle indica-
the operation and its time frame and itemizing that tor.
each of the on-site authorization requirements has e. Boom length indicator
been met. The statement, after being approved by
S Cranes with extendable booms must utilize a
the authorizer, shall be retained at the job site.
boom length indicator.
3. Review of crane inspection records has been con-
S Cranes with fixed boom lengths do not re-
ducted to ensure the crane being used meets ap-
quire a boom length indicator.
plicable provisions in ANSI B30.5 and B30.23.
4. Review of the work platform inspection records
and specifications has been conducted to ensure it

Operator’s Manual
f. Audible and visual alert systems shall be pro- Sea and weather conditions may create additional
vided to the personnel in the platform to signal hazards beyond the skill of persons involved.
for assistance in the event of an emergency. This operation is approved by the American Petro-
g. Each crane shall have a mechanical swing leum Institute (A.P.I.). By adopting procedures for
lock capable of being set at any swing posi- this operation, the institute has determined that the
tion, and shall have a variable swing brake ca- transfer of personnel may be performed safely un-
pable of stopping the swing motion smoothly. der certain offshore conditions. Therefore, when-
The swing brake must be properly maintained ever an offshore crane is used to transfer person-
at all times to ensure its holding capability. nel, all persons involved in the operation must
2. The platform shall be designed by a qualified engi- know and implement, the A.P.I. procedures and
neer competent in structural design. Its mainte- verify that sea and weather conditions are within
nance, and its attachment to the crane load line, is safe limits for the transfer.
the responsibility of the job site management.
Their arrangement shall comply with the following In addition to all previous requirements in these In-
as a minimum: structions, A.P.I. 2C requires the following:
a. The work platform harness must be of suffi- S Boom and load hoists used shall be approved by
cient length to prevent any portion of the work the hoist manufacturer for personnel handling
platform or the harness from coming in contact and shall be so indicated on their name plate.
with the boom at any boom angle.
b. Hooks on hook ball assemblies, sheave block Refer to A.P.I. 2C Section 6 for further details and
assemblies, or other assemblies, shall be of a procedures.
type that can be closed and locked, eliminat- Inspection and Rigging
ing the hook throat opening, and shall be full
1. The lift crane and work platform shall be inspected
load-bearing, and contain a manual trigger re-
immediately prior to commencement of operation.
lease. A secondary shackle must be applied
Inspection shall include all of the equipment vital to
between the platform and the lower lifting
the safety of the operation. (Refer to ANSI A10−28
block to provide insurance against platform
for inspection procedures for the work platform.)
suspension/connection malfunction.
2. The inspection shall be performed once daily when
3. No unauthorized alterations or modifications shall
the crane is being used in work platform service or
be made to the basic crane.
each time the crane is converted from material lift-
Maintenance ing to personnel handling operation. In the event
the operator is replaced, a new inspection is re-
1. The crane operator must have a complete unders-
quired.
tanding of the crane’s maintenance instructions as
3. Any structural or functional defect which adversely
outlined in this Operator’s Manual.
affects the safe operation of the lift crane shall be
2. The crane shall be maintained as specified in this
corrected before any operation utilizing a work
Operator’s Manual.
platform begins or continues.
3. The crane and platform decals must be un-
4. The hoist drum shall have at least three wraps of
derstood and maintained.
wire rope remaining on the drum at all times when
4. All decal precautions and instructions shall be
using a work platform.
strictly observed.
5. Minimum load hoist and boom hoist wire rope safe-
Additional Requirements for Offshore Cranes ty factors for the combined weight of the lift attach-
1. Link-Belt offshore cranes are designed to handle ments, platform personnel, and tools shall be 7:1
materials. However, due to the special conditions for manufacturer’s specified construction wire
commonly existing offshore, the use of cranes to rope and 10:1 for rotation resistant wire rope.
transfer personnel between vessels or from a ves- (Note: A.P.I. applications require 10:1 for all rope
sel to a platform is an established practice. The construction.)
safety of the personnel, if a materials handling 6. Wire rope ends shall be anchored (attached) to
crane is used in transferring personnel, depends boom, hook balls, hook blocks, and drums using
upon the skill and judgement of the crane operator practices and methods described in the Wire Rope
and alertness of the personnel being transferred. Users Manual published by the Committee of Wire
Rope Producers, American Iron and Steel Institute.

Operator’s Manual
7. No platform shall be suspended from boom exten- Operation And Safety
sions, auxiliary boom noses, jibs, swing away fly 1. This Operator’s Manual for the crane shall be read
sections, or luffing jibs on extendible boom cranes. and understood by operating personnel. It shall be
Suspension of a platform from other than the main available to them at all times.
boom nose is strictly prohibited on extendible 2. Safety when handling personnel remains the re-
boom cranes. sponsibility of job site management and is depen-
8. In addition to other regular inspections, visual in- dent upon the responsible action of every person
spection of crane and platform shall be conducted on the job involved in the related work.
immediately after testing and prior to lifting person- 3. Mobile lift cranes shall be erected to obtain maxi-
nel. mum crane stability. The crane must be level and
9. The crane shall be inspected in accordance with on firm ground with the outriggers fully extended
the requirements of ANSI B30.5, Section 5−2.1.2 and the tires clear of the ground before beginning
and 5−2.4 and ANSI B30.23. any operation.
Crane Test Procedures 4. The operator shall not leave the operator’s station
when the work platform is occupied. The operator
The test procedures listed below shall be conducted at shall remain alert in a position of readiness at the
the following intervals: work station with the engine running and the mas-
S Daily, ter clutch engaged, if crane is so equipped.
S When an operator is replaced, and 5. Unauthorized personnel shall not be in the opera-
S When, in the judgement of responsible job site man- tor’s cab on the lift crane, or near the lift crane while
agement, there has been a significant change in the a work platform is suspended from the load line.
conditions of the personnel lifting operation. 6. Any operation in which a work platform is to be sus-
pended from the load line shall be carefully
Note: No personnel shall ride the work platform dur-
planned by the operator, supervisory personnel,
ing any of the tests recommended in this section.
signal person, and personnel to be lifted prior to
1. The work platform shall be loaded with ballast at commencement of such operation. They are to be
two times the intended load. This load shall not ex- advised:
ceed the rated capacity of the work platform. a. That the crane does not have safety devices
a. This test load shall be tested for stability. normally used on personnel handling equip-
S The operator and signal person shall con- ment.
duct this test. b. That the safety of the operation depends on
S This test shall include movement of the plat- the skill and judgement of the crane operator
form through its entire intended range of mo- and others present.
c. Of procedures to enter and leave the work plat-
tion, simulating the specific operation to be
form and other safety procedures.
undertaken.
7. After positioning of the work platform, all brakes
S A successful stability test will not produce in-
and locks on the lift crane shall be set before per-
stability of the crane or cause permanent de-
sonnel perform any work.
formation of any component.
8. A work platform attached to load line of lift cranes
b. This test load shall be raised and lowered at
shall not be used for working on any energized
maximum power controlled line speed (NOT
electric power line, or any energized device or facil-
FREE-FALL). The acceleration must be
ity used for electric power generation or transmis-
smooth and the deceleration capability of the
sion. Minimum working clearance shall be at least
control/braking system shall be confirmed by
twice that recommended for material handling op-
bringing the work platform to a smooth stop.
erations in ANSI B30.5b section 503.4.5 and ANSI
(This experience is intended to sharpen the
B30.23.
skill of the operator in handling the platform
9. The combined weight of the work platform, any at-
and to give the operator an opportunity to eval-
tachment device, personnel, tools and other
uate the crane’s performance.) The work plat-
equipment shall not exceed 50% of the lifting ca-
form shall then be inspected for any evident
pacity of the applicable lift crane load chart. (Note:
sign of damage or defect.
A.P.I. applications require 25% of lifting capacity as
2. All limiting and warning devices shall be tested by
the limit.)
activation of each appropriate control function.

Operator’s Manual
10. Cranes shall not travel while personnel are on the apply to offshore personnel transfer baskets. Per-
work platform. sonnel must ride on the exterior of this type of per-
11. No lifts shall be made on another of crane’s load sonnel handling device to assure greater safety of
lines with personnel suspended in a work platform. the operation.)
12. No external load shall be lifted by attaching to the 22. When welding is done by personnel on the plat-
work platform. form, the electrode holders shall be protected from
13. Work platform lifts shall be a single crane oper- contact with metal components of the platform. If
ation. A work platform shall not be lifted using two electrically connected electrode holders contact
cranes. work platform, work platform could be dropped
14. Hoisting of personnel shall be discontinued upon due to burning/melting of wire ropes suspending
indication of any dangerous weather conditions or the work platform.
other impending danger.
15. Movement of the work platform with personnel Fire Extinguisher
shall be done in a slow, controlled, cautious man-
ner with no sudden movements of the crane or A fire extinguisher is located in the upper rear of the op-
erator’s cab. Refer to Figure 1−39. It is an A B C type
work platform.
fire extinguisher, meaning it is capable of extinguishing
16. Clear, unobstructed visibility between personnel
most types of fires. The operator should be familiar
on the platform and the crane operator shall be
with its location, the clamp mechanism used to secure
maintained at all times except where a special sig-
it in place, and the operation of the device. Specific in-
nal person has been assigned and positioned
structions, regarding operation, are given on the label
such that he is visible to both. Such signal person
shall have no other duties to perform when person- attached on the fire extinguisher. A charge indicator on
the fire extinguisher monitors the pressure within the
nel are on the platform.
tank. Check the indicator daily to ensure the fire extin-
17. Voice communication between platform person-
guisher is adequately charged and ready for use.
nel, the crane operator, and signal person, if as-
signed, shall be maintained.
18. If other cranes or equipment may interfere with the Operator’s Cab
lifting of personnel, signals or other means of com-
Located throughout the operator’s cab are several
munication between all crane or equipment opera-
consoles and panels which contain the controls,
tors shall be maintained to avoid interference with
switches, and gauges to operate and monitor crane
individual operations. operations. Refer to Figure 1−39. The following is a
19. If the work platform is not landed, it shall be tied to a description of each gauge, switch, or control in each
structure before personnel mount or dismount. panel, along with an explanation of their function
20. Personnel on the platform shall wear personal fall and/or operation.
arrest systems. Anchors used for attachment of
personal fall arrest equipment shall be indepen-
dent of any anchors being used to support or sus-
pend platforms. Personnel shall keep all parts of
WARNING
body, tools, and equipment inside work platform Read and understand all Operating Safety"
during raising, lowering, and positioning. instructions in this Operator’s Manual before
21. Personnel shall always stand firmly on the floor of attempting to operate the crane. This crane
the platform and shall not sit or climb on the edge of should only be operated by a qualified
the platform or use planks, ladders, or other de- operator who has read and understood this
vices for attaining a work position. (This does not entire Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
6 7
4 8
3
9
2 10
1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1. Electrical Control Unit 8. Winch Drum Control Levers 14. Winch Drum Brake Pedal
2. Left Control Console 9. Boom Hoist Control Lever 15. Throttle Pedal
3. Fire Extinguisher 10. Bubble Level 16. Third/Fourth Drum Control Lever
4. Overhead Control Panel 11. Front Control Console 17. Right Control Console
5. Swing Control Lever 12. Cab Fan 18. Swing Lock Control Lever
6. Sun Visor 13. Gate Lock Lever 19. Travel Control Levers
7. Load Moment Limiter Panel
Figure 1−39
Operator’s Cab Controls

Operator’s Manual
Overhead Control Panel
The overhead control panel is located above the opera-
tor’s seat in the rear of the cab. Refer to Figure 1−40.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Operator’s Cab Interior Light
Use switch below the light to turn the light on or off.
2. Cab Fan Switch

This switch controls the cab fan on the floor in front FAN LIGHT ROOF FRONT DC12V
of the operator. Push the switch with −" mark to

operate the fan; push the switch with o" mark to
turn the fan off.
3. Working Light Switch

1. Operator’s Cab Interior Light 4. Roof Wiper Switch
This switch controls the working lights on the up- 2. Cab Fan Switch 5. Front Wiper Switch
per. Push the switch with −" mark to turn the lights 3. Working Light Switch 6. 12V DC Accessory Outlet
on; push the switch with o" mark to turn the lights
off. Figure 1−40
Overhead Control Panel
4. Roof Wiper Switch
This switch controls the roof wiper. Turn the switch hoist or lower function will become disabled. The
clockwise to operate the roof wiper; turn it counter- boom hoist drum control lever will now operate
clockwise to turn it off. Push the switch to spray the only in one position unless the appropriate over-
washer liquid. ride switch is employed. Position the boom, as re-
quired, to turn the light off and silence the voice
5. Front Wiper Switch alarm. For further information, also see Master
This switch controls the front windshield wiper. Control Override Key Switch" and Boom Hoist
Turn the switch clockwise to operate the roof wiper; Limit Override Switch" or Boom Lowering Limit
turn it counterclockwise to turn it off. Push the Override Switch".
switch to spray the washer liquid.
2. Two Block Indicator Light
6. 12V DC Accessory Outlet This light will illuminate any time a two block situa-
Use this outlet for electrical accessories. tion is imminent. The voice alarm Two Block Limit"
will also sound. Use the Anti-Two Block Override
switch to correct the two block situation and return
CAUTION to normal working mode.
Do not connect an accessory to any part of the
crane other than the accessory outlet or 3. Overload Warning Indicator Light
cigarette lighter. Damage to the crane’s The Overload Warning Indicator (amber) illumi-
electrical system may result. If it is necessary nates at a pre-set value of 90 % of Maximum Rated
to do so, contact your Link-Belt distributor. Capacity and provides a visual indication of an ap-
proach to an overload.
Load Moment Limiter Panel 4. Overload Indicator Light
The Load Moment Limiter panel is located to the left The Overload Indicator (red) illuminates at a pre-
front of the operator. It contains the following and is set value of 100 % of Maximum Rated Capacity. It
shown in Figure 1−41. will also illuminate whenever a wire rope limit is ex-
ceeded or an operator settable alarm has been
1. Boom Angle Limit Indicator Light reached or exceeded. Function limiters will occur
This light will illuminate to alert the operator when simultaneously for an Overload, Wire Rope Limit,
the boom has reached its lowering or hoisting limit. or a Two Block condition. The voice alarm Over-
The voice alarm Boom Hoist Limit" or Boom Low- load Limit" will sound for all 3 conditions.
er Limit" will sound simultaneously and the boom

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 6. Front Drum Free Mode Indicator Light
This light will illuminate to alert the operator that the
Front Drum Brake Mode/Drum Control switch on
ANG. LIMIT TWO BLOCK
OVER LOAD
the right control console is in the FREE" position.
WARNING LIMIT
The automatic brake for the front drum is inactive

and the front drum brake pedal must be used to
5 control the load.
LCD1
CURVE
BOOM
LENGTH REEVING
JIB or TIP EXT.
LENGTH OFFSETREEVING 7. Rear Drum Free Mode Indicator Light
LOAD RATIO
[%]
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
HOOK HEIGHT
[ft]
REEVING
FIX J
LCD2 RATED LOAD [kips] / RADIUS [ft]
LCD2 HOOK
Rear Drum Brake Mode/Drum Control switch on
HEIGHT HELP
SELECT
LCD3 ACTUAL LOAD [kips]

RESET
LIMIT INDICATION
TIP HEIGHTV.WALL RADIUS
the right control console is in the FREE" position.
ANTI−TWOBLOCK
BOOM JIB FIX J The automatic brake for the rear drum is inactive
LCD4 RADIUS [ft] / JIB ANGLE / OFFSET ANGLE [
LCD4
SELECT
]
MODE INDICATION
WORK SETTING
RIGGING
and the rear drum brake pedal must be used to
LCD5 BOOM ANGLE [ ]
CONFIG.
ADJUST−
MENT
control the load.
HOOK
SETTING
START / END
SELECT
ENTER
8. Boom Hoist Drum Lock Switch
RETURN
ANTI
TIP HEIGHT TWO−BLOCK
LIMIT LIMIT This switch controls the pawl on the boom hoist
SET / DEL
RADIUS
LIMIT
SET / DEL
LOAD
6 drum. When engaged, the pawl will not allow the
TEST
SET / DEL
drum to rotate in a lowering direction. However, the

7 drum pawl will ratchet, allowing the drum to rotate,
FRONT FREE REAR FREE 3RD/4TH FREE
when raising the boom. Move the switch to the up
to the ON" position to engage the pawl or down to
8
IN ON
the OFF" position to release it. The boom hoist
10 pawl should only be released when lowering the
BOOM FOOT
OUT
BOOM FOOT FRONT REAR

OFF
BOOM HOIST 3RD/4TH

boom and remain engaged at all other times.
PIN (L) PIN (R) DRUM LOCK
Note: It may be necessary to raise the boom

slightly in order to release the drum pawl.
9
9. Drum Lock Switches
1. Boom Angle Limit Indicator Light
2. Two Block Indicator Light These switches control the pawls on the front, rear,
3. Overload Warning Indicator Light or third/4th drums. When engaged, the pawls will
4. Overload Indicator Light
not allow the winch drum to rotate in a lowering di-
5. Load Moment Limiter Display
6. Front Drum Free Mode Indicator Light rection, however, the drum pawls will ratchet, al-
7. Rear Drum Free Mode Indicator Light lowing the drums to rotate when raising a load.
8. Boom Hoist Drum Lock Switch Move the switch up to the ON" position to engage
9. Drum Lock Switches
the pawl or down to the OFF" position to release it.
10. Boom Foot Pin Control Switches
10. Boom Foot Pin Control Switches
Figure 1−41
These switches control the hydraulic cylinders
Load Moment Limiter Panel
used to install and remove the boom foot pins.
Move a switch to the IN" position to extend the cyl-
5. Load Moment Limiter Display inder and install a boom foot pin. Move a switch to
the OUT" position to retract the cylinder and re-
This system has function limiter (cutout) ability in-
move a boom foot pin. Refer to Boom Base Sec-
tended to aid the operator in the efficient operation
tion Installation" found in Section 4 of this Opera-
of the crane by continually monitoring the load and
tor’s Manual for complete operating instructions.
warns of an approach to an overload condition.
See Crane Monitoring System", later in this Sec-
tion of this Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
DISABLE OVERRIDE OVER ON OFF FREE UNWIND SWITCH ON

NORMAL RIDE
ENABLE
NORMAL OFF ON WIND WIND LEVER OFF
WINCH
OVERRIDE SW. OVER LOAD ANTI−TWO JIB LOWER JIB HOIST BOOM LOWER BOOM HOIST BACKSTOP LMI RIGGING SWING/TRAVEL LMI VOICE TAGLINE REEVING THROTTLE
LIMIT BLOCK LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT OVERRIDE MODE ALARM ALARM WINCH WINCH OPERATION LOCK
LIGHTER MASTER CONTROL
MODE STARTER
1. Cigarette Lighter 6. Jib Lower Limit Override Switch 11. LML System Override Switch
2. Maintenance Mode Key Switch 7. Jib Hoist Limit Override Switch 12. LML Rigging Mode Switch
3. Master Control Override Key Switch 8. Boom Lower Limit Override Switch 13. LML Voice Alarm Switch
4. Overload Limit Override Switch 9. Boom Hoist Limit Override Switch 14. Engine Starter Key Switch
5. Anti-Two Block Override Switch 10. Backstop Limit Override Switch
Figure 1−42
Left Control Console
Left Control Console tion. The Master Control Override Key Switch must
be in the ENABLE" position before using this
Located to the left of the operator’s seat is the left con- switch. The voice alarm Overload Limit" will
trol console. Refer to Figure 1−42. sound and the Overload Limit indicator light will ac-
tivate simultaneously signaling the operator that an
1. Cigarette Lighter
over load limit has been reached.
Push knob in to heat element. The knob will pop up
when the element is hot. 5. Anti-Two Block Override Switch
This switch is used to allow lowering the load when
crane functions have been disabled due to a two
CAUTION block situation. The Master Control Override Key
Do not connect an accessory to any part of the Switch must be in the ENABLE" position before
crane other than the accessory outlet or using this switch. The voice alarm Two Block Lim-
cigarette lighter. Damage to the crane’s it" will sound and the Two Block indicator light will
electrical system may result. If it is necessary activate simultaneously signaling the operator that
to do so, contact your Link-Belt distributor. a two block situation is imminent.
6. Jib Lower Limit Override Switch −

2. Maintenance Mode Key Switch Rear Drum/Luffer Only
This is a special purpose maintenance (key) switch This switch is used to restore luffing jib lowering
for maintenance personnel only. function after the jib lower limit with the LML has ac-
tivated and the control becomes disabled. The
3. Master Control Override Key Switch voice alarm Boom Lower Limit" will sound and the
Move the key to the ENABLE" position to activate Jib Angle Limit indicator light will blink simulta-
the Overload Limit, Anti-Two Block, Jib Lower Limit, neously signaling the operator when the minimum
Jib Hoist Limit, Boom Lower Limit, Boom Hoist Lim- jib angle has been reached. The Master Control
it, and Backstop Limit Override switches. This Override Key Switch must be in the ENABLE"
switch should be in the DISABLE" position during position before using this switch.
normal crane operation.
7. Jib Hoist Limit Override Switch −
4. Overload Limit Override Switch Rear Drum/Luffer Only
This switch is used to reset function limiters when it This switch is used to restore luffing jib hoist func-
is necessary to by-pass the function limiters which tion after the jib hoist limit switch on the attachment
have occurred as a result of an overloading condi-

Operator’s Manual
has been activated and the control becomes dis- Backstop Limit System" found in this Section of this
abled. The voice alarm Jib Hoist Limit" will sound Operator’s Manual.
and the Boom Angle Limit indicator light will blink
simultaneously signaling the operator when the 11. LML System Override Key Switch
maximum jib angle has been reached. The Master This switch is used to override the function limiters
Control Override Key Switch must be in the EN- of the LML system when the crane is being used for
ABLE" position before using this switch. duty cycle work e.g. clamshell, dragline, etc. Plac-
ing the switch in the OVERRIDE" position by-
8. Boom Lower Limit Override Switch
passes the function limiters. An indicator light on
This switch is used to restore boom lowering function the front console will illuminate when this switch is
after the boom lower limit with the LML has activated in the OVERRIDE" position. Place the switch in
and the control becomes disabled. The voice alarm the NORMAL" position when using the crane for
Boom Lower Limit" will sound and the Boom Angle lifting operations.
Limit indicator light will activate simultaneously
signaling the operator when the minimum boom 12. LML Rigging Mode Switch
angle has been reached. The Master Control Over-
Move this switch to rigging mode to facilitate rig-
ride Key Switch must be in the ENABLE" position ging and travel of the crane by inhibiting function
before using this switch. For further information, refer limiters.
to Boom Lower Limit System" found in this Section
of this Operator’s Manual.
9. Boom Hoist Limit Override Switch WARNING

This switch is used to restore boom hoist function The function limiters are not operational when
after the boom hoist limit switch on the attachment in the RIGGING Mode. Return the SML-10 to
has been activated and the control becomes dis- normal operation before operating the crane.
abled. An audible alarm and indicator light will acti-
vate simultaneously signaling the operator when
the maximum boom angle has been reached. The 13. LML Voice Alarm Switch
alarms will continue to flash and sound even after This switch is used to disable the voice alarm.
this switch is pushed. For further information, refer Move the switch to the OFF" position to disable
to Boom Hoist Limit System" found in this Section the voice alarm.
14. Engine Starter Key Switch
10. Backstop Limit Override Switch − The starter switch is a conventional, key operated,
Luffer Only automotive type. It controls engine off/on and start
This switch is used to restore luffing boom lowering functions and energizes the instrument panel in
function after the backstop limit switch on the the operator’s cab. When held in the full counter-
backstops has been activated and the control be- clockwise direction it energizes the engine heater
comes disabled. The voice alarm Backstop Limit" element (glow plug) for cold engine starts. At this
will sound. For further information, refer to Boom point the key can be rotated clockwise to the start
position. Release the key once the engine starts.

Operator’s Manual
Right Control Console 1 2 3 4 5
Located to the right of the operator’s seat is the right
control console. Refer to Figure 1−43.
1. Drum Brake Mode/Drum Control Lock

Switches FREE RELEASE EXTEND ON ON ON 4TH
AUTO BRAKE
These switches is used to select the drum braking
method and to disable the drum function. When a OPERATION STOP RETRACT OFF OFF OFF 3RD
toggle switch is in the AUTO BRAKE" position, the FRONT REAR

3RD
4TH
BOOM
HOIST
GANTRY
CYLINDER
LOWER
JACK CYL
TRAVEL
HIGH SPEED
3RD
HIGH SPEED
3RD/4TH
SELECT
drum brake applies automatically anytime the con-

trol lever is in the neutral position. When a toggle
switch is in the FREE" position, the drum brake 1. Drum Brake Mode/Drum 3. Boom Hoist Drum Control
must be manually applied using the brake pedal(s) Control Lock Switches Lock Switch
on the cab floor. To disable the function move a 2. 3RD/4TH Drum Brake 4. Lower Jack Cylinder Switch
switch to the OPERATION STOP" position. Al- Mode/Drum Control Lock 5. Travel High Speed Switch
Switch
ways move both switches to the OPERATION
STOP" position before exiting the cab. Figure 1−43
Right Control Console
2. 3RD/4TH Drum Brake Mode/Drum
Control Lock Switch
3. Boom Hoist Drum Control Lock Switch
This switch is used to select the drum braking
method and to disable the drum function. When This switch is used to disable the boom hoist drum
the toggle switch is in the AUTO BRAKE" position, function. When the toggle switch is in the RE-
the drum brake applies automatically anytime the LEASE" position, the drum lever is active. To dis-
control lever is in the neutral position. When it is in able the function move the switch to the OPERA-
the FREE" position, the crane is equipped with a TION STOP" position. Always move the switch to
device that disconnects the hydraulic motor and the OPERATION STOP" position before exiting
brake to allow the rope to be pulled off for pile driv- the cab.
ing applications. Do not free-fall a load and catch it
4. Lower Jack Cylinder Switch
with the brake pedals. To disable the function
move the switch to the OPERATION STOP" posi- Move this switch to the ON" position to provide
tion. Always move the switch to the OPERATION power to the counterweight cylinders and lower
STOP" position before exiting the cab. jack cylinders. When the switch is placed in ON"
position, swing speed is reduced.
5. Travel High Speed Switch

The travel control system employs a two speed
travel which can be utilized to provide the operator
with two speeds of crane travel. Place the switch in
the ON" position for high speed and in the OFF"
position for standard speed.

Operator’s Manual
1
FORWARD ON
2
BACKWARD OFF
1
FORWARD ON
2
4 CONSOLE SLIDE DRUM INDICATOR
3 4 3 5 BACKWARD OFF
8 5 ENGINE
EMERGENCY STOP
ENGINE
WARNING
8
CONSOLE SLIDE DRUM INDICATOR
6 6
13
LMI
13 ENGINE ENGINE LMI
OVERRIDE CRANE LUFFER
7 EMERGENCY STOP WARNING OVERRIDE CRANE LUFFER
7
o o
12 TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL

12 TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL
9 9
10 10
11 11
Style 1 Style 2
1. Console Slide Switch 8. Service Monitor

2. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch 9. Engine Fuel Level Gauge
3. Engine Warning Indicator Light 10. Hydraulic Oil Pressure Gauge
4. Engine Emergency Stop Indicator Light 11. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge
5. LML Override Indicator Light 12. Engine Water Temperature Gauge
6. Crane Mode Indicator Light 13. Hour Meter
7. Luffing Mode Indicator Light
Figure 1−44
Front Control Console
Front Control Console 3. Engine Warning Indicator Light

Located in the right front of the operator’s cab is the This indicator light will illuminate to make the oper-
front control console. Refer to Figure 1−44. ator aware of minor engine problems. When this
light illuminates engine operation may continue.
1. Console Slide Switch However, consult the engine manufacturer’s
Use this switch to slide the console forward or manual and determine the problem as soon as
backward to adjust the console so that easy opera- possible to avoid prolonged operation of the mal-
tion can be obtained. functioning engine which could develop into a ma-
jor problem.
2. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch
This switch controls the drum rotation indicator.
4. Engine Emergency Stop Light
When activated, the drum rotation indicator lo- This indicator light will illuminate to make the oper-
cated on the winch control lever will function. For ator aware of critical engine problems. When this
additional information, see Drum Rotation Indica- light illuminates, stop operations immediately and
tor" found later in this Section of this Operator’s shutdown the engine. Consult the engine
Manual. manufacturer’s manual and determine the prob-
lem before any further operation of the engine.

Operator’s Manual
5. LML Override Mode Indicator Light
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
This indicator light will illuminate to alert the opera-
tor that the LML system override key switch is in the
OVERRIDE" position and function limiters are dis-
abled.
6. Crane Mode Indicator Light TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL
This light will illuminate when the standard crane

attachment is installed, the electrical wiring proper-
ly connected, and a crane curve has been selected
with the LML system.
1. Engine Oil Filter 4. Swing (Park) Brake Applied
7. Luffing Mode indicator Light Is Being Bypassed 5. Low Engine Oil Pressure
2. Low Battery 6. Low Battery Electrolyte Level
This light will illuminate when the luffing crane at-
Charging Voltage 7. Low Hydraulic Oil Pressure
tachment is installed, the electrical wiring properly 3. Engine Air Cleaner Clogged 8. Low Engine Coolant Level
connected, and a luffing curve has been selected
with the LML system. Figure 1−45
Service Monitor
8. Service Monitor
Eight individual indicator lights are contained in 11. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge
this one gauge. Refer to Figure 1−45. The ap-
This gauge registers the hydraulic oil temperature
propriate indicator light will illuminate for any of the
in the reservoir. Normal operating range will regis-
following conditions:
ter in the green area of the gauge, provided the
a. Engine oil filter is being bypassed
proper viscosity of oil is used. (Operating ranges
b. Low battery charging voltage
vary with the oils used in different climates. Refer to
c. Engine air cleaner clogged
Section 2 of this Operator’s Manual for proper oil
d. Swing (Park) brake applied
viscosities for operating in different temperature
e. Low engine oil pressure
ranges.) If the hydraulic oil exceeds the maximum
f. Low battery electrolyte level
operating temperature and the indicator moves to
g. Low Hydraulic Oil Pressure
the red area of the gauge, shutdown the crane im-
h. Low engine coolant level
mediately and correct the problem.
Note: All of the indicator lights are tested when
the starter key switch is moved from the OFF"
12. Engine Water Temperature Gauge
position clockwise to the first position. If these This gauge registers the engine cooling system
lights do not illuminate when tested, locate and temperature. For proper cooling system operating
repair the problem before continuing operations. temperature range, refer to the engine manufactur-
er’s manual. If the cooling system overheats, shut-
9. Engine Fuel Level Gauge down the engine immediately and repair the prob-
lem to avoid engine damage.
This gauge registers the fuel level in the tank . A
sight gauge is also located directly on the side of 13. Hour Meter
the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is 77 gal The hour meter registers engine operating time in
(291L). Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual hours, up to five digits. The far right representing
for correct grade of diesel fuel. 1/10 of an hour. The hour meter is useful in deter-
10. Hydraulic Oil Pressure Gauge mining lubrication and maintenance schedules.
This meter will register only when the engine is run-
This gauge registers the hydraulic oil pressure of ning.
the crane control system. Normal operating pres-
sure is 1,140 psi (80kg/cm 2). If the hydraulic oil
pressure varies more than ±50 psi (±3.5kg/cm 2)
shutdown the crane immediately and correct the
problem. The indicator will gradually return to zero
when the engine is shutdown.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3
OFF A/C
LO HI COOL WARM
4 5
1. Off" Switch
2. A/C" Switch
3. Vent Selection Switches
4. Fan Speed Switches
5. Temperature Control Switches
Figure 1−46
Air Conditioner Controls
Air Conditioner Controls 3. Vent Selection Switches

The air conditioner control panel is located to the right Use these switches to select the required cab ven-
of the operator’s seat. Refer to Figure 1−46. Use the tilation. Select one switch to allow air flow from the
following control descriptions to adjust the tempera- upper vent and one for the lower vent. Press both
ture inside the operator’s cab. switches to provide air flow from both vents for
maximum cab ventilation. The indicator light
1. Off" Switch above the switch will illuminate to indicate which
vent(s) is selected.
Pushing this switch will stop the air flow from the
vents. 4. Fan Speed Switches
2. A/C" Switch Use these switches to control the amount of air
flowing from the vents: Low, Medium, or High.
Push this switch to turn the air conditioner ON" or
OFF". The indicator light above the switch will illu- 5. Temperature Control Switches
minate to indicate that the air conditioner is ON".
Use these switches to adjust the temperature in the
Note: If the outside temperature reaches zero, cab. Press the COOL" switch to lower air tempera-
the compressor cannot be started even if the ture and the WARM" switch to raise air tempera-
A/C" switch is pressed ON". ture.

Operator’s Manual
which remains applied anytime the boom hoist control
Crane System Controls lever is in the neutral position. Refer to Figure 1−47.
The following pages give detailed instructions of indi- Pulling the boom hoist control lever back toward the
vidual controls related to crane operation. It is essential operator raises the boom. Pushing the control lever
that the operator knows the function of each control forward lowers the boom. The speed at which the
and its duty in the overall operation of the crane. boom moves is regulated by the engine throttle, posi-
tion of the pump control switch, and position of the con-
trol lever.
WARNING To Raise The Boom
Read and understand all Operating Safety" 1. Refer to the correct capacity chart located in the
instructions in this Operator’s Manual before Crane Rating Manual for proper crane set up
attempting to operate the crane. This crane based on load radius, working area, etc.
should only be operated by a qualified 2. Check that the drum lock switch is in the ON" posi-
operator who has read and understood this tion. (The boom hoist pawl will ratchet allowing the
entire Operator’s Manual. boom to raise.)
3. With the engine at idle, move the pump control
switch on the control lever to the desired position
Engine Throttle Controls (ON" for low speed or OFF" for high speed).
Two throttle pedals are located on the cab floor to pro- 4. Pull the boom hoist control lever toward the opera-
vide the operator with flexibility of pedal operation. tor to raise the boom. If desired, increase the en-
Press down to increase engine speed; release to de- gine throttle to speed up the boom.
crease engine speed. Engine speed is registered on a 5. After reaching the desired boom angle, move the
tachometer located in the LML Display. Refer to boom hoist control lever to the neutral position to
Figure 1−47. stop the boom.
A throttle lock knob is located on the left control con- To Lower The Boom
sole. Pulling the throttle lock knob gives the operator 1. Refer to the correct capacity chart located in the
the ability to set and hold a specific engine speed. Crane Rating Manual for proper crane set up
However, engine speed may be increased using the based on load radius, working area, etc.
foot pedals without disturbing the throttle lock setting.
CAUTION
Pump Control System
Wire rope may need to be spooled off the
winch drums as the boom is lowered. Failure
to do so may cause two blocking.
WARNING
Do not operate pump control system until all 2. With the engine at idle, move the pump control
control levers are moved to neutral. Failure to switch on the control lever to the desired position
do so could cause loss of control of the load. (ON" for low speed or OFF" for high speed).
3. Move drum lock switch to the OFF" position.
The hydraulic control system uses a two speed pump Note: It may be necessary to raise the boom
which can be utilized to provide the operator with two slightly in order to release the drum pawl.
speeds of crane operation for winch and boom hoist
functions. The low speed offers the operator more pre-
cise movement of the load, while the high speed gives CAUTION
optimum productivity. The pump control switch is used
Do not lower the boom when boom hoist pawl
to activate the system. Refer to Figure 1−47. The
in engaged as damage to the boom hoist drum
crane will operate in the high speed mode at all times
may result.
when this switch is in the OFF" position.
Boom Hoist Operation 4. Push the boom hoist control lever forward to lower
the boom. If desired, increase the engine throttle
Raising and lowering the boom is controlled by the to speed up the boom.
boom hoist control lever and pump control switch. An 5. After reaching the desired boom angle, throttle
automatic brake is also incorporated into the system down and slowly move the boom hoist control lever
to the neutral position to stop the boom.

Operator’s Manual
DISABLE OVERRIDE OVER ON OFF FREE UNWIND SWITCH ON

NORMAL RIDE
ENABLE
NORMAL OFF ON WIND WIND LEVER OFF
WINCH
OVERRIDE SW. OVER LOAD ANTI−TWO JIB LOWER JIB HOIST BOOM LOWER BOOM HOIST BACKSTOP LMI RIGGING SWING/TRAVEL LMI VOICE TAGLINE REEVING THROTTLE
OPERATION
LIGHTER MASTER CONTROL LIMIT BLOCK LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT OVERRIDE MODE ALARM ALARM WINCH WINCH
MODE
LOCK STARTER
Left Control Console

1 2
OVER LOAD
ANG. LIMIT TWO BLOCK WARNING LIMIT
3 4 5 7
6 LCD1 BOOM JIB or TIP EXT.

CURVE
LENGTH REEVING LENGTH OFFSETREEVING
LOAD RATIO ENGINE SPEED HOOK HEIGHT REEVING

[%] [rpm] [ft] FIX J
13 LCD2 RATED LOAD [kips] / RADIUS [ft]
LCD2
SELECT
HOOK
HEIGHT
RESET
HELP
LIMIT INDICATION
LCD3 ACTUAL LOAD [kips] TIP HEIGHTV.WALL RADIUS
ANTI−TWOBLOCK
BOOM JIB FIX J
LCD4 RADIUS [ft] / JIB ANGLE / OFFSET ANGLE [ ]

MODE INDICATION
LCD4
SELECT WORKSETTINGRIGGING
LCD5 BOOM ANGLE [ ] ADJUST−

CONFIG. MENT
SETTING
HOOK
START / END
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
ANTI
TIP HEIGHT TWO−BLOCK
LIMIT LIMIT
SET / DEL SET / DEL
RADIUS
LOAD
LIMIT
20 SET / DEL
TEST
10 8 FRONT FREE REAR FREE 3RD/4TH FREE
11
IN ON
18
17
16 OUT OFF
15 BOOM FOOT
PIN (L)
BOOM FOOT
PIN (R)
FRONT REAR
DRUM LOCK
BOOM HOIST 3RD/4TH
14
13
20 19
12
9
LML Panel
FREE RELEASE EXTEND ON ON ON 4TH
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
AUTO BRAKE
LOCK RETRACT OFF OFF OFF 3RD

AUTO BRAKE/FREE FALL SELECTOR SWITCH.
FRONT REAR
3RD
4TH
BOOM
HOIST
GANTRY
CYLINDER
LOWER
JACK CYL
TRAVEL
HIGH SPEED
3RD
HIGH SPEED
3RD/4TH
SELECT
Fully depress and latch the drum brake pedals in
the fully applied position before operating the
selector switch.
Right Control Console
1. Master Control Override Switch 8. Free Mode Indicator Lights 15. Pump Control Switch
2. Boom Hoist Limit Override Switch 9. Drum Lock Switches 16. Boom Hoist Control Lever
3. Rear Drum Control Lever (Auxiliary) 10. Front Drum Brake Pedal 17. 3RD/4TH Drum Control Lever
4. Front Drum Control Lever (Main) 11. Bubble Level 18. Travel/Steer Control Levers
5. Throttle Lock Knob 12. Rear Drum Brake Pedal 19. Boom Hoist Drum Control Lock Switch
6. Swing Control Lever 13. Throttle Pedals 20. Drum Brake Mode/Drum Control Lock
7. Boom Angle Limit Indicator Light 14. Travel Swing Lock Lever Switches
Figure 1−47
Crane System Controls

Operator’s Manual
Boom Limit Systems
The crane is equipped with boom limit systems that are
used to prevent over hoisting and lowering the boom.
Boom Hoist Limit

82°
When the boom reaches the maximum angle, a limit Boom
switch at the base end of the boom is activated which Angle
disables the boom hoist function and prevents the
boom from being raised any further. A voice alarm 1
Boom Hoist Limit" sounds and an indicator light will
activate simultaneously signaling the operator that
maximum boom angle has been reached, approxi- 2
mately 82_. Refer to Figure 1−48. 1. Limit Switch
2. Boom Foot Pin
The boom must be lowered in order to silence the
alarm. However, to release the boom hoist drum lock Figure 1−48
and lower the boom, it may be necessary to raise the Boom Hoist Limit Switch
boom slightly to disengage the boom hoist drum pawl.
2. Turn the Master Control Override Key Switch to the
The Boom Hoist Limit Override switch is then used to
ENABLE" position.
reactivate the boom hoist function to raise the boom
3. Hold the Backstop Limit Override switch in the
enough to release the drum lock and lower the boom.
OVERRIDE" position.
The indicator light will continue to illuminate and the
4. Slowly lower the luffing boom until the boom angle
voice alarm will continue to sound even after this switch
is less than 90.2°.
is pushed. To reset the boom hoist limit system, lower
5. Return boom hoist lever to neutral and release the
the boom until the boom angle limit indicator light goes
Backstop Limit Override switch to the NORMAL"
off and the voice alarm is silenced. Refer to
position.
Figure 1−47.
Use the following procedure when using the override DISABLE" position.
switch:
1. With the engine at idle, move the pump control Boom Lower Limit
switch to the ON" position. When lowering the boom below the working radius
2. Turn the Master Control Override Key Switch to the listed in the Crane Rating Manual, the boom lower limit
ENABLE" position. is activated disabling the boom lowering and winch
3. Hold the Boom Hoist Limit Override switch in the hoisting function. A voice alarm Boom Lower Limit"
OVERRIDE" position. and Overload Limit" sounds and an indicator light will
4. Slightly raise the boom. Then lower the boom to activate simultaneously.
silence the alarm.
In emergency situations it may be necessary to lower
5. Release the Boom Hoist Limit Override switch to
the boom further. In this case the Boom Lower Limit
the NORMAL" position.
Override switch is used. Use the following procedure
when using the override switch:
DISABLE" position.
1. With the engine at idle, move the pump control
Luffing Boom Backstop Limit (If Equipped) switch to the ON" position.
2. Lower the hook block to the ground.
The boom backstop limit system is designed to prevent 3. Turn the Master Control Override Key Switch to the
the luffing boom backstops from bottoming out and ENABLE" position.
possibly damaging the boom. When boom angle 4. Hold the Boom Lower Limit Override switch in the
reaches approximately 90.2°, the backstop limit OVERRIDE" position.
switch, located on the backstops, is activated which 5. Slightly lower the boom. Then raise the boom to
disables the boom hoist and lowering functions. To re- silence the alarm.
store boom lowering function, the Backstop Limit Over- 6. Release the Boom Hoist Limit Override switch to
ride switch must be used. Use the following procedure the NORMAL" position.
when using the override switch: 7. Turn the Master Control Override Key Switch to the
1. With the engine at idle, move the pump control DISABLE" position.
switch to the ON" position.

Operator’s Manual
Front And Rear Drum Operation
Raising and lowering a load is controlled by the front
and rear drum control levers, drum lock switches,
pump control switch, and drum brake mode switch.
Front and rear drum brake pedals are also used to con-
trol the load and operate either manually or automati-
cally.
0
WARNING
The weight of the load must be known before
making a lift. Compare the load weight to the
appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to ensure compliance with capacity
ratings. Compare the load weight to the Wire
Rope Capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Figure 1−49 Manual to determine the number of parts of
Boom Angle Indicator − Bubble Type line required to lift the load. Rig and set up the
crane to ensure compliance with both the
Boom Angle Indicator crane and Wire Rope Capacity charts.
A bubble type boom angle indicator is mounted to the
left of the operator’s cab on the base section of the The brake system for the front and rear drums has two
boom. Refer to Figure 1−49. It must be adjusted prop- modes of operation. Drum brakes can be selected to
erly and the crane must be level for the unit to accu- operate in an automatic or manual mode. When the
rately indicate boom angles. Even under these condi- drum brake mode switch on the right control panel is in
tions its readings are only approximate. When making the AUTO BRAKE" mode position, the drum brake ap-
near capacity lifts, measure the load radius to deter- plies automatically anytime the control lever is in the
mine crane capacity. Check the adjustment of the neutral position. When it is in the FREE" position, the
boom angle indicator daily to ensure its accuracy. drum brake must be manually applied using the brake
pedal(s) on the cab floor.
Drum Control Lock System The hydraulic control system is used to provide the op-
To make movement within the operator’s cab safe, use erator with two winch speeds. The low speed offers the
the drum control lock system to disable the front and operator more precise movement of the load, while the
rear winch, the boom hoist, and the 3rd drum winch high speed gives optimum productivity. The pump
functions to prevent inadvertent operation of these control switch is used to activate the system. Refer to
controls. To disable the 3RD/4TH and the front and rear Figure 1−47. The crane will operate in the high speed
drum, move the Drum Brake Mode/Drum Control Lock mode at all times when this switch is in the OFF" posi-
Switch on the right control console to the OPERATION tion.
STOP" position. To disable the boom hoist function, The following procedures give instructions for raising
move the Boom Hoist Drum Control switch on the con- and lowering the load based on the the type of brake
trol lever panel to the OPERATION STOP" position. Al- system used. However, variations in load and job site
ways move all these switches to OPERATION STOP" conditions may require adaptations to these general
position before exiting the cab. Refer to Figure 1−47. procedures. Crane operations are to be performed
only by a qualified operator who has read and fully un-
derstands the entire content of this Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
Operating In AUTO BRAKE" Mode Operating In FREE" Mode
1. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for proper crane 1. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for proper crane
set up based on load radius, working area, etc. set up based on load radius, working area, etc.
2. Position the head machinery directly above the 2. Position the head machinery directly above the
load. Connect the hook block to the load. load. Connect the hook block to the load.
3. With the engine at idle, move the pump control 3. With the engine at idle, move the pump control
switch on the control lever to the desired position switch on the control lever to the desired position
(ON" for low speed or OFF" for high speed). (ON" for low speed or OFF" for high speed).
4. Fully apply and latch the drum brake foot pedal on 4. Fully apply and latch the drum brake foot pedal on
the cab floor. the cab floor.
5. Move the drum brake mode switch on the right 5. Move the drum brake mode switch on the right
control console to the AUTO BRAKE" position. control console to the FREE" position. Check that
Check that the free mode indicator light on the LML the free mode indicator light on the LML panel is il-
panel is off. luminated.
6. Unlatch and release the drum brake pedal.
WARNING
WARNING Do not lift a load to the point where the hook
Do not lift a load to the point where the hook block contacts the head machinery. Two
block contacts the head machinery. Two blocking" could damage the hook block
blocking" could damage the hook block and/or the head machinery, allowing the load
and/or the head machinery, allowing the load to fall. Always keep the load and hook block a
to fall. Always keep the load and hook block a safe distance from the boom.
safe distance from the boom.
6. To Raise The Load: Pull back on the drum control
7. To Raise The Load: Slowly pull back on the drum lever while slowly releasing the drum brake foot
control lever. If desired, increase the engine throt- pedal. If desired, increase the engine throttle to
tle to speed up the winch once the load begins to speed up the winch once the load begins to move.
move. After the load reaches the desired height After the load reaches the desired height, slowly
slowly move the drum control lever to the neutral apply the drum brake pedal while moving the drum
position to stop the load. control lever to the neutral position.
To Hold The Load: With the drum control lever in To Hold The Load: With the drum control lever in
the neutral position, fully apply and latch the drum the neutral position, fully apply and latch the drum
brake foot pedal. brake foot pedal.
To Lower The Load: Unlatch and fully release the To Lower The Load: With the drum control lever in
drum brake foot pedal. Slowly move the drum con- neutral, slowly release the drum brake foot pedal
trol lever forward. If desired, increase the engine and allow the load to lower slowly. The speed at
throttle to speed up the winch once the load begins which the load falls is regulated by the pressure ap-
to move. After the load reaches the desired height, plied to the drum brake pedal. After the load
slowly move the drum control lever to the neutral po- reaches the desired height, slowly apply the drum
sition to stop the load. If the drum lock switch is brake pedal and bring the load to a complete stop.
placed in the ON" position, the front and rear drum
winch will not function even if the front or rear drum
control levers are placed in the Lowering" position.
Note: It may be necessary to raise the load
slightly to allow the drum pawl to release when
lowering the load.

Operator’s Manual
1 LIGHT ON (Brake Applied)
2 LIGHT OFF (Brake Released)
FORWARD ON o
TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL
BACKWARD OFF
CONSOLE SLIDE DRUM INDICATOR

Swing Left
2
Front Control Console 1
Brake"
3
1. Drum Indicators Swing Right
2. Drum Indicator Switch
Figure 1−50
Drum Rotation Indicator Released"
When the mark is pressed,

Third Drum Control
the brake is released.
The crane may be equipped with a third drum control
DANGER
lever. This lever is used for the third drum mounted in
the boom base section. Refer to Figure 1−47. Refer to
Third Drum Winch" found later in this Section of the
Operator’s Manual for more information. Keep clear of swinging
upper to prevent serious
bodily injury.
Drum Rotation Indicator
This system is used to monitor winch drum speeds
through the use of a vibration signaling device 1. Swing Lever
2. Swing Brake Rocker Switch
mounted on the winch control lever. Refer to 3. Horn Switch
Figure 1−50. As the winch drum rotates, a vibrating
signal relative to the speed of the winch drum is felt in Figure 1−51
the drum control lever. The faster the rotation of the Swing Controls
winch drum the faster the vibrating signal.
Upper Horn Swing (Park) Brake

The upper horn switch is located on the swing control
lever. Refer to Figure 1−51. To sound the horn, press CAUTION
the switch.
Do not apply swing (park) with the upper in
Swing Operation motion. This practice will result in damage to
the swing mechanism. Stop the swinging
Rotation of the upper over the crawler is controlled by upper by slowly engaging the swing control
the swing control lever, swing (park) brake switch, and lever in the opposite direction to that which
swing lock control lever. The system also incorporates started the swing. Apply the swing (park)
a swing alarm which sounds anytime the swing control brake only after the upper comes to a
lever is moved out of the neutral position. Refer to complete stop.
Figure 1−51.
The swing control lever, located to the left of the opera- Use the swing (park) brake for holding the upper in any
tor on the control console, operates the swing function. position, over the crawler during normal, stationary
Move the control lever forward to swing left; move it crane operations. The electrically activated swing
back to swing right. The swing (park) brake switch is (park) brake is applied using the rocker switch on the
also located on the same control lever along with the top of the swing control lever. Refer to Figure 1−51.
upper horn switch.

Operator’s Manual
Travel Swing Lock
The travel swing lock control lever is located below the
operator’s seat.
CAUTION
Do not engage the travel swing lock with the
upper in motion. This practice will result in Disengaged
damage to the swing mechanism or other
crane components. Stop the swinging upper
by slowly engaging the swing control lever in
the opposite direction to that which started the
swing. Engage the travel swing lock or brake
Engaged
only after the upper comes to a complete stop.
Figure 1−52
The travel swing lock is a four position swing lock. It Travel Swing Lock Control Lever
can be engaged in four positions: directly over the
sides or directly over the ends. The over the side 4. Disengage the travel swing lock using the control
position is for use when transporting the crane. The lever below the operator’s seat.
mechanically operated travel swing lock is engaged/ Note: In order to disengage the travel swing
disengaged using the control lever located below the lock, it may be necessary to swing the upper
operator’s seat. Refer to Figure 1−52. To engage slightly in one direction or the other to ease the
push the lever down, to disengage pull the lever up. pressure on the swing lock pin, allowing it to re-
lease.
Note: In order to disengage the travel swing lock, it
may be necessary to swing the upper slightly in one 5. Move the swing control lever forward or backward
direction or the other to free the swing lock pin, al- to begin swinging in the desired direction. Release
lowing it to release. the control lever to neutral and allow the upper to
coast as the crane approaches the desired posi-
To Swing The Upper tion. Slowly engage the swing control lever in the
1. Compare the boom configuration and length to the opposite direction to that which started the swing
appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating in order to slow and then stop the upper.
Manual. Position the boom safely within the limits
specified on the capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. CAUTION
Do not engage the travel swing lock or brake
with the upper in motion. This practice will
DANGER result in damage to the swing mechanism.
All personnel and equipment must be out of Stop the swinging upper by easing the swing
the path of the rotating upper. Failure to do so control lever in the opposite direction to that
will result in severe personal injury or which started the swing. Engage the travel
equipment damage. swing lock only after the upper comes to a
Swing slowly and cautiously. Watch for complete stop.
centrifugal force. Out swing of a load
increases the load radius and thus decreases 6. After coming to a complete stop, apply the swing
capacity. Load out swing may result in tipping (park) brake and/or travel swing lock as desired.
or damaging the crane.
2. Check that the travel swing lock control lever is in

the ENGAGED" position.
3. Move swing (park) brake rocker switch, on the
swing control lever, to the OFF" position. Check to
see that the swing (park) brake indicator light on
the service monitor is off.

Operator’s Manual
To steer the crane to the right: Push the left travel/
steer lever forward while leaving the right travel/
steer lever in the neutral position.
To steer the crane to the left: Push the right travel/
steer lever forward while leaving the left travel/steer
lever in the neutral position.
2 To spin turn (counter-rotate): Push one travel/
steer lever forward while pulling the opposite one
1 to the rear. The direction of rotation will depend on
the direction the travel/steer levers are pushed.
To Stop: Release the steer control levers.
Crane Monitoring System

The Load Moment Limiter is intended to aid the opera-
tor in the efficient operation of the crane by continu-
ously monitoring the load and warning of an ap-
proaching overload or unsafe condition. The system
monitors crane functions by means of high accuracy
1. Left Travel/Steer Lever sensors. It continuously compares the load with the
2. Right Travel/Steer Lever crane capacity charts which are stored in the computer
memory. If an overload or unsafe condition is ap-
Figure 1−53 proached, the system warns by means of audible and
Travel/Steer Levers visual alarms. Function limiters will also activate under
certain conditions to limit crane movement.
The system also provides the operator with a digital
Steering And Traveling The Crane display of the working radius, the main boom working
Traveling the crane is controlled by the travel/steer le- angle, the weight of the total load (including hook block
vers. Refer to Figure 1−53. The sequence of engag- and attachments) being lifted, and the maximum per-
ing these controls is critical to ensure smooth travel op- mitted load for the actual crane condition.
eration. Travel speed is proportional to lever move-
ment with a top speed of 0.8 mph (1.3km/hr). The trav- Anti-Two Block System
el brakes are a spring applied, hydraulically released The anti-two block system is an electromechanical
multiple disc type which are automatically applied system designed to alert the operator before the
when the travel/steer levers are returned to the neutral hook block or hook ball contacts the head machinery
position. To travel and steer the crane along a firm, lev- of the main boom or jib. When a two block situation
el route, proceed as follows: is imminent, an audio/visual alarm is activated to alert
the operator of the pending danger. When the alarm
Note: The following instructions are based on trav- activates it is essential that the operator discontinue
eling the crane with the travel motors to the rear. operations immediately and correct the two block
When the travel motors are in front, the right and left situation.
hand travel/steer lever operations must be re-
versed. Three basic components are used to make up the anti-
two block system. The anti-two block weight and head
1. Always take time to choose the safest, most level machinery switch, located at the head machinery, and
route. Designate a signalman to guide the opera- the audio/visual alarm in the operator’s cab. Refer to
tor along the route. Figure 1−54.
2. Position the upper directly over the end of the An anti-two block weight is suspended from each of the
crawler and engage the travel swing lock.
anti-two block switches and is used to hold the switch
3. To travel the crane forward or backward: Push
in the off position. When the anti-two block weight is
both travel/steer levers in the desired direction si-
lifted by the hook block, it allows the switch to activate
multaneously. Release of the spring loaded travel
the audio/visual alarm in the operator’s cab. In addition
levers will automatically return the levers to the
to the audio/visual alarm, function limiters are acti-
neutral position and will also apply the brakes.
vated.

Operator’s Manual
Single Part Reeving Multi Part Reeving
1
1
4
4
2
2 2
3 3
3
1. Anti-Two Block Switch

2. Winch Wire Rope
3. Anti-Two Block Weight
4. Alternate Switch Location
Figure 1−54
Anti-Two Block System
which will cause a two block situation to occur. The

CAUTION crane function of winch up is disabled when the anti-
two block weight is lifted. This function will remain dis-
Do not allow the load to spin out of control
abled until the two block situation is corrected or the
when hoisting. The anti-two block weight may
override switch on the computer is utilized.
become entangled with the wire rope and
could damage the anti-two block system, wire The main boom head will always have two anti-two-
rope, or boom. Use rotation resistant rope block switches and weights with the anti-two block sys-
during single part line hoisting applications, tem. Each of the added attachments used on the crane
especially when long fall lifts are involved. must employ an anti two-block switch, proper cable
connections, and weight in order for that particular at-
tachment to be monitored by the system.
The added feature of hydraulic function limiters pre-
vents the operator from continuing crane functions

Operator’s Manual
LCD1 BOOM J I B o r T I P E X T.
CURVE
LENGTH REEVING LENGTH OFFSET REEVING
24
L O A D R AT I O ENGINE SPEED HOOK HEIGHT R E E V IN G

**
LCD2 RATED LO AD [ kips] / RADI US [FT]

1
HOOK
LCD2
HE I GHT HELP
2
23 SELECT RE S E T
**
22 LIMIT INDICATION
LCD3 A C T U A L L O A D [ k ip s ] TIP HEIGHT V.WALL RADIUS 3
21
ANTI−TWO BLOCK **
BOOM JIB FIX J
**
LCD4 RADIUS [FT] /JIB ANGLE/OFFSET ANGLE [°]
LCD4
MODE INDICATION **
20 SELECT WORK SETTING RIGGING
4
19 5
LCD5 B OOM ANGL E [° ]
CONFIG.
ADJUST−
MENT
6
7
18 8
9
SETTING
HOOK
START/END
10
SELECT
ENTER 11
RETURN
17 12
TIP HEIGHT ANTI−TWO
BLOCK
LIMIT LIMIT
SET/DEL SET/DEL **
RADIUS
LOAD
LIMIT
SET/DEL TEST
16 15 14 13
1. Help Button 9. Scroll Up/Down Buttons 17. Graphic Crane Set-up Display
2. Tip Height Alarm Indicator Light 10. Configuration Enter Button 18. Liquid Crystal Display 5
3. Radius Alarm Indicator Light 11. Crane Set-up Start/End Button 19. Liquid Crystal Display 4 Select Button
4. Rigging Mode Indicator Light 12. Return Button 20. Liquid Crystal Display 4
5. Crane Setup Mode Indicator Light 13. Load Test Button 21. Liquid Crystal Display 3
6. Work Mode Indicator Light 14. Radius Alarm Set/Delete Button 22. Liquid Crystal Display 2 Select Button
7. Adjustment Mode Indicator Light 15. Tip Height Alarm Set/Delete Button 23. Liquid Crystal Display 2
8. Configuration Mode Indicator Light 16. Hook Select Switch 24. Liquid Crystal Display 1
**Not Available
Figure 1−55
Load Moment Limiter Display

Operator’s Manual
Load Moment Limiter 1. Help Button
The following describes the function and operation of Pressing this button displays a functioning status
the Load Moment Limiter (LML). The system is in- message in the upper row of LCD1. All buttons ex-
tended to aid the operator in the efficient operation of cept the HELP" button are inactive when the mes-
the crane by continually monitoring the load and warn- sage is displayed. The primary reason for using
ing of an approach to an overload or unsafe condition. this button is for troubleshooting purposes. Refer
to troubleshooting for a complete list of all mes-
sages that can be displayed. Press HELP" is dis-
WARNING played in the lower row of LCD1. Press the HELP"
Although the system will alert the operator of button to return to the original menu display.
an approaching overload or unsafe condition,
it remains the responsibility of the operator to 2. Tip Height Alarm Indicator Light
operate the crane safely at all times.
This light will illuminate to alert the operator that a
This system must never be substituted for the tip height alarm has been set using the Tip Height
good judgment of the crane operator using safe Limit Set/Del button. This light will flash when the
operating procedures. The operator is solely preset tip height value has been reached and func-
responsible for safe operation of the crane. tion limiter activates. Refer to Operator Settable
!!THIS SYSTEM IS AN OPERATOR’S AID − Alarms" found later in this Section of the Operator’s
NOT A SAFETY DEVICE!! Manual.
3. Radius Alarm Indicator Light

System Description This light will illuminate to alert the operator that a
The system monitors crane functions by means of load radius alarm has been set using the Radius
high accuracy sensors and continuously compares Limit Set/Del button. This light will flash when the
the load with a copy of the crane capacity chart preset radius value has been reached and function
which is stored in the computer memory. If an over- limiter activates. Refer to Operator Settable
load is approached, the system warns by means of Alarms" found later in this Section of the Operator’s
audible and visual alarms and is configured to cause Manual.
function limitation.
4. Rigging Mode Indicator Light
The Load Moment Limiter provides the operator with
a continuous display of: This light will illuminate to alert the operator that the
D Rated Load or Radius of Load crane is in rigging mode. Refer to Rigging Mode"
D Actual Load found later in this Operator’s Manual. If crane is
D Percentage of Rated Capacity equipped with a luffing attachment, this light will
D Angle of the Main Boom flash when the luffing attachment protection device
D Crane Configuration is activated and function limiters activate.
D Length of the Main Boom
5. Crane Set Up Mode Indicator Light
D Jib Angle, Jib Offset, or Radius of Jib Load
An additional feature of the system is the provision of
crane set up routine has been selected by pressing
operator settable alarms. These alarms, when prop-
the Setting Start/End button.
erly set, provide a method of obstacle avoidance.
This is achieved by means of minimum and maxi- 6. Work Mode Indicator Light
mum boom angle, minimum and maximum radius,
and maximum height. These alarms can be pro- This light will illuminate to alert the operator that a
grammed for each job site and set rapidly for the work routine has been selected by pressing the
prevailing site conditions thereby aiding the operator Setting Start/End button.
in safe operation of the crane. 7. Adjustment Mode Indicator Light
Display Unit This light will illuminate to alert the operator that an
The following is a description of the control buttons, adjustment routine has been selected by pressing
indicators, and windows on the display unit. Use the Setting Start/End button.
them along with Figure 1−55.

Operator’s Manual
8. Configuration Mode Indicator Light 13. Load Test Button
This light will illuminate to alert the operator that a Use this button to test the overload alarms and
configuration routine has been selected by press- function limiters. Refer to Load Test" procedure.
ing the Setting Start/End button.
14. Radius Limit Set/Delete Button
9. Scroll Up/Down Buttons Use this button to start or deactivate a radius
Use these buttons to scroll through the available alarm. Refer to Operator Settable Limits" found
selections during configuration routines. later in this Section of the Operator’s Manual.
10. Configuration Enter Button 15. Tip Height Limit Set/Delete Button
Use this button to select the displayed selection Use this button to set or deactivate a tip height Lim-
during configuration routines. it. Refer to Operator Settable Limits" found later in
this Section of the Operator’s Manual.
11. Crane Set-up Start/End Button
Use this button to start or end the crane configura- 16. Hook Select Button
tion routine. Use this button to select the hook that will be used
for lifting. The hook indicator light on the graphic
12. Return Button display will illuminate to indicate which hook has
Use this button to return to the previous setting been selected as a lifting point.
during a configuration routine.

Operator’s Manual
17. Graphic Crane Set-up Display d. Jib Angle Indicator Light
S Light illuminates when the jib angle is dis-
The graphic crane set-up display provides the op-
played on LCD4 in the work mode.
erator with a graphical representation of the
crane’s current configuration during the normal e. Jib Hook Indicator Light
working mode. Refer to Figure 1−56. S Light illuminates when the jib hook is se-
lected with the hook select switch in the work
mode.
a b c S Light illuminates when selecting the jib hook
information in the crane set-up mode (con-
figuration mode).
d
f. Fixed jIb Hook Indicator Light
e S Light illuminates when the fixed jib hook is
selected with the hook select switch in the
k work mode.
f S Light illuminates when selecting the fixed jib
j hook information in the crane set-up mode
g (configuration mode).
g. Rated Load Indicator Light
h
S Light illuminates when the rated load is dis-
played on LCD2.
h. Load Indicator Light
i
S Light illuminates when the actual load is dis-
played on LCD3.
a. Jib Indicator Light g. Rated Load Indicator Light i. Working Radius Indicator Light
b. Jib Offset Angle Indicator h. Actual Load Indicator Light S Light illuminates when the working radius is
Light i. Working Radius Indicator displayed on LCD2 or LCD4.
c. Fixed Jib Indicator Light Light
d. Jib Angle Indicator Light j. Boom Indicator Light j. Boom Indicator Light
e. Jib Hook Indicator Light k. Boom Hook Indicator Light S Light illuminates when the boom angle is dis-
f. Fixed Jib Hook Indicator
Light
played on LCD5 in the work mode.
S Light illuminates when selecting the boom
Figure 1−56 length in the crane set-up mode (configura-
Graphic Crane Set-Up Display tion mode).
k. Boom Hook Indicator Light
The following gives a description of each indicator light
S Light illuminates when the boom hook is se-
within the display.
lected with the hook select switch in the work
a. Jib Indicator Light mode.
S Light illuminates when the jib is selected in S Light illuminates when selecting the boom
the work mode. hook information in the crane set-up mode
S Light illuminates when setting the jib length (configuration mode).
in the crane set-up mode (configuration
mode). 18. LCD 5 Display
b. Jib Offset Angle Indicator Light In the normal working mode and rigging mode,
S Light illuminates when the offset angle is dis- LCD 5 gives a continuous indication of the angle of
played on LCD4 in the work mode. the main boom relative to horizontal.
S Light illuminates when setting the jib offset In the crane set up mode, the setting values are
angle in the crane set-up mode (configura- displayed.
tion mode).
c. Fixed Jib Indicator Light
S Light illuminates when the fixed jib is se-
lected in the work mode.

Operator’s Manual
19. LCD 4 Select Button currently selected, which is shown in the graphic
crane setup display and which determines the sec-
Press this button to toggle between Working Ra-
tion of the capacity chart to be used as the rated
dius, Jib Angle", or Offset Angle" displayed in
capacity reference.
LCD 4.
Note: All rated load data is shown in kips and
20. LCD 4 Display displayed to one decimal place.
In the normal working mode and crane rigging
mode, LCD 4 can give a continuous indication of In the crane set up mode, the setting values are
the working radius (ft), the jib angle, or offset angle. displayed.
Use the LCD 4 Select Button to display the desired
In crane rigging mode, engine speed is displayed.
reading.
In luffing rigging mode, engine speed or working
In the crane set up mode, the setting values are
status is displayed. Use the LCD 2 select button to
displayed.
display the desired reading.
In luffing rigging mode only the luffing jib angle is
displayed. 24. LCD 1 Display
21. LCD 3 Display a b c d e f
In the normal working mode, LCD 3 gives a contin-
BOOM J I B o r T I P E X T.
uous indication of the total load suspended below CURVE
REEVING
LENGTH LENGTH OFFS E T REEVING
the boom or jib head. It includes the load, any

slings, pins, or tackle used to secure the load and 1 100: 1 40: 30: 1
the hook block. The display will go blank when the
boom reaches a range where there are no capaci- 90: 2000:
ties or the rated load is greater than 100. LOAD R AT I O ENGINE SPEED HOOK HEIGHT REEVING
Note: All actual load data is shown in kips.

When the actual load is less than 100 kips, it is
h g
displayed as a decimal e.g. 0.9 = 90 kips. 1 kip
= 1000 lb). a. Curve Number e. Jib Offset
b. Boom Length f. Jib Reeving
In the crane set up mode, the setting values are c. Boom Reeving g. Engine Speed
d. Jib Length h. Load Ratio
displayed.
In rigging mode, the display may be blank or Figure 1−57
−−−" is displayed. LCD 1 Display
In luffing rigging mode, luffing jib hoist rope tension In the normal working mode, the following is dis-
is displayed. Function limiters will activate when played in LCD 1. Refer to Figure 1−57.
luffing jib hoist rope tension is exceeded.
a. Curve: The curve number selected is dis-
22. LCD 2 Select Button played. Refer to Crane Rating Manual for
curve number.
Press this button to toggle between Rated Load",
b. Boom length: The boom length (ft) selected is
and Working Radius" displayed in LCD 2.
displayed.
23. LCD 2 Display c. Boom reeving: The number of parts of line for
the hook block selected is displayed.
In the normal working mode, LCD 3 gives a contin- S 0" is displayed when None" in the boom
uous indication of the rated load (kips) or working hook weight is selected.
radius (ft). Use the LCD 2 Select Button to display S The number of parts of line for the main hook
the desired reading. The display will go blank is displayed when the boom head with two
when the boom reaches a range where there are hooks is selected.
no capacities or the rated load is greater than 100. S Nothing will be displayed when a luffing at-
The rated load is derived from a copy of the crane’s tachment curve number is selected.
capacity chart which is stored in the computer d. Jib length: The jib length (ft) selected is dis-
memory and is the reference capacity for any lifting played.
operation. It is dependent on the configuration

Operator’s Manual
S 4" is displayed when the boom tip extension S The number of parts of the auxiliary hoist line
is selected. is displayed when the boom head with two
S Nothing is displayed when None" or the hooks is selected.
boom head with two hooks is selected. g. Engine speed [rpm]: The engine speed (rpm)
e. Jib offset: The jib offset angle selected is dis- is displayed.
played. h. Load ratio [%]: The load ratio (%) is displayed.
S Nothing is displayed when None", boom tip S −−−" is displayed when boom tip reaches
extension, or boom head with two hooks. a range where there are no capacities.
S Nothing will be displayed when a luffing at- S −−−" is displayed when the load ratio is
tachment curve number is selected. 100% (override is excluded).
f. Jib reeving: The number of parts of line for the In the crane set-up mode, the setting procedure,
jib hook selected is displayed. setting item, and setting value are displayed.
S 0" is displayed when None" in the jib hook
weight is selected. In the rigging mode, the mode name and attach-
ment setting status are displayed.
Mode Name Function

Normal This is the normal operating mode for all lift crane applications.
Working This mode is used when performing duty-cycle work with a clamshell or drag-
Mode line attachment. If the crane is overloaded while operating in this mode, the
Override
alarm sounds and function limiters are activated. The alarm cannot be si-
lenced.
Configuration This is the mode to select the current crane configuration.
Crane Set-Up
Mode This is the mode to confirm the adjustment of the Load Moment Limiter and
Adjustment
the operation of the function limiters.
This mode allows 1) the assembling and disassembling of the crane; 2) rais-
ing and lowering of the boom when maximum radius is exceeded. The func-
Rigging
tion limiters will automatically return to active status once the crane boom or
luffing jib enters an allowable working radius.
This mode allows the attachment to be raised or lowered from or to the
Rigging Mode Crane ground after the crane attachments are assembled to the upper and the LML
electrical connections between the boom and upper are made.
This is the mode to raise the attachment from the ground to the working posi-
tion and to lower it to the ground after the luffing attachments are assembled
Luffing and the electric connections are made. The mode changes automatically.
Luffing attachment function limiters are operational in this mode.
Maintenance Mode For Service Use Only
Inspection Mode For Service Use Only

Operator’s Manual
System Operation weight of the load does not exceed the crane rat-
The following is a list of procedures which are used ings at the radius where the load is to be handled.
to operate the multiple features of the LML. Use 3. When a boom angle or radius indicator is inopera-
these procedures in conjunction with the previous tive or malfunctioning, the radius or boom angle
display unit control descriptions. shall be determined by measurement.
4. When the anti-two block warning device is inopera-
System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning tive or malfunctioning, the designated person re-
When operational aids are inoperative or
sponsible for supervising the lifting operations
malfunctioning, the following recommendations for
shall establish procedures, such as assigning an
continued use of the crane should be followed or the
additional signal person, to furnish equivalent
crane should be shutdown.
protection. This does not apply when lifting per-
1. Steps shall be taken to schedule repairs and recal- sonnel in load line supported baskets. Personnel
ibration immediately. The operational aids shall be shall not be lifted in load line supported baskets
put back into service as soon as replacement when the anti-two block devices are not function-
parts, if required, are available and the repairs and ing properly.
recalibration can be carried out. Every reasonable 5. When a level indicator is inoperative or malfunc-
effort must be made to expedite the repairs and re- tioning, other means shall be used to level the
calibration. crane.
2. When the LML is inoperative or malfunctioning, the 6. In situations where inconsistency exists, verified
designated person responsible for supervising the weights, measured radii, boom lengths, and au-
lifting operations shall establish procedures for de- thorized crane capacities must always take prece-
termining load weights and shall ascertain that the dence over indicator readings.

Operator’s Manual
Configuration Selection
In the normal operational mode, the system is programmed to remember the last configuration selected. Each
time the system is powered up it will automatically choose that configuration. Only when the crane is rigged
differently must a new configuration be selected. Use the following procedure to select the crane configuration
WARNING
The Load Moment Limiter must be set correctly. Incorrect settings may result in an unsafe working
condition.
1. Turn the ignition key switch to the Accessory" position. The graphic display will illuminate and the voice alarm
will repeat Rigging Mode".
2. With all control levers in Neutral", and from the normal working screen, press the SETTING START/END button.
CONFIGURATION" will now be displayed in LCD1. The Crane Setup Mode Indicator and Configuration Mode
Indicator lights will illuminate.
Note: The crane set-up mode cannot be started if the control levers are not placed in the Neutral" posi-
tion. If the levers are not in the Neutral" position, Set Lever in Neutral" is displayed in LCD1.
3. Press the ENTER button when CONFIGURATION" is displayed in LCD1 to start the configuration routine.
CONFIGURATION
SETTING
Select item with , and press .
START/END
4. LCD1 will now prompt for the the curve number. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through the curve num-
bers. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for curve definitions.
5. When the desired curve number appears, press the ENTER button to select that curve number and advance to
the next screen. To go back to the previous screen press the RETURN button.
Curve 1: Crane Curve 2: Crane − − − Curve 9: Crane Curve 10: Crane

Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵. − − − Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵.
Note: The crane Curve can be found in the column headings of the capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. In some instances, a Curve Plate listing the Curves available for this crane is attached to the
cover panel of the SML-10 CCU.
6. LCD1 will now prompt for the boom length. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available boom
lengths.
7. When the desired boom length appears, press the ENTER button to select that boom length. The Boom Indica-
tor Light in the graphic crane setup display will illuminate.
−−−
B. LENGTH 60ft B. LENGTH 70ft B. LENGTH 150ft B. LENGTH 160ft
8. Boom hook Present" or None" is displayed in LCD1. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to display Present" or
None".

Operator’s Manual
9. Press the ENTER button to select boom hook present or none. If boom hook present was selected, the Boom
Hook Indicator Light in the graphic crane setup display will illuminate.
M. HOOK Present M. HOOK None

Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵.
10. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt for the drum for the boom hook. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through
available winch drums.
11. Select the drum corresponding to the boom hook by pressing the ENTER button.
DRUM Front DRUM Rear DRUM Third

Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵.
12. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt for the boom hook reevings. The Boom Hook Indicator Light in the graphic
crane setup display will illuminate.
13. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available boom hook reeving values.
14. Press the ENTER button to select boom hook reeving.
−−−
M. HOOK REEVING 1 M. HOOK REEVING 2 M. HOOK REEVING 5 M. HOOK REEVING 6
15. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt the standard boom hook block/ball capacity ratings. Hook capacities are dis-
played in kips (1 kip = 1000lbs). Example: 220.0 kips = 220,000 lbs, or 110 ton lifting capacity.
16. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available boom hooks.
17. Press the ENTER button to select boom hook capacities.
−−−
HOOK 220.0kips HOOK 110.0kips HOOK 25.0 kips HOOK Special
Note: If the hook block/ball was purchased from Link-Belt, make hook selection according to hook block/
ball capacity. i.e. 220 kips = 110 ton hook.
18. If a hook block or ball is used other than that supplied by Link-Belt for this crane, select Special". When Special" is
selected, the weight of the hook must be input manually. Hook capacity does not apply to Special" hook blocks/
balls in LML configuration.
a. Press the ENTER button when Special’ is displayed in LCD1.
b. Press the UP/DOWN buttons until the weight of the special hook is displayed in LCD1 and press the ENTER
button.
HOOK WT 5.00kips HOOK WT 10.00kips − − − HOOK WT 210.0kips HOOK WT 220.0kips

Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵. Select content withYBand press ↵.
−−−

Operator’s Manual
19. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt Jib Present, Jib None, or Jib Two Hooks.
20. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available attachments.
Jib Present Jib None Jib Two Hooks

Note: Select Two Hooks" when reeving two hoist lines over the main boom head shaft. After Configura-
tion Procedure is complete and Working Screen (LCD1) appears, the screen will indicate jib present, but
will not display jib length or jib offset, but will display parts of line.
21. If Jib Present was selected, LCD1 will display Jib Length. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through avail-
able jib lengths.
22. When the desired jib length appears in LCD2, press the ENTER button to select that jib length. The jib Indicator
Light in the graphic crane setup display will illuminate. (Selecting 4 ft = the tip extension.
−−−
J. LENGTH 4ft J. LENGTH 30ft J. LENGTH 60ft J. LENGTH 75ft
−−−
23. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt the Jib Offset.
24. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available jib offset angles.
25. When the desired jib offset appears in LCD2, press the ENTER button to select that jib offset. The jib Offset
Indicator Light in the graphic crane setup display will illuminate.
OFFSET ANGLE 10 OFFSET ANGLE 30

26. Jib hook Present" or None" is displayed in LCD1. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to display Present" of None".
27. Press the ENTER button to select jib hook present or none. If jib hook present was selected, the Jib Hook Indica-
tor Light in the graphic crane setup display will illuminate.
A. HOOK Present A. HOOK None

28. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt a drum for jib hook. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available
winch drums.
29. Select the drum corresponding to the jib hook by pressing the ENTER button.

Operator’s Manual
DRUM Front DRUM Rear DRUM Third

30. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt jib hook reevings. The Jib Hook Indicator Light in the graphic crane setup
display will illuminate.
31. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available jib hook reeving values.
32. Press the ENTER button to select jib hook reeving.
A. HOOK REEVING 1 A. HOOK REEVING 2

33. LCD1 and LCD2 will now prompt standard jib hook capacity ratings. Hook capacities are displayed in kips (1 kip
= 1000lbs). Example: 220.0 kips = 220,000 lbs, or 110 ton lifting capacity.
34. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through available jib hook capacities.
35. Press the ENTER button to select jib hook capacities.
−−−
HOOK 25.0kips HOOK 20.0kips HOOK 12.0kips HOOK Special
Note: If the hook block/ball was purchased from Link-Belt, make hook selection according to hook block/
ball capacity. i.e. 2200 kips = 110 ton hook.
36. If a hook block or ball is used other than that supplied by Link-Belt for this crane, select Special". When Special" is
selected, the weight of the hook must be input manually. Hook capacity does not apply to Special" hook blocks/
balls in LML configuration.
a. Press the ENTER button when Special’ is displayed in LCD1.
b. Press the UP/DOWN buttons until the weight of the special hook is displayed in LCD1 and press the ENTER
button.
HOOK WT 5.00kips HOOK WT 10.00kips − − − HOOK WT 210.0kips HOOK WT 220.0kips

37. When the configuration routine is complete, LCD1 will automatically change to the Rigging Mode", Crane
Mode" or Working Mode" screen. The Working Mode" screen will display the crane configuration, as well as
the engine RPM and Load Ratio.

Operator’s Manual
Rigging mode Crane set mode Work Mode
Rigging mode Rigging mode: Crane set mode 1 100 1 40: 30: 1
18 No jib 90: 2000: − 12 .5
Note: Depending on the boom angle, Rigging Mode" may appear in the LCD1, and the audible voice alarm
may repeat Rigging Mode". This is because the boom may be below the last boom angle/radius where there
is no rated capacity. If this should happen, start the engine, engage the gate lock lever, and slowly raise the
boom. Once a working radius is reached, LCD1 will change to the Working Mode" screen, and the audible
voice alarm will stop.
Note: In instances where the boom is in a working range, and Rigging Mode" is displayed in LCD1, and the
audible voice alarm sounds Rigging Mode", start the engine, engage the gate lock lever, and slowly lower
the boom. When the boom angle reaches a radius where there is no longer a rated capacity, the boom will
automatically stop. The Boom Hoist Override switch must be used to lower the boom beyond the automatic
stop position. Continue to lower the boom another 10°, and stop. Slowly raise the boom. Once the boom
reaches a working angle/radius, LCD1 will change from Rigging Mode" to the working screen, and the audi-
ble voice alarm will stop.

Operator’s Manual
1
Front Of Upper
1. By-Pass Connector
Figure 1−58
By-Pass Connectors
Rigging Mode Rigging Mode

The crane is equipped with 12-pin main by-pass con- This mode relates to the disassembly/assembly of
nectors. The main by-pass connectors are located the attachment when the electrical wiring for the load
on the bulkhead connection at the front of the upper cell (tension detector), angle indicator, etc. are dis-
revolving frame. When the main by-pass connectors connected and the by-pass connector is installed.
are installed, it allows the crane to be operated in the
Crane Mode − with crane attachment
Rigging Mode". Rigging mode allows the crane to
function without the boom installed and when disas- This mode relates to raising the attachment to the
sembling, assembling, and raising and lowering the working position after assembling the crane attach-
crane attachment. There are three modes in the rig- ment, connecting the electric wirings of the load cell
ging mode. Rigging mode is selected using the (tension detector), angle indicator, etc., and remov-
switch located on the left control console. ing the by-pass connector. This mode relates to low-
ering the attachment to the ground from the working
position.
WARNING Luffing Mode − with luffing attachment
The function limiters are not operational when This mode relates to raising the luffing attachment to
in the RIGGING Mode. Return the SML-10 to the working position after assembly, connecting the
normal operation before operating the crane. electric wiring of the load cell (tension detector),
angle indicator, etc., and removing the by-pass con-
With the ignition key in the OFF" position, disconnect nectors.
the main by-pass connectors from the bulkhead. Con- This mode relates to grounding the luffing attach-
nect the cable assemblies from the main cable reel and ment from the working position.
angle sensor to the proper bulkhead connectors.
Function limiters will activate in this mode when the
Once this is completed, proceed with crane configura-
load cell in the boom hoist system senses tension
tion procedure. Refer to Configuration Selection"
above the design limit during the raising/lowering of
found earlier in the Section of the Operator’s Manual.
the luffing jib, or if the luffing jib is latched to the
luffing boom (Luffing attachment protection device).

Operator’s Manual
TIP HEIGHT TIP HEIGHT TIP HEIGHT
Illuminate Illuminate Flashing
Limit Setting Limit Setting Limit Setting

Position Position Position
Tip Height Limit Set Slowdown Feature Activates Boom Hoist Function Limiter Activates
Voice Alarm: Height Limit Set Voice Alarm: Approaching Limit Voice Alarm: Auto Stop
Figure 1−59
Tip Height Limit
Operator Settable Limits

Some limits occur automatically as a result of limita- CAUTION
tions imposed by the capacity chart. The operator A sudden automatic stop may occur if the
has control over additional limits which can be set to lever is not placed in the Neutral" position.
operate within the normal chart limitations and which Crane damage may occur if a limit set button
are, in addition to, those already limited by the chart. is pushed with the control lever in any other
Operator settable limits will be stored in the comput- position other than neutral. Place control
er memory, even if the crane is shutdown, until they lever in Neutral" before pressing a limit set
are cleared. button.
Two limits are available for operator use.
2. From the normal working screen and with the con-
Radius Limit trol levers in neutral, press the Tip Height Limit Set/
Tip Height Limit Del button. The Tip Height Limit Indicator light
Setting Tip Height Limit flashes and the voice alarm Height Limit Set"
sounds.
A boom tip height limit can be set to stop boom hoist
function at a preset point determined by the opera- 3. Once the Height Limit Set/Del button is pushed,
tor. The Tip Height Limit Indicator light will illuminate the boom cannot be raised beyond that point.
Lower the boom to silence the voice alarm.
when a tip height limit is set and activated. As the
4. Lowering the boom will also stop the indicator light
boom approaches the the set limit, the slowdown
from flashing and allow the light to remain illumi-
feature activates and the voice alarm Approaching
nated.
Limit" sounds. When the boom reaches the set limit,
5. To delete the height limit, push the Tip Height Limit
the boom hoist function limiter activates, the Tip
Set/Del button when the Tip Height Limit Indicator
Height Limit Indicator light flashes, and the voice
light is illuminated.
alarm Auto Stop" sounds.
1. Place the boom in the desired position. The nu-
merical value displayed in LCD5 will be the current
angle of the boom.

Operator’s Manual
RADIUS RADIUS RADIUS
Illuminate Illuminate Flashing
Limit Setting Position Limit Setting Position Limit Setting Position
Radius Limit Set Slowdown Feature Activates Boom Lowering Function Limiter Activates
Voice Alarm: Radius Limit Set Voice Alarm: Approaching Limit Voice Alarm: Auto Stop
Figure 1−60
Radius Limit
Setting Radius Limit 2. From the normal working screen and with the con-
A boom radius limit can be set to stop boom lower- trol levers in neutral, press the Radius Limit Set/Del
ing function at a preset point determined by the op- button. The Radius Limit Indicator light flashes and
erator. The Radius Limit Indicator light will illuminate the voice alarm Radius Limit Set" sounds.
when a radius limit is set and activated. As the 3. Once the Radius Limit Set/Del button is pushed,
boom approaches the the set limit, the slowdown the boom cannot be lowered beyond that point.
feature activates and the voice alarm Approaching Raise the boom to silence the voice alarm.
Limit" sounds. When the boom reaches the set limit, 4. Raising the boom will also discontinue the indica-
the boom lowering function limiter activates, the Ra- tor light from flashing and allow the light to remain
dius Limit Indicator light flashes, and the voice alarm illuminated.
Auto Stop" sounds. 5. To delete the radius limit, push the Radius Limit
1. Place the boom in the desired position. The nu- Set/Del button when the Radius Limit Indicator
merical value displayed in LCD4 will be the current light is illuminated.
radius of the boom.
CAUTION
A sudden automatic stop may occur if the
lever is not placed in the Neutral" position.
Crane damage may occur if a limit set button
is pushed with the control lever in any other
position other than neutral. Place control
lever in Neutral" before pressing a limit set
button.

Operator’s Manual
Overload Test 3. Ensure that the Master Control Override Key
This test is achieved by using the Load Test Button. Switch is in the DISABLE" position.
It is done to confirm that the system will function 4. Continually push the load test button. Each time
properly during an overload condition. This test can the button is pushed, the load ratio reading in
only be done while in the normal working mode. LCD1 will increase. Make sure the following occurs
1. Move the gate lock lever to the Operate" position. at each load ratio interval.
2. Ensure that the Low Control Pressure indicator
light on the service monitor goes out.
Load Ratio
Items
<90% 90% x99% 100% x119% y120%
Green light illumi-
Exterior Light nates
Yellow light illuminates Red light illuminates
Bar Will not function in
override mode.
Auto Stop" is sounded.
Only sounds when con- Overload Limit" is sounded.
Voice Alarm
trol is in Lower" posi- Cannot be canceled using override switch.
tion.
Slowdown Activates only when boom control is in the Lower" position.
Feature Will not function in override mode.
Function Activates in boom lowering and winch up.
Limiter Cannot be overridden.
Load ratio, rated ca-
pacity, and actual
Display
load are canceled
(blank).
Buzzer Alarm Continuous

Operator’s Manual
Help Function
Pressing the help function will display a message in the upper portion of LCD1. Refer to the following chart for
explanation of the message. When using the help function all other buttons are disabled. Press the help
button again to return to original menu.
HELP MESSAGE
CRANE STATUS EXPLANATION
(Displayed in upper row of LCD1)
1 When there are no errors and safety devices for the moment limiter are functioning properly
Crane functions properly. −−−−−−−−
2 When the safety devices of the moment limiter function.
It is stopped automatically
Overload
by overload.
Overload Limit
by limit overload.
Overload stop
Limit working radius
by limit working radius.
Line pull limit
by line pull limit.
Boom angle upper limit by boom angle upper lim-
it.
Boom angle lower limit by boom angle lower lim-
it.
Luffing boom angle upper
Boom angle limit by luffing boom angle up-
limit
per limit. Dangerous condition.
It is stopped automatically Carefully return crane to a
Luffing boom angle lower
by luffing boom angle safe operating condition.
limit
lower limit.
Boom angle upper limit
by boom angle upper lim-
switch
it limit switch.
Jib angle upper limit
by jib angle upper limit.
Jib angle lower limit
Jib angle limit by jib angle lower limit.
Jib angle upper limit
by jib angle upper limit
switch
switch.
Offset angle limit for luffing jib
by jib offset angle limit.
Boom protection device by boom protection de-
vice.
The mode will be
changed from Auto
Free mode interlock It is in free mode.
Brake" to Free". Work
with caution.
Free mode
The free-fall is done when
When control lever is in placing the winch lever in
Free-fall alarm
neutral, hook will free-fall. Neutral" position. Work
with caution.

Operator’s Manual
HELP MESSAGE
Anti-two block by anti-two block limit
switch.
It is stopped automatically Dangerous condition.
Radius limit
by radius limit. Carefully return crane to a
It is stopped automatically safe operating condition.
Range limit Tip height limit
by tip height limit.
Anti-two block limit
by anti-two block limit.
It is slowed down auto- About to stop automati-
Slowdown before each automatic stop. (When the
matically by slowdown cally by the safety device.
voice alarm of Auto Stop" is sounded.)
device. Work with caution.
3.1 When any error occurs during information input.
In Setting of drum layer/
row number" of the set-
ting mode, confirm the
layer and row numbers of
Check drum layer/row the wire rope and enter
number. the correct information.
When it is not returned
even if they are set cor-
rectly, contact your near-
est distributor.
Something is wrong with
boom tension signal.
jib tension signal.
boom angle signal.
When any error occurs in the jib angle indicator sig- Something is wrong with
nal. (When E−13" or E−27" is displayed on LCD3.) jib angle signal. Contact your nearest dis-
Something is wrong with tributor.
When any error occurs in the grip controller signal.
grip controller signal.
When any error occurs in the throttle motor signal.
throttle motor signal.
When any error occurs in the rack sensor signal.
rack sensor signal.
When any error occurs in the power source of each Something is wrong with
sensor. (When E− 25" is displayed on LCD3.) power supply sensor.
Confirm the connection of
the angle indicator.
Check boom and jib When it is not returned
angle sensor wiring. even if connecting the
angle indicator, contact
your nearest distributor.

Operator’s Manual
HELP MESSAGE
After setting the curve data
− − − When the crane attachment is installed, the corresponded to the at-
curve data is set as Luffing". Attachment mode signal tachment information pro-
does not agree with grammed into the setting
− − − When the luffing attachment is installed, the selection of curve data. mode (configuration
curve data is set as Crane". mode), set the attachment
information correctly.
When any error occurs at detecting the boom hoist
detection of boom hoist
lever.
control lever.
When any error occurs at detecting the rear drum lever. detection of rear drum
control lever. Contact your nearest dis-
When any error occurs at detecting the front drum lever. detection of front drum
control lever.
When any error occurs at detecting the 3rd drum lever. detection of third drum
control lever.
3.2 When any abnormality occurs
After setting the curve
When the curve data does not select the Crane", the
data of Crane" in the set-
LMI override switch is in ON" position with the crane Please select curve data
ting mode (configuration
attachment installed. (When S−38" is displayed on of crane.
mode), set the attach-
LCD3.)
ment boom-make.
When any error occurs in the throttle motor control.
throttle motor control. Contact your nearest dis-
When any error occurs at detecting the engine speed.
detection of engine speed.
Ensure that the curve
data, boom length, boom
hook drum, jib length, jib
hook drum, and offset
When the attachment make-up set in the setting
angle are set corre-
mode (configuration mode) is incorrect. (When
Incomplete data. Please sponded to the program
E−50" is displayed on LCD3.)
set crane configuration into the setting mode,
− − − −−− The data does not have the make-up
again. and reset if the setting is
set of the curve data, boom length, boom hook drum,
incorrect.
jib length, jib hook drum, and offset angle.
When it is not returned
even if they are set cor-
rectly, contact your near-
est distributor.
When any error occurs in each memorized data.
memory.
Something is wrong with Contact your nearest dis-
When any error occurs in the control displayed.
display. tributor.
Overflowed during cal-
When overflows occur in the process of calculating.
culation.

Operator’s Manual
HELP MESSAGE
4 When the message displayed in LCD1.
After setting the curve data
When setting of the curve data is incorrect, when corresponded to the at-
changing the rigging mode to the crane/luffing set tachment information pro-
mode. Set curve selection cor-
grammed into the setting
rectly.
− − − When the luffing attachment is installed, the mode (configuration
curve data is set as Crane". mode), set the attachment
information correctly.
When the back-up battery capacity is too low. Replace battery.
It is necessary for S/C Contact your nearest dis-
When maintenance to the S/C controller is required. CONTROLLER to be in- tributor.
spected.
Stop using the hook
When any error occurs with the drum rotation indica- Something is wrong with
hoisting limit and contact
tor using the hook anti-two block limit. detection of drum speed.
your nearest distributor.
5 When the HELP" function is not applied.
In the mode that this mes-
sage is displayed, the
Cannot indicate HELP HELP message is not cor-
message. responded. Again push
the HELP switch to return
to the original position.

Operator’s Manual
Inspection 3. Display the radius in LCD4 with the LCD4 select
button.
Make a monthly inspection, in addition to the daily in-
4. Raise the boom close to the maximum working
spections, to ensure the SML-10 Load Moment Limiter
angle.
system is functioning correctly and safely.
5. Measure the working radius of the boom hook
Inspect and adjust the Load Moment Limiter after plac- block.
ing the crane on a firm, level, supporting surface.
Note: If the boom hook block is not installed,
Daily Inspection measure the working radius of the jib hook.
1. Inspect for errors in the functioning of the Load Mo-
ment Limiter system. If any problems are found, Note: The working radius is the level distance
correct immediately, or contact your nearest dis- from the centerline of rotation to the centerline
tributor for assistance. of the hook block.
2. Inspection of LCD and lamps of the display.
6. Calculate an error between the measured radius
a. Check the display console for faulty lamps and
and the radius displayed on LCD4.
LCD displays. Replace faulty lamps and LCD
displays as required. (Measured−Displayed) / Measured X100 = Error %.
b. Confirm that the contents displayed in LCD1 7. Lower the boom close to the minimum working
agrees with the attachment configured. angle.
c. Confirm that the working limits and lamps are
set correctly. Note: When the boom cannot be lowered to the
3. Inspect the function of the boom angle upper limit minimum working radius, lower the boom as far
for any errors. Refer to Confirmation of upper limit as possible.
function of the boom angle". 8. Measure the working radius of the boom hook
4. Inspect the various limit functions to verify that they block.
are working properly.
a. Inspect the minimum oil flow of the pump, with Note: When the boom hook block is not
the engine at idle. installed, measure the working radius of the jib
b. Inspect each working limit to ensure the corre- hook.
sponding lamp illuminates.
c. Operate the crane to verify each of the limits Note: The working radius is the level distance
selected are functioning properly. from the centerline of rotation to the center of
d. Confirm the crane functions stop at the limit set the hook.
and the lamp flashes for the corresponding
9. Calculate an error between the measured radius
limit.
and the radius displayed on LCD4.
5. Inspect the overload function for any errors. Refer
to Confirmation Of Overload Stopping". (Measured−Displayed) / Measured X100 = Error %.
6. Inspect the voice alarm for errors. 10. When calculated radius error exceeds a value
shown below, make the angle/radius adjustment,
Reset any of the above settings that are not set correct-
and self-weight adjustment in the setting mode
ly. If the system is not set correctly, the Load Moment
(adjustment).
Limiter will not function properly.
Note: Refer to Boom Radius/Angle Adjust-
Monthly Inspection
ment" and Self-weight Adjustment".
If the specified values selected for the working con-
figuration of the Load Moment Limiter are not set cor-
rectly, the following items cannot be checked proper- Boom
>75° 60−75° <60°
ly. If any error is found, contact your nearest distrib- Angle
utor for assistance. Error 7% 4% 2%
Inspection Of Angle Indicator

1. Select the boom hook block with the hook select Function Accuracy Inspection
switch. (If the boom hook is not installed, select the 11. Prepare a load of a known, verified weight.
jib hook.) A: With approx. 70% of lifting capacities dis-
2. Display the lifting capacities on LCD2 with the played in step 5, prepare to lift the known load.
LCD2 select button.

Operator’s Manual
B: If there is no A, With approx.100% of lifting ca- 20. Determine the lifting capacity at the measured ra-
pacities displayed in step 7), prepare a new dius from the lifting capacities table. (W)
load with a known, verified weight. 21. Determine the actual load (hook and sling wire +
C: If there is no A and B, prepare a new load with a load). (W0)
known verified weight. Place the known load 22. Calculate the Capacity accuracy.
within a safe working range so as not to over- (W0−W) / W X 100 = Capacity accuracy %
load the crane. 23. Confirm that the capacity accuracy is with +10%/−
12. Lift the known load. 0%.
13. Raise the boom until the load ratio is 90% or less.
14. Lower the boom at the slowest speed. Note: If function accuracy exceeds 10% or is
less than 0%, contact your nearest distributor
Note: If the boom is not automatically stopped for assistance.
with a light load, lower the boom until the load
ratio increases.
Periodic Replacement Of The Internal Dry
Note: With the load hoist stopped, lower the Cell Battery
boom until the boom stops automatically.
There is a battery installed in the amplifier of the
When the boom is automatically stopped with
Load Moment Limiter. Replace this battery with a
the load;
new battery every 2 years. If the battery capacity is
15. Measure the radius. (R0) too low, the Load Moment Limiter will not function
16. Determine the radius at the actual load (hook and correctly. When the battery voltage is below a stan-
sling wire + load) from the lifting capacities table. dard value, replace battery. Acknowledge message,
(R) and press ↵." is displayed on LCD1 in the work
17. Calculate the radius accuracy. mode. The indication on LCD1 is cleared by press-
(R−R0) / R X 100 = Radius accuracy %. ing the enter ↵ button.
18. Confirm that the radius accuracy is 10% or less.
Note: If the above message appears on the LCD1,
When the boom is not automatically stopped with the contact the distributor for a replacement battery. If
load; the above message is found, replace the battery
19. Measure the radius. within a few days.

Operator’s Manual
Functions To Be Adjusted With The Crane Set-up Mode
The following table shows the function, purpose, and time for adjustments using the crane set-up mode
Function Purpose When

Adjust when the working ra-
Boom angle This corrects an error de- dius is out of the specified er-
Angle/Radius For crane at- ror range.
indicator Ad- tected in the boom angle/ra-
adjustment tachment
justment dius indicator. Adjust when replacing the
boom angle indicator.
This corrects an error de-
Adjust when the working ra-
tected by the load cell (ten-
Self-weight adjustment dius is out of the specified er-
sion) due to the attachment
ror range.
self-weight.
This sets the correct value in Set before adjusting the self-
Setting of the self-weight corrected value the computer memory related weight with the same attach-
to the self-weight adjustment. ment make up.
This confirms that the upper
Upper limit stop by the limit limit stop switch and the
Confirmation switch backstop limit switches are
of the upper functioning properly. Confirm before lifting any
limit stop loads.
functioning This confirms that the upper
Upper limit stop by LMI limit stop of the upper limit
and offset angle limit by LMI.
Others For Service Use Only

Operator’s Manual
Boom Angle/Radius Adjustment
Perform this adjustment when there is a boom angle or radius error reading in the computer display or when instal-
ling the boom base section or replacing the angle sensor. Adjust after inputting the attachment make-up information
with the crane set-up mode (configuration mode).
Boom Angle Adjustment
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Use the bubble level in the operator’s cab to assist in leveling the crane.
2. Position the boom horizontal and verify 0 degree angle by using an inclinometer.
3. Loosen the locknuts on the angle sensor mounting bracket. Adjust bracket until 0 degree boom angle is dis-
played in LCD5. Tighten locknut. Refer to Figure 1−61.
Boom Radius Adjustment
4. With the control levers in the Neutral" and from the normal working screen press the SETTING START/END
button. CONFIGURATION" will now be displayed in LCD1. The Crane Setup Mode Indicator and Configuration
Mode Indicator lights will illuminate.
5. Press the ENTER button when ADJUSTMENT" is displayed in LCD1 to start the adjustment routine.
SETTING CONFIGURATION ADJUSTMENT

START/END Select item with , and press . Select item with , and press .
6. LCD1 will now prompt the adjustment items. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through the adjustment
items.
7. When Angle Adjustment appears, press the ENTER button to select that item. The Adjustment Mode Indicator
light will illuminate.
Angle Adjustment Attachment Self Weight Adjustment

Attachment Self Weight Adjustment (Clear corrected values) Check Overhoist Limiting Device
The following are displayed on each LCD; 8. Select the hook with the hook select button that the
LCD2: Drift correction value working radius is to be measured. Press the enter
LCD3: Gain correction value button.
LCD4: Working radius
LCD5: Boom angle
Set hook selection at hook to be corrected, and press ↵.
Each indicator light illuminates as shown below.
Boom head
Attachment With tip ext.
Without jib with two
make-up boom or jib
hooks
9. Set the boom angle to 60 ± 0.1° and press the En-
ter button. Position the boom at a 60° boom angle.
Boom
z z z
Indicator
Jib Indicator z
Set boom angle at 60°, and press ↵.
Working
Radius z z z
Indicator
10. Measure the actual working radius.
Boom Hook
Indicator The lamp for the hook selected with the
Jib Hook hook select switch is lit.
Indicator

Operator’s Manual
Crane rating Manual. At this time the boom hoist
3 2 1 limit switch may not be adjusted properly. Contin-
ue to hoist the boom until the boom hoist function
is stopped by the SML-10. (Example: Boom high
angle may be 80.1° on capacity chart in Crane
Rating Manual. SML-10 may not automatically
stop boom hoist function until 83.0°.)
Hoist up boom till it stops automatically, and press ↵.
13. Measure the actual working radius.

14. Input the measured working radius in LCD1 by
pressing the scroll Up/Down buttons. Press the
enter button.
1. Boom Base Section Set measured radius with YB, and press ↵.
20.4 ft
2. Cable Reel
3. Angle Sensor
Figure 1−61 15. After calculation is complete, the drift correction

Angle Sensor value in LCD2 and gain correction value in LCD3
are updated.
11. Input the measured working radius in LCD1 by 16. When Adjustment completed" is displayed, press
pressing the scroll Up/Down buttons. Press the the Enter button.
enter button.
Adjustment completed. press ↵.

Set measured radius with YB, and press ↵.
53.5 ft
17. LCD1 will now display Angle adjustment". Press

the Setting Start/End button to complete the angle
Note: Before continuing to step 12, it is best adjustment routine.
raise the boom to approximately 78° and stop. 18. Lower boom to approximately 75° or until the voice
Move the Pump Control Switch on the rear drum alarm message stops. Return the control levers to
control lever to the ON" position. Continue to neutral. Verify the Pump Control Switch on the rear
raise the boom until boom hoist function is drum control lever is in the ON" position. Slowly
stopped. raise the boom to verify SML-10 will automatically
stop boom hoist function at the designated high
12. After calculation is complete, raise the boom until
boom angle. The boom angle shown in LCD5 and
the boom is automatically stopped (boom angle
the boom angle at which the boom is stopped au-
upper limit). Press the enter button.
tomatically by the SML-10 should agree with the
Note: Boom hoist function will be stopped one maximum boom angle in the Crane Rating Manual.
of two ways: 1) automatically by high angle limit 19. Verify boom hoist limit switch is set correctly
programmed into SML-10; or 2) boom hoist limit (+0.10) after the high angle limit is stopped by
switch. SML-10. (Example: SML-10 automatically stops
boom hoist at 80.1°. Boom hoist limit switch must
Note: During the boom hoist operation, the high be set at 80.2°). Refer to Boom Hoist Limit Switch
boom angle that appears in LCD5 may exceed the Adjustment" found in Section 4 of this Operator’s
maximum boom angle that is in shown in the Manual.

Operator’s Manual
Self-weight Adjustment
This corrects an error in the load cell tension due to the change in the attachment self-weight. Adjust when the
working radius is found to be incorrect. Adjust after inputting the attachment make-up information with the crane
set-up mode (configuration mode).

items.
4. When Attachment self weight adjustment" appears, press the ENTER button to select that item. The Adjust-
ment Mode Indicator light will illuminate.

The following are displayed on each LCD; 5. Select the hook with the hook select button that the
LCD2: Boom load cell self-weight correction value working radius is to be measured. Press the enter
LCD3: Correction point number. switch.
LCD4: Working radius
LCD5: Boom angle
Set hook selection at hook to be corrected, and press ↵.
Note: If the self-weight adjustment for the same at-
tachment configuration is not performed, HELP" is
displayed in LCD2. 6. Raise the boom until the adjustment mode indica-
tor light flashes and voice alarm Auto Stop"
Each indicator light illuminates as shown below. sounds.
Boom head
make-up boom or jib
hooks Hoist the boom till adjustment lamp is blinking.
Boom
z z z
Indicator
Jib Indicator z 7. Place the boom hoist lever in the Neutral" position.
Working Press the Enter button.
Radius z z z
Indicator
Set lever in neutral. Starting adjusment. Press ↵.
Boom Hook
Indicator

Operator’s Manual
8. Slowly lower the boom. Keep the hook block neutral." is displayed in LCD1, and press the Set-
approx. 3 ft. above the ground while lowering the ting Start/End button to complete the setting mode
boom. (adjustment).
The correction point has six places as shown be-
low. The correction point Nos. (6 thru 1) are dis-
played on LCD3. When the boom approaches the Adjustment completed. Set the lever in neutral.
correction point, the adjustment mode indicator
light flashes and the number of the correction point
changes in LCD3. The light will illuminate after 10. LCD1 will now display Attachment Self Weight Ad-
passing the correction point. justment". Press the Setting Start/End button to
complete the self weight adjustment.
Note: Lower the boom slowly during the ad-
justment mode and do not stop lowering the Attachment Self Weight Adjustment
boom when indicator light flashes at each Select content withYBand press ↵.
correction point.
Remedy when placing the boom hoist lever in

Lower the boom slowly. Calculating Now. Neutral" position in the middle of adjustment
6 When placing the boom hoist lever in Neutral" position
5
4 in the middle of adjustment (when the adjustment of
correction point No. 6 to 1 is not complete), Finish → ↵
3
Continue → Lower" in LCD1 is displayed. Proceed with
2 the following procedures to complete the adjustment
of the self weight.
1 1. Perform Step 8 above, and then proceed to Step 2.
2. When Finish → ↵ Continue → Lower" in LCD1 is
displayed, push the enter button. It returns to initial
indication of setting mode (adjustment).
3. Push the Setting Start/End button to complete the
setting mode (adjustment).
9. Place the boom hoist lever in the Neutral" position

when Adjustment is completed. Set the lever in

Operator’s Manual
Resetting Self-weight Corrected Value
This stores the new correction value in the computer memory after correcting the self-weight.
Reset before adjusting the self-weight with a same attachment make-up.
Correct after setting the attachment make-up information with the crane set-up mode (configuration mode).

items.
4. When Attachment self weight adjustment (Clear corrected values)" appears, press the ENTER button to select
that item. The Adjustment Mode Indicator light will illuminate.

The following are displayed on each LCD; 5. When “Clear ! ↵” is displayed in LCD1, press
LCD2: Boom load cell self-weight correction value the ENTER button.
LCD3: Correction point number.
LCD4: Working radius Clear ! ↵. Calcuting now.
LCD5: Boom angle
Note: If the self-weight adjustment for the same at-

tachment configuration is not performed, HELP" in 6. Press the ENTER button when Clearing com-
LCD2 is displayed. pleted" is displayed.
Each indicator light illuminates as shown below. Clearing Competed. press ↵.
Boom head
make-up boom or jib
hooks
Boom 7. Press the SETTING START/END button. This com-
z z z
Indicator pletes the crane set-up mode (adjustment).
Jib Indicator z 8. The display returns to Initial indication of setting
Working mode (adjustment).
Radius z z z
Indicator
Boom Hook
Indicator

Operator’s Manual
Boom Hoist Limit Stop And Boom Backstop Limit Stop Confirmation
The boom hoist limit stop and the backstop limit stop can be activated by the limit switches and the Load Moment
Limiter. The boom hoist function must stop automatically at the appropriate angle. Use the following procedures to
confirm that the automatic stop functions properly before performing lift crane operations. The proper crane config-
uration must be input before performing confirmation procedure.
Boom Hoist Limit Stop from the Limit Switch

items.
4. When Check Overhoist Limiting Device" appears, press the ENTER button to select that item. The Adjustment
Mode Indicator light will illuminate.

5. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to toggle between 12. Hold the Boom Hoist Limit Override switch in the
L/S (Limit Switch) and LMI (Load Moment Limiter). Override" position and boom up until the back-
Item selected will be blinking. When L/S" is blink- stop limit switch activates (approximately 82°). Re-
ing press the ENTER button. lease the Boom Hoist Limit Override switch to the
Normal" position.
L/S LMI 13. Confirm that: 1) all crane functions have stopped
Select content withYBand press ↵. (except swing and travel, 2) voice alarm Backstop
Limit" sounds, and 3) angle limit indicator light illu-
minates.
6. Raise the boom until the boom hoist limit switch ac- 14. Hold the Boom Backstop Override switch in the
tivates (approximately 80°). Override" position and boom down until the back-
7. Confirm that: 1) boom hoist function has stopped, stop limit switch de-activates. Release the Boom
2) voice alarm Boom Hoist Limit" sounds, and 3) Backstop Override switch to the Normal" position.
angle limit indicator light illuminates. 15. If both limit switches activated at the proper angle,
8. If the boom hoist limit switch does not activate at press the ENTER button to complete confirmation.
80°, discontinue procedure and adjust limit switch.
Refer to Boom Hoist Limit Switch Adjustment" Check it stops automatically by angle upper limit switch.
found in Section 4 of this Operator’s Manual. Finish ! ↵.

9. Place the boom hoist lever in neutral.
10. After boom hoist limit switch confirmation, proceed
to backstop limit switch confirmation. 16. Press the SETTING START/END button. This com-
pletes the crane set-up mode (adjustment).
Boom Backstop Limit Stop 17. The display returns to Initial indication of setting
11. Place the Master Control Override Key Switch in mode (adjustment).
the Enable" position.

Operator’s Manual
Boom Hoist Limit Stop from the Load Moment Limiter

items.
4. When Check Overhoist Limiting Device" appears, press the ENTER button to select that item. The Adjustment
Mode Indicator light will illuminate.

5. Press the UP/DOWN buttons to toggle between 8. Place the boom hoist lever in neutral.
L/S (Limit Switch) and LML (Load Moment Limiter). 9. Lower the boom until the upper limit stop is re-
Item selected will be blinking. When LMI" is blink- leased.
ing press the ENTER button. 10. Place the boom hoist lever in neutral.
11. Press the ENTER button to complete confirmation.
L/S LMI
Select content withYBand press ↵. Check it stops automatically by angle upper limit switch.
Finish ! ↵.
6. Raise the boom until the boom hoist upper limit

stop activates by the LMI (approximately 77°). 12. Press the SETTING START/END button. This com-
7. Confirm that: 1) boom hoist function has stopped, pletes the crane set-up mode (adjustment).
2) voice alarm Boom Hoist Limit" sounds, and 3) 13. The display returns to Initial indication of setting
angle limit indicator light illuminates. mode (adjustment).

Operator’s Manual
Boom Angles For Activating Boom Upper Limit Stop
Specification Equipment Upper limit stop functioning item Angle
A Boom hoist limit switch 80°
Slow down activates, Approaching Limit" voice alarm is
Limit Switch B 77°
sounded (A" minus 3 degrees)
Crane C Boom backstop limit switch activates 82°
Slow down activates, Approaching Limit" voice alarm is
D 75°
LML sounded (A" minus 5 degrees)
E Boom angle upper limit stop activates (A" minus 2 degrees) 78°
Automatic Limiting Function Charts

This crane is equipped with automatic limiting functions controlled by limit switches, the safety controller, and the
Load Moment Limiter. The following charts illustrate crane conditions when a limiting device has been activated.
Automatic Stop in Normal Work Mode

f:Operation Possible
Detecting Portion
Item ∆ :Operation Impossible (Override Operation Possible)
(Applicable: )
:Operation Impossible (Override Operation Possible)
Indicator Voice Effective
Limit Lamp Alarm Override
Name of Switch
Switch Boom Hook
Auto- Detailed Boom Hook
Pres- LMI Lower- Lower- Swing Travel
matic Function Raising Hoisting
sure ing ing
Stop
Switch
Boom
Boom
Angle Boom Back-
∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ Hoist
Max Up- Back- stop
Limit
per Limit stop
Boom Boom Crane

Angle Boom Boom
Angle Boom
Angle ∆ f f f f f Limit Hoist Hoist
Limit Upper Hoist Limit Limit
Limit Upper
Limit
Boom
Boom Boom
Angle
f ∆ f f f f Hoist Lower
Lower
Limit Limit
Limit
Hook Two
Anti-Two Hook Two Anti-Two
Upper f ∆ ∆ f f f Block
Block Overho- Block Block
Limit Limit
isting

Operator’s Manual
Automatic Stop in LMI Override
f:Operation Possible
∆ :Operation Impossible (Override Operation
Detecting Portion
Item Possible)
(Applicable: )
:Operation Impossible (Override Operation Effective
Voice External
Possible) Override
Alarm Light Bar
Switch
Limit
Name of
Detailed Switch Boom Boom Hook Hook
Mode Automat- LMI
Function Pressure Raising Lowering Hoisting Lowering
ic Stop
Switch
Boom
Boom
Angle
Boom ∆ ∆ Hoist Backstop
Max Up-
Backstop Limit
per Limit
Boom
Boom Boom Boom
Angle Boom
Angle ∆ f f f Hoist Hoist
Upper Hoist Up-
Limit Limit Limit
Limit per Limit
Boom
Boom Boom
Angle
f ∆ f f Hoist Lower
Lower
Limit Limit
Limit
Hook Two
Anti-two Hook Anti-Two
Upper f ∆ ∆ f Block
LML Block Overho- Block
Limit Limit
Override isting
Load Ra- Overload
f f f f
tio Limit Limit
Hook
Rope Overload
f f f f Red/Yel-
Overload Line Pull Limit
low
Limit
Working
Overload
Radius f f f f Limit
Limit
Hydraulic
Low Hydraulic Control
Control Control Backstop
Pressure
Pressure Pressure Reduced
Detecting

Automatic Stop in Rigging Mode
1−80
f:Operattion Possible
Detecting Portion
Item ∆ :Operattion Impossible (Override Operation Possible)
(Applicable: )
:Operattion Impossible (Override Operation Possible) Effective External
Indicator Voice
Limit Display Override Light
Lamp Alarm
Switch Boom Hook Switch Bar
Crane Boom Jib Jib Low- Hook
Mode Pres- RCL Lower- Lower- Swing Travel
Status Raising Raising ering Hoisting
sure ing ing
Switch
In crane
set-up
mode,
when a LCD1:
non (Upper
crane Column)
curve is Over- Rigging Jib Low-
se- load Mode er Limit
lected. Rigging Jib Hoist
∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ f f f Angle (Lower
In crane Limit Mode Column) Limit
set-up (Blink- Set Boom
Operator’s Manual
mode, ing) Curve Lower

Rigging when a Selec- Limit Red
non luf- tion cor-
fing rectly Boom
curve is Hoist
se- Limit
lected. Over-
load
Hydrau- Limit
Hydrau- lic Con- Hydrau-
lic Con- trol Pres- lic Con-
trol sure trol Pres-
Pres- (Service sure Re-
sure De- duced
Section 1 − Operating Instructions

Monitor)
tecting
Boom
LCD3:
Angle Protec- Boom
f f − − f f f f Help
Limit tion Acti- Hoist
Blinks
vated
Hook Two Ant-Two

f ∆ − − ∆ f f f
Overho- Block Block
Crane isting Red
Set-Up
Low Hydrau-
Hydrau- Control lic Con-
lic Con- Pres- trol
trol − − sure Pres-
Pres- (Service sure Re-
sure De- Monitor) duced
tecting
Operator’s Manual
Stop" Position
Operation"
Position
Figure 1−63
Gate Lock Lever
3 Entering And Exiting The

2
Operator’s Cab
1. Height Adjustment Knob Entering or exiting the operator’s cab could be hazard-
2. Seat Release Lever ous if certain aspects are not taken into consideration.
1
3. Seat Back Release Lever
The elevation of the crawler alone could cause serious
Figure 1−62 injury from a fall. For this reason ladders are mounted
Operator’s Seat on each side of the crawler to provide easy access to
the operator’s cab. Numerous hand grips are also at-
tached to the operator’s cab to provide safe entry to the
Operator’s Seat cab. Remain in three point contact with the crane at all
This 6-way adjustable seat is controlled by three man- times (two hands and one foot or two feet and one
ual controls. Refer to Figure 1−62. hand). Use these features to make climbing on the
crane as safe as possible.
Height Adjustment
Gate Lock Lever
To adjust the seat height, rotate the knob on the seat
When operating, place the lever down to the Opera-
bracket.
tion" position and push the lever up to the Stop" posi-
Forward/Backward Adjustment tion when waiting in the operator’s cab or entering or
exiting the operator’s cab. When the lever is pushed to
To move the seat forward or backward, move the seat the Stop" position, the pilot oil pressure gauge drops
release lever up and hold. Position the seat as desired to zero and all functions are stopped. Even if a control
and release the lever to lock the seat in place. lever is activated, the crane will not function with the
gate lock lever in the Stop" position. To start opera-
Seat Back Adjustment tions, after making sure all control levers are in the
To recline the seat back or bring the seat back forward, neutral" or lock" position, pull the gate lock lever
lift the seat back release lever and hold. Position the down to the Operation" position. Refer to
seat back as desired and move the lever down to lock Figure 1−63.
the seat back in place.
WARNING
The gate lock lever should not be placed in the
Stop" position when operating the crane.

Operator’s Manual
Before Starting Operations
Before starting daily operations, make the following
DANGER
checks and inspections: This Operator’s Manual must be thoroughly
read and understood by the operator before
Engine starting the engine. Crane damage or
Check fuel, oil, and cooling systems for proper fluid lev- personal injury could result from improper
els. Check for leaks. Repair or fill as required. Refer to operating procedures.
engine manufacturer’s manual for additional details.
Gear Cases Engine Starting Procedure

Visually inspect all gear cases for leaks or damage. If Before attempting to start the engine, the operator
leaks or damage exists, repair and fill case to proper lu- should carefully read and understand the engine start-
brication level. ing instructions in the engine manufacturer’s manual
Hydraulic System and this Operator’s Manual. Attempting to start or run
the engine before studying these instructions may re-
Check all hoses for chafing, bulging, or other damage. sult in engine damage. With crane fully serviced and
Replace as necessary. Inspect hydraulic system for ex- the operator familiar with all gauges, switches, and
ternal leaks. Repair as needed. Check hydraulic reser- controls and having read and fully understood this en-
voir oil level. Add oil if necessary.
tire manual, start the engine using the following proce-
Lubrication dures:
Lubricate the crane as outlined in Section 2 of this Op-
erator’s Manual.
WARNING
Note: Operators may have nothing to do with lubri- Diesel exhaust fumes can be
cation or maintenance of the crane, but it could be harmful. Start and operate
advantageous for them to be familiar with it. Knowl- engine in a well ventilated area.
edge of preventive maintenance makes the opera- If it is necessary to operate in an
tor more aware of malfunctions in the crane so re- enclosed area, vent the exhaust
pairs can be made with a minimum of downtime. to the outside. Properly
maintain the exhaust system to
its original design.
Wire Rope And Sheaves
Inspect all wire rope and sheaves for damage or dete-
rioration. Replace as necessary. To Start The Engine
1. Walk around the crane to verify that there are no
General Inspection persons under, or in close proximity to the crane.
Visually inspect the entire crane for loose or missing 2. Check that the crane gate lock lever is in the Stop"
cotter pins or bolts, or damaged boom or jib chords or position and all control levers are in the neutral
lattices. Check for oil or fluid leaks. Make repairs as position to prevent inadvertent operation of the
needed. crane.
3. Check that the swing brake switch, on the top of
Electrical System the swing control lever, is in the APPLIED" posi-
Check the operation of all lights, windshield wipers, tion.
horns, etc. Repair as needed. 4. Be sure both drum brake pedals are latched in the
fully applied position and all drum brake mode/
Controls
drum control switches are in the LOCK" position.
Check all controls for proper operation and adjust-
ment. Repair as needed.

Operator’s Manual
5. Sound the horn twice in succession, wait 10−15
seconds while making a visual check to verify that
Engine Shutdown
there are no persons under, or in close proximity to
the crane. Engine Shutdown Procedure
6. Pull back on hand throttle slightly and move starter 1. Lower any load to the ground and secure it prop-
switch clockwise to the first position. erly.
2. Check that the front and rear drum brake mode/le-
Note: All of the indicator lights of the service ver lock switch and the boom hoist lever lock
monitor are tested when the starter key switch is switch is in the LOCK" position and all control lev-
moved from the OFF" to the ACCESSORIES" ers are in the neutral position to prevent inadver-
position. If these lights do not illuminate when tent operation of the crane.
tested, locate and repair the problem before 3. Check that the swing brake switch, on the top of
continuing operations. the swing control lever, is in the APPLIED" posi-
7. Turn the ignition switch to the START" position. tion.
Release the ignition switch immediately after the 4. Be sure both drum brake pedals are latched in the
engine starts. If the engine fails to start in 30 sec- fully applied position and all drum lock switches
onds, release the ignition switch and allow the are in the ON" position.
starter motor to cool a few minutes before trying to 5. Throttle the engine back to idle.
start the engine again. If the engine fails to start af- 6. Turn the starter key switch to the OFF" position.
ter four attempts, refer to the engine manufactur- 7. Push gate lock lever to the Stop" position.
er’s manual for instructions. 8. Latch both drum brake pedals in the fully applied
position and move all drum brake mode/drum con-
Note For cold engine starts, hold the key switch trol switches to the LOCK" position.
in the full counterclockwise direction to ener- 9. Remove the ignition key and lock the door if the
gizes the engine heater element (glow plug). crane is to be left unattended.
8. Warm Up − Run the engine at low throttle with no

load while engine is warming up. Observe the fol-
Break-In Period
lowing instruments for proper indications: Operate a new crane at half throttle for the first twenty
a. Service Monitor − Eight individual indicator (20) hours of operation. A break-in period under mod-
lights are contained in this one gauge. The ap- erate loads will assist in providing long, trouble-free
propriate indicator will illuminate for any one of performance.
the following conditions:
− Engine oil filter is being bypassed
− Low engine oil pressure
− High engine coolant temperature
− Low engine coolant level
− Swing brake applied
− Low battery electrolyte level
− Low charging voltage at battery
− Restricted air flow at engine air cleaner
b. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge − In cold
weather, do not operate the crane with a load
until the hydraulic oil temperature registers in
the green area of the gauge.
9. When the engine has thoroughly warmed up, all
pressures and temperatures are within operating
ranges, and all daily checks have been made, the
crane is ready for operation.

Operator’s Manual
5. Check that the proper counterweight arrangement
General Operation is properly installed. Do not make lifts which ex-
The following procedure contains helpful information ceed capacity chart specifications.
for typical lift crane operation. This information is gen- 6. Check that the correct configuration has been en-
eral in nature and is not intended to serve as a fail safe tered in the Rated Capacity Limiter.
procedure for any and all situations. The operator 7. Raise the boom and swing over the load.
8. Lower the hook block/ball and fasten it to the load.
must, at all times, be alert and fully aware of the load
The following points must be observed:
requirements and specific job site conditions. The op-
a. The boom peak must be directly above the
erator must be ready and able to perform any change
load. (Booms are made to lift, and should
in procedure, in a moments notice, to safely operate
never be used to drag a load sideways.)
the crane as the immediate situation changes. b. Always use chains, wire ropes and/or slings of
ample size and make periodic checks of their
Lift Crane Operation condition.
Cranes are used primarily for making heavy lifts. In or- c. Always use sufficient parts of line. Consult
der to do this properly, certain procedures must be fol- Wire Rope Capacity chart in the Crane Rating
lowed. The following is a suggested procedure for Manual for the number of parts of line needed
making typical lifts: for a given lift.
1. Determine the weight to be lifted. Be sure to add the d. When lifting loads, care should be taken to pre-
weight of the hook block/ball, slings, rigging, jib, etc. vent sudden loading or unloading of the winch
Determine height to which the load must be lifted. rope. Ease into the load. Lift the load a few
2. Consult the Working Areas, Working Range, and inches off the ground and hold to check the
the appropriate capacity chart located in the Crane brakes.
Rating Manual. Find the shortest boom length and 9. Lift the load to the desired height. Boom to the de-
load radius that will accomplish the job and assem- sired angle. Be careful when booming down or
ble the crane accordingly.
swinging the load, as these increase the load ra-
3. Position the crane so a minimum swing is necessary.
dius and result in a decrease in capacity. Make
4. The crane must be supported by a firm, level sur-
sure the load being lifted remains within the lifting
face before starting to lift. All capacities on the ca-
pacity charts in the Crane Rating Manual are based capacity of the crane for the boom length, radius
on the crane being level in all directions. If the and working area being used.
crane is not level, out swing or side swing of the 10. Control the load at all times. Use hand lines to
load will greatly reduce lifting capacities and could guide the load. Do not guide loads into place with
cause crane damage or an accident. If the ground your hands. Swing slowly and smoothly. Avoid
is soft, use mats. jerks when starting or stopping swings.

Operator’s Manual
Crane Assembly And 4
Disassembly 4
When transporting the crane it must be disassembled.

When at the job site, it will require reassembly. The fol-
lowing instructions are recommended safe procedures 3
for assembling and disassembling the crane. Due to job
site conditions and the availability of auxiliary equip- 1
ment, other methods may be used only if they are prov- 2
en, safe methods. If any questions exist about the safety
of any procedure, contact you distributor.
Crane Assembly
1. Install the side frames. Refer to Side Frame Instal-
lation And Removal" found later in this Section of 1. Pin
the Operator’s Manual. 2. Keeper Plate
2. Install the counterweights. Refer to Counter- 3. Jack Cylinder
4. Lift Sling Location
weight Installation And Removal" found later in this
Section of the Operator’s Manual. Figure 1−64
3. Install the boom. Refer to Boom Assembly and Jack Cylinder Installation
Disassembly" found in Section 4 of this Operator’s
Manual. 4. Move lower jack cylinder switch, on the right con-
trol console to the ON" position. Refer to
Crane Disassembly Figure 1−43 for switch location.
1. Remove the boom. Refer to Boom Assembly and 5. Extend jack cylinders until they are approximately
Disassembly" found in Section 4 of this Operator’s 4 inches (102mm) from the ground. Place at least 2
Manual. inches (51mm) of matting under each pontoon to
2. Remove the counterweights. Refer to Counter- provide enough clearance between the deck of the
weight Installation And Removal" found later in this transport vehicle and the bottom of the lower
Section of the Operator’s Manual.
frame. Refer to Figure 1−66.
3. Remove the side frames. Refer to Side Frame
Installation And Removal" found later in this Sec-
tion of the Operator’s Manual.
WARNING
The crane must be on a firm, level, supporting
Side Frame Installation And surface before operating jacks. Failure to do
Removal so may result in personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
The side frames must be removed from the crane to re-
duce overall crane weight and reduce travel clearance 6. Make sure crane is on a firm, level surface. Extend
during transportation. The side frames are positioned jack cylinders until crane begins to raise. Level the
on cross axles by dowels and held in place with adjust- crane before continuing.
able wedge packs. The live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m)
self assembly section may be used to perform all the Note: A bubble level is provided on the lower
lifting required to remove or install the side frames. frame (refer to Figure 1−65) to assist in deter-
mining when crane is level.
Side Frame Installation
1. Park the transport vehicle on a firm level surface. 7. After crane is level, extend jack cylinders (main-
2. Install jack cylinders to lower frame if not already in taining levelness) to maximum stroke or until there
place. Refer to Figure 1−65. Jack cylinders weigh is enough clearance between the deck of the trans-
approximately 560 lb (254kg) each. port vehicle and the bottom of the lower frame to
3. Remove pontoons from the lower frame and install allow the transport vehicle to be driven form under
them on the jack cylinders. the crane.

Operator’s Manual
2 3
1 4
1
3
2
4
5
!
!
!
7 6
1. Two Speed − G 4. Left/Right Reverse Hose − B/C 6. Pontoon Storage

2. Case Drain Hose − H 5. Jack Cylinder Controls 7. Bubble Level
3. Left/Right Forward Hose − A/D
Figure 1−65
Lower Hydraulic Hose Connections

Operator’s Manual
1 2
3 4
Figure 1−66
Side Frame Installation
8. Slowly drive transport vehicle from under the 11. Using the live mast as a boom or the 10 ft (3.05m)
crane. self assembly section, rig a sling to side frame. Re-
9. Rig the live mast to be used as boom. Refer to Us- fer to Figure 1−67. Side frames weigh approxi-
ing Live Mast As A Boom" found in Section 4 of this mately 36,410 lb (16 515.6kg) each with 44 in
Operator’s Manual for the specific procedure. If (1.12m) track shoes and 37,610 lb (17 060kg) with
using the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section, 50 in (1.27m) track shoes.
install and/or reeve it. Refer to 10 Ft (3.05m) Self
Assembly Section − Transporting" in Section 1
and 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section" in Sec- WARNING
tion 4 of this Operator’s Manual. When using the live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m)
10. Maneuver transport vehicle, which contains the self assembly section to handle the side
first side frame to be installed, to the front or rear of frame, always refer to the appropriate
the crane to position the side frame 12−13 feet capacity chart located in the Crane Rating
(3.5−4m) from centerline of rotation of the crane. Manual to ensure lifting capacities are not
exceeded.
Note: Travel motors on the side frames must be
to the rear of the lower frame. The jack cylinder 12. Lift side frame off transport vehicle. Slowly slide
controls are located on the rear of the lower side frame onto cross axles until dowels on side
frame. frame aligns with machined holes in cross axle.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 1−67
Side Frame Lift Sling
19. Remove pontoons from jack cylinders and proper-

ly store them on the lower frame.
1 20. Remove the jack cylinders if desired.
2
3
WARNING
4 The A" auxiliary lower counterweights must
be installed prior to ABCD" upper
5 counterweights being installed. ABCD"
upper counterweights must be removed prior
6 to removal of A" auxiliary lower
counterweights. Failure to do so will result in
a backward tipping condition.
1. Keeper Plate 3. Nut 5. Cross Axle 21. Install A" auxiliary lower counterweights if re-
2. Nut Retainer 4. Wedge Pack 6. Dowel quired. Refer to Figure 1−69. Auxiliary lower
Figure 1−68 counterweights weigh approximately 24,000 lb
Cross Axle Wedge Pack (10 886kg) each with 44 in (1.12m) track shoes
and 21,500 lb (9 752kg) each with the 50 in
(1.27m) track shoes.
13. Raise side frame until dowels on side frame en-
22. Install the upper counterweight(s). Refer to Coun-
gage with machined holes in cross axles. Refer to
terweight Installation And Removal" found later in
Figure 1−68.
14. Install the cross axle wedge pack and torque nuts this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
to 680−748 ft lb (922−1 014Nm). 23. Install boom to the crane. Refer to Boom Assem-
bly And Disassembly" found in Section 4 of this Op-
Note: The side frame, cross axle, and wedge erator’s Manual.
packs are stamped with numbers or letters
which must be matched up to ensure proper Side Frame Removal
installation. 1. Park crane on a firm level surface.
15. Repeat Steps 10 thru 14 for the other side frame.
16. Lower crane onto side frames by fully retracting
lower jack cylinders. WARNING
17. Re-torque the cross axle wedge pack nuts. Install The crane must be on a firm, level, supporting
wedge pack keeper plates and nut retainers. surface before operating jacks. Failure to do
18. Connect the hydraulic hoses for the travel motors. so may result in personal injury and/or
Refer to Figure 1−65. equipment damage.

Operator’s Manual
1 2
1. Side Frame
2. A" Auxiliary Lower Counterweight
Figure 1−69
A" Auxiliary Lower Counterweight Removal And Installation
2. Remove the boom from the crane and rig the live
mast to be used as a boom or install and/or reeve CAUTION
the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section. Refer to Do not exceed 800 ft lb (1 085Nm) of torque
Boom Assembly And Disassembly" and Using while removing wedge packs. If wedge pack
Live Mast As A Boom" or 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assem- does not loosen, strike wedge pack with a
bly Section" found in Section 4 of this Operator’s hammer or travel crane a short distance.
Manual for the specific procedures.
3. Remove the upper counterweight(s) from the 6. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses for the travel mo-
crane. Refer to Counterweight Installation And tors. Install all dust caps and plugs to prevent con-
Removal" found later in this Section of the Opera- taminants from entering the system. Refer to
tor’s Manual for the specific procedures. Figure 1−65. Secure hoses so they will not be
damaged during removal and transport.
7. Install jack cylinders to lower frame if not already in
WARNING place. Refer to Figure 1−65. Jack cylinders weigh
The A" auxiliary lower counterweights must approximately 560 lb (254kg) each.
be installed prior to ABCD" upper 8. Remove pontoons from the lower frame and install
counterweights being installed. ABCD" them to the jack cylinders.
upper counterweights must be removed prior 9. Swing over the side and attach side frame lifting
to removal of A" auxiliary lower sling to hook block.
WARNING
4. Remove A" auxiliary lower counterweights if re- When using the live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m)
quired. Refer to Figure 1−69. Auxiliary lower self assembly section to handle the side
counterweights weigh approximately 24,000 lb (10 frame, always refer to the appropriate
886kg) each with 44 in (1.12m) track shoes and capacity chart located in the Crane Rating
21,500 lb (9 752kg) each with the 50 in (1.27m) Manual to ensure lifting capacities are not
track shoes. exceeded.
5. Remove wedge packs from side frame. Refer to
Figure 1−68.

Operator’s Manual
1 2
3 4
Figure 1−70
Side Frame Removal
10. Move lower jack cylinder switch, on the right control 15. Slide side frame off the cross axle. Swing upper
console to the ON" position. Refer to Figure 1−43 and load side frame onto transport vehicle. Side
for switch location. frames weigh approximately 36,410 lb (16
11. Extend jack cylinders until they are approximately 515.6kg) each with 44 in (1.12m) track shoes and
4 inches (10cm) from the ground. Place at least 2 37,610 lb (17 060kg) with 50 in (1.27m) track
inches (5cm) of matting under each pontoon to shoes.
provide enough clearance between the deck of the 16. Repeat steps 9,14, and 15 for the other side frame.
transport vehicle and the bottom of the lower frame 17. Position upper over the side of the lower frame and
to allow the transport vehicle to be driven under the engage the four position swing lock.
crane. Refer to Figure 1−70. 18. Lower live mast to transport position (3° from hori-
12. Extend jack cylinders until side frames just clear zontal). If the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section
the ground. Level the crane before continuing. and base section are going to remain on the crane,
refer to 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section−
Note: A bubble level is provided on the lower Transporting" found later in this Section of the Op-
frame (refer to Figure 1−65) to assist in deter- erator’s Manual.
mining when crane is level. 19. Maneuver transport vehicle under lower frame and
between jack cylinders, with crane upper facing to
13. After crane is level, extend jack cylinders (main- the rear of the of the transport vehicle. Lower crane
taining levelness) to maximum stroke or until there onto blocking on the transport vehicle.
is enough clearance between the deck of the trans- 20. Secure crane to transport trailer.
port vehicle and the bottom of the lower frame to 21. Remove pontoons from jack cylinders and store
allow the transport vehicle to be driven under the them on the lower frame.
crane. 22. Remove jack cylinders from lower frame, if desired.
14. Position transport vehicle to the front or rear of the 23. Remove winch line from live mast or 10 ft (3.05m)
crane 12 to 13 ft (3.6 to 4m) from the center line of self assembly section and secure it at the winch
rotation of the crane. drum.

Operator’s Manual
1
4 2 3
EXTEND EXTEND EXTEND EXTEND
RETRACT RETRACT RETRACT RETRACT
ABCD L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.

CTWT CYL. CTWT PIN CYL.
ABC 2
AB
A Emergency Controls
POWER
CTWT CYL.
1 EXTEND
BOTH
CYL.
ON
1. Base Counterweight 3. Right Wing Counterweight ONLY
L.H.
ONLY
R.H.
RETRACT
2. Left Wing Counterweight 4. Connecting Link CYL. CYL. OFF
IN OUT OUT IN
CTWT PIN
Figure 1−71
Counterweight Assembly
CTWT REMOTE CONTROL BOX CER2435
Counterweight Installation
And Removal 1. Remote Connection 2. Remote Control Box
Figure 1−72
Counterweight Controls
WARNING
The A" auxiliary lower counterweights must The crane’s live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly
be installed prior to ABCD" upper section can be used to perform all the lifting required to
counterweights being installed. ABCD" assemble the counterweights. Refer to Using Live
upper counterweights must be removed prior Mast As A Boom" or 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Sec-
to removal of A" auxiliary lower tion" in Section 4 of this Operator’s Manual.
The counterweights can be removed and installed us-

WARNING
ing two hydraulic cylinders located at the rear of the up- Do not install counterweights onto upper
per frame. These cylinders are used to raise and lower while crane is on carbody jack cylinders. Side
the pre-assembled counterweights to and from the frames must be installed and set before
ground. The controls which operate the cylinders are installing the counterweights.
located on a remote control box connected at the right
side of the upper platform, near the counterweight, be-
hind an access door. Refer to Figure 1−72.
Counterweight Assembly
Assemble the counterweights on a firm, level surface
The upper counterweights consist of a 14,000 lb
using a helper crane, the live mast, or the 10 ft
(6 350kg) base counterweight and up to (8) 13,000
(3.05m) self assembly section. Refer to Using Live
lb (5 897kg) wing" counterweights which attach to
Mast As A Boom" or 10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly
t h e top of th e ba s e cou n t e r w e ig h t . Re fe r to
Section" in Section 4 of this Operator’s Manual. Re-
Figure 1−71. They can be installed to the upper in
fer to Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities and
A", B", C " or D" combinations depending upon
component weights.
the desired capacities. Combinations are as fol-
1. Place the base counterweight on firm, level sur-
lows:
face.
A" = Base Counterweight + 1 Wing Pair
2. Position the left and right wing counterweights
AB" = Base Counterweight + 2 Wing Pairs
onto the base counterweight.
ABC " = Base Counterweight + 3 Wing Pairs
3. Attach counterweights on base counterweight with
ABCD" = Base Counterweight + 4 Wing Pairs
the connecting links. Secure connecting links with
keeper pins.

Operator’s Manual
Counterweight Installation 6. Connect the control box to the outlet at the right
rear of the upper. Turn the power on.
Note: When the control box power is turned on,

WARNING the lamp will illuminate. If it does not illuminate,
The A" auxiliary lower counterweights must check the connection to the upper. The control
be installed prior to ABCD" upper switches located on the upper are for emergen-
counterweights being installed. ABCD" cy situations only.
upper counterweights must be removed prior
to removal of A" auxiliary lower 7. Retract counterweight cylinders to lower lifting
counterweights. Failure to do so will result in pendants to the base counterweight connecting
a backward tipping condition. link.
8. Connect the lifting pendants to the base counter-
1. With the counterweights properly assembled on weight connecting link with the connecting pins.
firm, level surface, position upper over the front of Secure with keeper and cotter pins.
the crawler. Engage the travel swing lock. 9. Extend the counterweight cylinders to raise the
2. Position the crane so the counterweight can be counterweight until the connecting holes of the
lifted with the counterweight cylinders. base counterweight align with the upper frame.
3. Place blocking under the end of the tracks. Refer 10. Extend the counterweight pin cylinders to secure
to Blocking For Over End Blocked Lifting Capaci- counterweight to upper. Secure with lock pins.
ties" found later in this Section of the Operator’s 11. Install the two stabilizer bolts on the back side of
Manual. the upper frame into the base counterweight.
4. Lower the boom onto blocking. Properly torque the bolts.
5. Move the lower jack cylinder switch located on the
Note: Crane may have to be walked onto the
right control console (Refer to Figure 1−43 for
blocking to level the counterweight to install the
switch location) to the ON" position to supply
mounting bolts.
pressurized oil to the counterweight cylinder.
12. Fully retract the counterweight cylinders.
13. Turn off the power to the control box and discon-
CAUTION nect it from the crane. Properly store the control
The control box is an electrical device. box.
Handle it carefully. Dropping it may cause 14. Store the wedged blocking.
damage.

Operator’s Manual
3 4
8
12 10 9
11
1. Arm 5. Wing Counterweight 9. Counterweight Pin Cylinder

2. Counterweight Cylinder 6. Base Counterweight Connecting Link 10. Lock Pin
3. Lifting Pendant 7. Base Counterweight 11. Counterweight Pin
4. Connecting Pin 8. Wedged Blocking 12. Stabilizer Bolt
Figure 1−73
Counterweight Installation

Operator’s Manual
Counterweight Removal 5. Connect the control box to the outlet on the right
rear of the upper. Turn the power on. Refer to
Figure 1−72.
WARNING Note: When the control box power is turned on,
The A" auxiliary lower counterweights must the lamp will illuminate. If it does not illuminate,
be installed prior to ABCD" upper check the connection to the upper. The control
counterweights being installed. ABCD" switches located on the upper are for emergen-
upper counterweights must be removed prior cy situations only.
to removal of A" auxiliary lower
counterweights. Failure to do so will result in 6. Extend the counterweight cylinders until the coun-
a backward tipping condition. terweights are supported by the lifting pendant.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface and position

the upper over the front of the crawler. Engage the WARNING
travel swing lock. Remove the stabilizer bolts before lowering
2. Place blocking under the end of the tracks. Refer the counterweight. Failure to do so may result
to Blocking For Over End Blocked Lifting Capaci- in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ties" found later in this Section of this Operator’s
7. Remove the two stabilizer bolts from the back side
Manual.
of the upper frame. Refer to Figure 1−74.
3. Lower boom onto blocking.
8. Remove lock pins from the counterweight pin cylin-
4. Move the lower jack cylinder switch located on the
ders. Retract the counterweight pin cylinders.
right control console (Refer to Figure 1−43 for
9. Fully retract the counterweight cylinders to lower
switch location) to the ON" position to supply
the counterweights on the ground.
pressurized oil to the counterweight cylinder.
10. Remove the connecting pins from the base coun-
terweight lifting links.
CAUTION 11. Turn off the power of the control box and discon-
nect it from the crane. Properly store the control
The control box is an electrical device. box.
Handle it carefully. Dropping it may cause 12. Store the wedged blocking.
damage.

Operator’s Manual
8 7
10
11
12
1. Arm 5. Base Counterweight 9. Counterweight Pin

2. Counterweight Cylinder 6. Wedged Blocking 10. Lifting Pendant
3. Base Counterweight Connecting Link 7. Counterweight Pin Cylinder 11. Connecting Pin
4. Wing Counterweight 8. Lock Pin 12. Stabilizer Bolt
Figure 1−74
Counterweight Removal

Operator’s Manual
1 2
3
6 5 4
1. Front Drum Rope 4. Wear Block

2. Rear Drum Rope 5. Third Drum Fleeting Sheave
3. Third Drum Rope 6. Idler Sheaves
Figure 1−75
Third Drum Winch
The Automatic Brake Mode allows normal operation of

Third Drum Winch the winch, which matches the front and rear winch. It is
A third drum may be mounted in the boom base sec- power up/power down with an automatic brake which
tion. Refer to Figure 1−75. Although there are other applies when the third drum control lever is in neutral.
uses, such as load hoisting for luffing attachment ap- The Free Mode allows the automatic brake to release.
plications, the third drum was added to optimize the In Free Mode the wire rope can be pulled off the drum
operation of pile driving. It is used where the third drum with a force of approximately 500 lb (227kg).
line is reeved over the boom point and left attached to
To operate the third drum for pile driving applications:
the piling as it is being driven by the hammer.
1. With third drum in Automatic Brake Mode, attach
The third drum is controlled by the third drum control the wire rope to the pile.
lever. It has two modes of operation, Automatic Brake 2. Using the third drum, hoist the pile into position un-
Mode and Free Mode. der the hammer.
3. Move the mode switch to the Free Mode position.
4. The pile will pull wire rope off the drum as it is driven
WARNING into the ground. This is advantageous to the oper-
The third drum is not equipped with a foot ator because the drag on the wire rope is provided
pedal and true free-fall as are the main by the winch and the operator does not have to
winches. It cannot be used to free-fall loads. constantly watch the third drum wire rope.
It cannot be used to lift a load unless it is in the
Automatic Brake Mode.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 5 3 6
0.8 in (20mm)
1. Drive Sprocket 3. Blocking 5. Track Roller

2. Side Frame 4. Front Idler 6. Track Shoe
Figure 1−76
Blocking For Over End Blocked Lifting Capacities
3. Move the crane up onto the blocking. Be sure

Blocking For Over End blocking is evenly positioned under the end of
Blocked Lifting Capacities each side frame.
The crane has over end lifting capacities when block- Note: The clearance between the foremost
ing is placed under the side frame sprockets or idlers to track roller and track shoe should be 0.8"
prevent rocking. Use the following procedure to place (20mm).
the blocking under the end of the tracks.
Placing The Blocking For Over End WARNING

Blocked Lifting Capacities Ensure that the surfaces of the blocking and
1. Remove the blocking from storage. the track shoes contact evenly. If surfaces do
2. Place the blocking under the end of the tracks that not contact evenly, blocking will be damaged.
the load is being lifted, as shown in Figure 1−76.

Operator’s Manual
TRAVEL TRAVEL
HOIST LOWER USE MAIN HOIST (One track) (Both tracks)
USE WHIP LINE RAISE BOOM LOWER BOOM SWING STOP
RAISE THE BOOM AND LOWER THE BOOM AND EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM
MOVE SLOWLY LOWER THE LOAD RAISE THE LOAD (Telescoping booms) (Telescoping booms)
EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM

TRAVEL DOG EVERYTHING EMERGENCY STOP (Telescoping booms) (Telescoping booms)
Extracted from the American National Standard, Crawler, Locomotive and Truck Cranes, ANSI B30.5b−1985, with the
permission of the Publisher the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 E. 47th Street, New York, New York 10017.
Figure 1−77
Hand Signals
These signals should be used at all times unless voice

Hand Signals instructions with a radio or telephone are being used.
Hand Signals are important for communications be- One person should be designated as a signalman and
tween the designated signalman and the operator. A their signals obeyed by the operator. Obey a stop sig-
hand signal chart, Figure 1−77, is included in this Sec- nal from anyone.
tion. A copy is also located on the exterior of the crane.

Operator’s Manual
CAUTION
Do not lower the live mast below the minimum travel clearance shown above. Boom
hoist ropes will contact the live mast cross member and may do damage to it. The above
assembly is for transport of the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section and base section
only. Do not use the link without the 8 ft (2.4m) pendants during self assembly. Do not
cantilever or assemble boom with this arrangement.
52’−0.70"
(15.87m)
10’−11.91"
(3.35m) !
!
8’−3.71" 20’−3.31"
(2.53m) (6.18m)
Figure 1−78
10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section − Transporting
and the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section. When the

10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly base section and the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly sec-
Section − Transporting tion are lowered, the boom hoist ropes will contact the
The 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section is used during live mast cross member. Wear on the live mast may oc-
self assembly operations of the crane. When job site cur during transportation of the 10 ft (3.05m) self as-
conditions or highway load limitations permit, the 10 ft sembly section and base section if this minimum is not
(3.05m) self assembly section and base section can re- observed.
main on the crane while transporting the crane. Leav- After unloading the crane from the transport vehicle,
ing the base section and 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly the 8 ft (2.4m) pendants must be installed before per-
section on the crane while transporting decreases self forming self assembly operations. Refer to
assembly time when reaching the job site. Check local Figure 1−78. Refer to 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly
road restrictions before transporting the crane in this Section" in section 4 of this Operator’s Manual for 8 ft
configuration to ensure compliance. (2.4m) pendant installation.
Figure 1−78 illustrates a minimum dimension which
must be observed when transporting the base section

Operator’s Manual
CAUTION
Do not lower the live mast below the
minimum travel clearance shown above. 2
Boom hoist ropes will contact the live
mast cross member and may damage it.
Do not raise the boom more than 50
degrees with the boom base section
linked to the live mast with the 3
6
transporting/traveling links. Do not
cantilever or assemble boom or transport 5 4
additional sections attached to the boom
base section while linked to the live mast.
The above assembly is for transport of the
base section only.
1. Live Mast 4. Pin With Cotter Pins 6. Transporting/Traveling Link − Stored

2. Pin With Lock Pins 5. Boom Base Section Position
3. Transporting/Traveling Link
Figure 1−79
Boom Transporting/Traveling Link
before transporting the crane in this configuration to

Boom ensure compliance.
Transporting/Traveling Link Figure 1−79 illustrates a minimum dimension which
must be observed when utilizing the boom transport-
When job site conditions or highway load limitations ing/traveling link. When the live mast and base section
permit, the transporting/traveling link can be used to are lowered, the boom hoist ropes will contact the live
support the boom base section while traveling or trans- mast cross member. Wear on the live mast may occur
porting the crane. Use of the boom transporting/travel- during transportation of the base section if this mini-
ing link while transporting eliminates the need to re- mum is not observed.
move the base section. Check local road restrictions

Operator’s Manual
Traveling The Crane Traveling With A Load (Pick & Carry)
Certain conditions must be met for safe travel when All 360 degree capacities listed in the Crane Rating
traveling with or without a load, or when traveling on a Manual are pick and carry capacities. The following
slope. Use the following procedures when traveling precautions must be followed while traveling with a
the crane. load.
1. Travel with the boom pointing straight over one end
Traveling Without A Load of the crawler lower. If the load was lifted over the
side, swing the load over the end before starting
The crane can be traveled with all boom lengths and all travel.
boom plus jib combinations as listed in the Crane Rat- 2. Engage the travel swing lock and swing brake.
ing Manual. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for liftoff 3. Travel by the smoothest, most level route. If a
capability and instructions. When moving the crane smooth, level route is not available, don’t travel
around the job site with the attachment in the air, ob- with a suspended load. Grade the route to provide
serve the following precautions for safe job site travel. a smooth, level path. If it is not possible to grade
4. Terrain must be smooth and solid. If not, grade the the route, move the load by stepping. Park the
area before moving the crane. crane on a level area, lift the load, swing around
5. Tie down the hook block to prevent it from swing- and set it down ahead of the crane. Travel the un-
ing. loaded crane beyond the load, level the crane, lift
6. Position a signalman to guide you. the load, swing and set it down farther along the
7. The boom must be positioned at a boom angle that route. Continue this procedure until the load is at
will provide the best balance from front to rear of its destination. Travel only on a smooth, level sur-
the upper and for which a capacity is given in the face.
Crane Rating Manual. If necessary, consult factory 4. Use a hand line to control the load and reduce load
for correct balance radius. All other boom angles swing.
are considered out of the allowable working range 5. Carry loads as close to the ground as possible.
of the crane and no travel is allowed. 6. Do not allow side swing of load.
7. Do not attempt to carry loads which exceed the
crane’s rating.
WARNING 8. Use a signalman to warn of any danger or obstruc-
Use a minimum of 4 parts of hoist line and tion along the route being traveled.
3500 lb (1 589kg) hook block on all booms 9. Do not travel with a load on soft ground. If the
50−100 ft (15.25−30.5m). Live mast can crane sinks into the ground, stability can be af-
overhaul boom at short radii. Crane damage fected to the point of tipping the crane.
and/or serious personal injury could occur. 10. Keep all personnel clear of the crane and load. Be
prepared to set the load down quickly at anytime.
8. The boom should be positioned over the end of the 11. Position the boom at a boom angle that will give the
crawler. Certain job site conditions will make this greatest margin of safety. If the load was lifted at a
impossible. Travel with the boom pointed over the long radius and the load is at or near capacity for
side will be allowed only when conditions prevent that radius, boom up to obtain a greater lifting ca-
traveling with the boom straight over the end. pacity (and thus a greater margin of safety) before
9. Engage the travel swing lock (upper positioned starting travel.
over the end) and the swing brake. 12. Travel slowly and cautiously in order to avoid shock
10. Travel slowly and cautiously in order to avoid any loading on the boom or crane. Use the pump con-
shock loading on the boom or crane. Use either trol switch to reduce the travel speed if necessary.
the high speed travel switch or pump control Do not let the load swing out or to the side. The
switch to reduce travel speed if necessary. load must be kept directly under the boom point at
all times.
Note: Traveling with the side frame counter-
13. Do not use the Over The End Blocked" capacities
weights installed may cause decreased travel
listed in the Crane Rating Manual. Use the 360°
torque and/or excessive wear to drive compo-
Rotation" capacities listed in the Crane Rating
nents. Remove the side frame counterweights
Manual for traveling with a suspended load.
when traveling for extended or prolonged peri-
ods of time.

Operator’s Manual
Traveling On A Slope (Without A Transporting The Crane
Load Only) When transporting the crane, precautions should be
Travel on a slope is allowed up to a grade of 30%. The taken in securing the crane to the trailer, barge or other
following precautions must be followed. means of conveyance. The crawler cross axles are the
1. When traveling on a slope, always face the crane recommended tie down points.
straight over one end of the crawler lower.
2. Engage the travel swing lock and swing brake.
3. Travel straight up or down the slope with the CAUTION
heavy" end of the crane facing uphill. The heavy If chains are wrapped around the cross axles,
end of the crane will normally be the counterweight be certain the chains will not damage any lines
end of the crane. With some long boom combina- or components.
tions, the boom end of the crane will be the heavy"
end. If possible, position the boom at a high Always exercise safety and follow all local codes when
enough boom angle so that the counterweight end loading, unloading or transporting the crane.
of the crane is the heavy" end of the crane and
travel with the boom facing downhill. Prepare crane as follows before transporting it:
4. Always travel in a slow, cautious manner when trav- 1. Properly disassemble the attachment and secure
eling on a slope. Use the pump control switch to the telescoping backstops, if equipped. Refer to
reduce travel speed if necessary. Section 4 of this Operator’s Manual for the correct
5. Do not travel with a load on a slope. Severe boom procedures.
2. Remove the counterweights and side frames. Re-
off lead and/or side load will result, which will great-
fer to Side Frame Installation And Removal" and
ly increase the loading into the boom structure.
Counterweight Installation And Removal" found
6. Watch the engine service monitor. Be alert to the
earlier in this Section of the Operator’s Manual.
engine service monitor while traveling on a slope.
3. The upper must be positioned directly over the
All lamps should be off under normal operation. If
side of the crawler with the travel swing lock en-
an engine service monitor lamp comes on while
gaged.
traveling on a slope, the slope is too great for the
crane to traverse. Limited travel will be allowed Note: The base section and/or the 10 ft (3.05m)
only to travel the crane off the slope. Continued op- extension with lifting sheaves may be left on the
eration with an engine service monitor light on will crane during transport if load limitations permit.
result in engine damage. Refer to Boom Transporting/Traveling Link" or
7. Avoid steering on a slope. Steering on a slope is 10 Ft (3.05m) Extension with Lifting Sheaves −
not recommended. Always travel straight up or Transporting" found earlier in this Section of the
down the slope. Avoid traveling with a side to side Operator’s Manual.
slope. Grade the path to eliminate any side to side 4. The live mast must be over the front of the upper.
slope. 5. All control levers in operator’s cab must be in neu-
8. Maintain gradual approach and departure angles. tral and the gate lock lever in the Stop" position.
Grade the top and bottom ends of a slope to form a 6. Lock all windows and doors. Remove the keys
gentle break−over angle. This will prevent the from the crane.
crane from lunging when the center of gravity 7. Depending on the specific situations, further prep-
crosses over the top of the slope. arations may be needed to protect the crane from
the environment or vandalism. See Crane Stor-
age" for further suggestions later in this Section of
the Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
4. Do not strap over top of boom.
Transporting The Tubular 5. Secure boom to the trailer with 4" (10cm) nylon
Boom straps over bottom boom chords as shown.
6. Wood blocking should be located directly under
When transporting the tubular boom sections, precau- nylon straps in two (2) places.
tions should be taken in securing the sections to the 7. Nylon straps must be kept very tight. Check strap
trailer. The following is the suggested method of tubu- tightness often. Straps must be twisted to prevent
lar boom tiedown for transport. When transporting tu- vibration.
bular boom sections, the following conditions must be 8. Boom Length = 10’, 20’, 30’, 40’, or 50’ (3.05m,
met: 6.1m, 9.1m, 12.2m, or 15.2m) boom extensions.
9. Boom extensions stacked together on a trailer
should be of equal length. If extensions cannot be
CAUTION of equal length, refer to Detail 3 for additional tie-
If tubular boom sections are improperly down instructions. When stacking extensions, en-
secured to the trailer, damage could occur sure that the pendants stored on top of the exten-
which may weaken the structural integrity of sions are not damaged.
the boom. 10. Counterweights, crawler side frames, etc. are al-
lowed under boom sections. Transport boom sec-
1. Spread-axle trailers are recommended for trans- tions on trailers with other crane components
porting boom sections. Locate rear blocking be- whenever possible. Do not tie boom directly to
tween, or forward of, the rear axles. Refer to Detail these other loads. Do not stack loads on top of
1, Figure 1−80. boom sections.
2. On close-group axle trailers, rear blocking must be 11. Pendants should be properly stored to top of the
located forward of the rear axle group. Refer to De- boom section during transport. Refer to Pendant
tail 2 Figure 1−80. Storage" found in Section 4 of this Operator’s
3. Do not tie down in mid span. Manual.

Operator’s Manual
Transporting Boom Sections
Boom Length 4
Boom Length 2
B
A
A
B
1 2 1 3
Detail 1 3’ (.91m) To 5’ (1.5m)
Boom Length
4
Boom Length 2
B
A
A
B
1 2 1 3
Detail 2 3’ (.91m) To 5’ (1.5m)
Boom Length A"

Boom Length B"
A" 2
4 6
ÂÂ ÂÂ
3
1 1
Detail 3 3’ (.91m) To 5’ (1.5m)
4 4
5 5
VIEW A−A VIEW B−B
7 6 7 6
1. Recommended Nylon Tie-Down 4. Pendants Secured To Top Of Boom Section
Strap Locations (Approximate) 5. Twist Nylon Straps
2. Counterweights, Crawler Side Frames, Etc. Are 6. 6" (15.24cm) Wood Blocking Minimum
Allowed, And Recommended, Under Single Boom Sections. 7. Trailer
3. Do Not Locate Rear Blocking In This Area Of The Trailer.
Figure 1−80
Boom Tiedown For Transport

Operator’s Manual
Manual for wind speed and other applicable re-
Crane Storage strictions.
Anytime the crane is going to be left unattended it 3. Thoroughly clean the crane.
should be prepared so that it will not be damaged by 4. Touch up any spots where paint has chipped. This
the elements, be an attraction to vandals, or a plaything will prevent rusting.
for children. 5. Lubricate the entire crane as per the Lubrication
Chart. Make sure all gear cases are filled to their
Short Term Storage proper oil level.
1. Do not leave the crane where it will be a traffic haz- 6. If possible, block the crane up so the tracks clear
ard. the ground. Make sure the blocking is placed so
2. Lower all loads to the ground. the crane cannot fall off it. If this is not possible, set
3. The attachment can be left in the air provided that the crane on planks so the tracks will not sink in the
the Link-Belt wind speed guidelines are adhered ground. Block the tracks to prevent the crane from
to. If the wind velocity exceeds the Link-Belt guide- rolling.
lines at any time during crane storage, lower the at- 7. Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders. Cover all cylin-
tachment to the ground. Do not take chances. If der rods and machined and unpainted surfaces
possible, store the attachment on the ground. Re- with a coat of grease.
fer to your Crane Rating Manual for wind speed 8. All control levers in operator’s cab must be in neutral,
and other applicable restrictions. all drum brake mode/drum control lock switches in
4. Be sure both drum brake pedals are latched in the the LOCK" position, and the gate lock lever in the
fully applied position and the boom hoist drum Stop" position.
pawl is engaged. 9. Cover all open areas around the engine, cab, etc.
5. The four position swing lock (or the 360_ swing to prevent entry of water. Cover the entire engine
lock if equipped) must be engaged. area with a tarp if possible.
6. All control levers in operator’s cab must be in neutral, 10. Prepare the engine as per the engine manufactur-
all drum brake mode/drum control lock switches in er’s manual. Make sure antifreeze protection is
the LOCK" position, and the gate lock lever in the sufficient to prevent the engine from freezing. If an-
Stop" position. tifreeze protection is not adequate, completely
7. Block the tracks to prevent the crane from rolling. drain the engine block.
8. In cold weather, locate the crane where it will not 11. If in a location where vandalism may occur, lock the
freeze to the ground. cab doors. Cover all cab glass with plywood or
9. Lock all windows and doors. Remove the keys boards to prevent glass breakage. Provide a
from the crane. means of locking the engine access doors, fuel
tank, and hydraulic reservoir.
Long Term Storage 12. Store the crane so it does not provide a plaything
1. Store the crane inside a building if possible. for children. Such a unit can be an attractive nui-
2. The attachment can be left in the air provided that sance" for children to play on. If they fall off it or get
the Link-Belt wind speed guidelines are adhered entangled, serious injury may result.
to. If the wind velocity exceeds the Link-Belt guide- 13. While in storage, the crane should be exercised"
lines at any time during crane storage, lower the at- every 60 days to ensure the working condition of
the crane. Start the engine and operate all
tachment to the ground. Do not take chances. If
possible, store the attachment on the ground or re- switches, control cables, and hydraulic functions
move it from the crane. Refer to your Crane Rating several times to circulate lubricants and to keep all
mechanisms and linkages operative.

Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
General Lubrication Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−1
Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−7
Lubrication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−8
Travel Unit Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12

Travel Unit Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
Travel Unit Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
Engine Air System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−12
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13

Changing Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−13
Inspecting The Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Cleaning Air Cleaner Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Compressed Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Boom Hoist Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−14
Boom Hoist Gear Case Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−15
Boom Hoist Gear Case Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−15
Boom Hoist Planetary Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−16
Boom Hoist Planetary Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−16
Front And Rear Winch Drum Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−16
Winch Drum Gear Case Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−16
Winch Drum Gear Case Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
Winch Drum Planetary Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
Winch Drum Planetary Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−17
Third Drum Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−18
Third Drum Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−18
Third Drum Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−18
Swing Speed Reducers Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−19
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−19
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−19
Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance i

Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−20
Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−20
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−20
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−21
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−21
Hydraulic System Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−22
Hydraulic System Pressure Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−22
Hydraulic System Return Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−23
Boom And Jib Inspection And Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−24
Wire Rope Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−24

Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−25
Hook Block, Ball And Swivel Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27

Lubrication Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
Inspection Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−27
Air Conditioning Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−28
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−29
Compressed Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−29
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−29
Turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30
Paint Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30

Regular Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30
Polishing And Waxing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30
Cab Console Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2−30
ii Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

Operator’s Manual
The following procedures are important for proper lu-
General Lubrication brication of the crane:
Information 1. Wipe the grease gun nozzle before lubricating.
This will help keep dirt and grit from entering the
The crane should be regularly and systematically lubri- bushing or bearing.
cated in accordance with the Lubrication Charts shown 2. Keep all grease and oil cans and containers clean.
on the following pages. Refer to Figure 2−1 thru Always replace the lid on containers when finished
Figure 2−3. A copy of this chart is also located on the to prevent entry of foreign materials. Wipe off oil
upper, behind the engine access door. The time inter- can covers before using.
vals shown on the Lubrication Charts are intended as a 3. Drain oil cases when hot to drain off accumulated
guide only. Under unusual working conditions, such sludge.
as working in dry, dusty conditions, in water, mud or 4. Watch for signs of incorrect lubrication such as fail-
around a corrosive atmosphere, more frequent lubrica- ure of clean grease to purge the old grease.
tion could be necessary. In these cases, the oiler must 5. Bleed off hydraulic pressure before opening or re-
use his best judgment and work out his own lubrication moving a line or fitting.
schedule. 6. Replace all guards before starting crane.
In addition to the points on the Lubrication Chart, all 7. Use a clean funnel equipped with a strainer for
movable linkages and control cables should be peri- pouring lubricants.
odically lubricated to resist wear. 8. Clean the area around check and fill plugs before
removing them to prevent entry of foreign particles.
There are some very practical reasons for lubricating
and lubricant changes. Lubricants serve more than Note: See specific instructions later in this Sec-
one purpose. They not only lubricate, but they trans- tion for lubrication check and change proce-
port chemically reactive additives, wash away minute dures on all gear compartments.
wear particles, serve as a corrosion inhibitor and act as
a heat transfer medium. Draining and refilling any gear
unit with a fresh supply of oil also assists in eliminating
wear particles not trapped by filters or magnetic plugs.
WARNING
Shutdown engine before fueling or lubricating
crane. To avoid a fire hazard, do not smoke or
handle fuel around an open flame. To avoid
crane damage and to prevent serious injury,
do not lubricate gears or any assemblies
while they are in motion.
Keep grease, oil, containers and guns clean. Wipe all fittings before lubrication. Block
the tracks and shutdown the engine before working on the crane. Replace all guards or
panels before operating the crane.
Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2−1

Operator’s Manual
31
32
31 6 1
2
3 4
5
6
7 8
4 9
11
10
12
13
14
30
29
19
28
27
26
19
25
19 15
24
23 16
19
22 17
19
21 15
20
19
18
Figure 2−1
Upper Lubrication And Maintenance Chart
2−2 Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

Operator’s Manual
Lube Code Intervals (hrs)
Capacity No. of See
No. Point gal (L) Above Below Points Note
−10°F −10°F 10 50 250 500 1000
1 Fuel tank 77 (290) Diesel Fuel 1 * $ 2

2 Rear drum gear case 6.6 (25) Type E Type TT 1 *, @ + 3, 5
3 Rear hoist drum brake − − − 1 0 5
Apply lev-
Front &
ers
− Type A Type KK All points 0 3, 5
4 Rear
Drum Dead end
Clutch − Type GG Type C All points 3, 5
pins
5 Hydraulic oil reservoir 42.2 (160) Hydraulic oil 1 *, $ Change oil every 1500 hours 4
Drum locks
6 (front, rear, boom hoist) − Type GG Type C 3 0 3
7 Front drum gear case 10.6 (40) Type E Type TT 1 *, @ + 3, 5

8 Front hoist drum brake − − − 1 0 5
9 Engine air cleaner − − − 1 0 5
Control valve linkage
10 and rods − Type GG Type C All points 0 3, 5
11 Engine oil See Note 2 Engine oil 1 * 2

12 Radiator See Note 2 Coolant/Soft water mix 1 0 + 2
H=0.40
(1.5)
13 Radiator reservoir tank
L=0.11
Coolant/Soft water mix 1 * 2
(0.43)
As
14 Battery
required
Distilled water 2 *, 0
15 Swing reduction unit 4.2 (16) Type E Type TT 2 *, @ + 3, 5
16 Turntable bearing − Type A Type KK 4 X 0 1, 3
Turntable gear teeth All gear
17 Swing pinion gear − Type H Type H teeth X 3
teeth surface
18 Drum brake pedals − − − 2 0 5
19 Control valves − − − All points 0
20 Fuse − − − All points 0
21 Travel swing lock pin − Type A Type KK 1 X
22 Front drum planetary 1.8 (7) Type E Type TT 1 * + 3, 5
23 Accumulator − Nitrogen gas 1 0
24 Couplings and lines − − − All points 0
25 Return filter 3.7 (14) − − 1 @ + 5
26 Rear drum planetary 1.8 (7) Type E Type TT 1 * + 3, 5
27 Oil cooler 4.8 (18) Hydraulic oil 1 0
28 Pressure Line filter − − − 2 @ + 5
29 Boom hoist gear case 2.4 (9) Type E Type TT 1 * + 3, 5
Boom hoist drum
30 planetary 1.8 (7) Type E Type TT 1 *, @ + 5

Operator’s Manual
37
33
36
34
35
Figure 2−2
Crawler Lubrication And Maintenance

Capacity No. of See
−10°F −10°F 10 50 250 500 1000
Counterweight remov-
31 al cylinder − Type A Type KK 2 X
Counterweight remov-
32 al linkage − Type A Type KK 4 X X 1, 3
33 Front idler − Type A Type KK 2 X

34 Wedge packs − − − 4 0
35 Travel reduction gear 10.8 (41) Type TT Type TT 2 *, @ + 3, 5
36 Jack cylinder − − − 4 0
37 Track shoe − − − All points 0 5
Symbol Key
*: Check fluid level and fill as required. X: Lubricate with grease.
0: Inspect, lubricate, adjust, repair, or replace as @: Change initially.
required. #: Change filter only.
+: Change oil (and filter if applicable). $: Drain water.
Notes:
Capacity is for one unit.
1. Apply grease in the amount to cause old grease to be expelled. Do not apply too much grease.
2. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for proper maintenance, lubrication, fuel, or coolant grade and
specifications.
3. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications" in this Operator’s Manual for specifications.
4. Refer to Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil" chart in this Operator’s Manual for specification.
5. Refer to this Operator’s Manual for additional information.

Operator’s Manual
10
6 11
4 12
3 13
14
1 15
16, 17
10
18
19
Figure 2−3
Attachment Lubrication And Maintenance

Operator’s Manual
Capacity No. of See
−10°F −10°F 10 50 250 500 1000
1 Bail link − Type A Type KK 4 X 1

2 Backstop foot pin − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
3 Backstops − − − All 0 5
4 Live mast − − − All 0
Bar pendants and
5 − − − All 5
links
Jib mast deflector
6 sheave − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
Jib mast equalizer

7 sheave − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
8 Wire Rope Pendants − Type GG Type C All 5

9 Wire rope − Type GG Type C All 5
All
10 Hook block/ball − Type A Type KK points 5
11 Jib − − − All 0 5
12 Boom − − − All 0 5
13 Boom hoist bridle shaft − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
14 Auxiliary lifting sheave − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
Folding backstop
15 struts − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
Change oil
3rd drum motor re-
16 duction gear 1.5 (5.7) Type TT Type TT 1 * every 1500 5
hours
17 3rd drum bearing − Type A Type KK 1 X 1
18 Live mast foot pin − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
19 Boom foot pin − Type A Type KK 2 X 1
Symbol Key
*: Check fluid level and fill as required. X: Lubricate with grease.
0: Inspect, lubricate, adjust, repair, or replace as @: Change initially.
required. #: Change filter only.
+: Change oil (and filter if applicable). $: Drain water.
Notes:
Capacity is for one unit.
1. Apply grease in the amount to cause old grease to be expelled. Do not apply too much grease.
2. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s manual for proper maintenance, lubrication, fuel, or coolant grade and
specifications.
3. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications" in this Operator’s Manual for specifications.
4. Refer to Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil" chart in this Operator’s Manual for specification.
5. Refer to this Operator’s Manual for additional information.

Operator’s Manual
Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil

Important
Use only pre-filtered hydraulic oil. Warranty is void if incorrect oil is used.
Incorrect oil may result in damage to hydraulic components. Hi Performance
Hydraulic Oil is available through your distributor in the following grades and
quantities.
Temperature Range Container Capacity
ISO Grades Ambient Maximum Hydraulic Part Number
Gallons Liters
Temperature Use System Temperature
−45_F to 80_F 150_F 5 18.9 830666001

Grade 22
−43_C to 27_C 66_C 55 208.2 830666002
10_F to 100_F 195_F 5 18.9 830663001

Grade 46
−12_C to 38_C 91_C 55 208.2 830663002
Please Don’t Do It !
Properly dispose of used lubricants and
filters. Every drop of misplaced oil damages
the environment. Each year literally
thousands of gallons of used oil is dumped
into our fields and streams or buried in
community landfills. These methods of
disposal permanently damage the world
around us. You can see that the oil you use
is properly disposed of by sending it to a
recycling center. Most local automobile
service stations are happy to receive used
oil and will see to it that the oil is recycled.

Operator’s Manual
Lubrication Specifications
The following specifications are approved for use in Link-Belt cranes. The specifications are identified by a code
letter. When a code letter appears on the Lubrication Chart, it is referring to one of the lubricants as described on
the following pages. These lubricants are listed by specifications and by one brand name. Most reputable oil
companies can provide a lubricant to match a particular specification. It may then be used in the crane no matter
what the brand name. When using other brand names, the user assumes all responsibility for product and pat-
ent liability.
Type A Type C
Bearing Grease SAE 10W/30 Detergent Engine Oil
NLGI Grade No. 2 A heavy duty refined petroleum product made with
This grease shall be a homogeneous combination high quality solvent refined neutral stocks combined
of refined mineral oil and lithium soap. This grease with a balanced detergent, dispersive additive com-
shall not contain any fillers which adversely affect bination to provide a margin of safety in oxidation sta-
the lubricating qualities of the product. It may have bility, anti-wear and extreme pressure, bearing corro-
additives that give a high degree of protection sion protection, and high and low temperature de-
against corrosion of metals and oxidation of the posit control. With high viscosity indices, low pour
grease. Also contains lead soap and extreme pres- points and excellent foam resistance.
sure additives.
Meets requirements of specification
The mineral oil shall meet the following specifica- MIL−L−46152, and exceeds the requirements of
tions: MIL−L−2104B. Meets API service classifications
Viscosity at 100_F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . 1086 SE, SD, SC, SB, CC, CB and CA.
Viscosity at 210_F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . 82.5
Viscosity at Index (Minimum) . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Physical Properties:
Timken Test Lever Load (Minimum) . . . . 40 lb
SAE Viscosity Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10W−30
Pour Point (_F) Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Gravity, _ API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0
(_C) Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −9.44
Flash Point (Minimum) COC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
The grease shall have the following physical and Viscosity at 100_F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . . . 425
chemical properties: Viscosity at 210_F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Penetration, Worked at 77_F (25_C) Viscosity Index (Minimum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
(60 Strokes) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Ash (%) Sulfur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Penetration, Unworked at 77_F (25_C) Pour Point (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −40
(60 Strokes) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −40
Penetration Change After 10,000
Mobil Delvac or Equivalent.
Strokes (%) Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Dropping Point (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Lithium Soap (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0
Lead Soap (%) 1.1
Recommended Maximum Temperature
(_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Recommended Minimum Temperature
(_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −20
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −28.8
Water (%) Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10
Texaco Marfak − All Purpose or Equivalent

Operator’s Manual
Type E Type H
Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant Open Gear Grease
Multigear Lubricant 80W/90 For open gear applications. Satisfactory down to mi-
An extreme pressure gear lubricant containing anti- nus 40_F (minus 40_C) on dry gears. Good ad-
foam protection, oxidation stability, anti-rust, and hesiveness on open gears at 73_F (22.7_C) and
anti-corrosion qualities. Contains sulfur and phos- good retention. The grease with use will become
phorus additive materials but no zinc in compliance tacky and will resist leaking. Used on cast tooth
with Eaton, General Motors and International Har- gears and ring gear teeth. Extremely resistant to
vester truck driving axle requirements. water washing.
Must meet or exceed military specifications Physical Properties:

MIL−L−2104C, and are suitable for API service
designations GL3, GL4 and GL5, with a rating of 10
Mineral Oil Component:
as determined in the shock load test CRC−L−42.
Viscosity at 100_F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . 4104
Physical Properties:
Viscosity at 210_F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . . 180
API (_F) Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1 Load Wear Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Flash, COC (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Penetration, Worked at 77_F
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 (60 Strokes) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Pour Point (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −30 Penetration, Unworked at 77_F . . . . . . . . . . 242
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −34 Dropping Point (_F) Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Viscosity at 100_F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . 829 (_C) Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Viscosity at 210_F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . 79.9 Soap Base − Calcium (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 With 22% graphite and 3% Molybdenum Dis-
Sulfur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37 ulfide
Ash (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None Water (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6
CU Corr 3 Hours 250_F (121_C) . . . . . . . . 1 b Recommended Maximum Temperature
Channel Point (_F) Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
(_C) Maximum . . . . . . . −17.7 (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.4
Timken Test Lever Load (Minimum) . . . . 50 lb Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttery Grease
Phosphorus (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Texaco Texclad #2 or Equivalent.
Texaco Code 2316 Multigear 80W/90 or Equiva-
lent.

Operator’s Manual
Type GG Type KK
SAE 15W−40 Multigrade Oil (Detergent) Engine Arctic Bearing Grease
Oil NLGI Grade No. 1
A SAE 15W−40 crankcase oil, which must meet the Low temperature, extreme pressure, all purpose
API performance standards CD/SE and CD/SF or grease made from a low pour point hydrocarbon lu-
CE/SG and contain less than 1% sulphated Ash, bricant, thickened with a modified bentonite clay.
and Zinc content must be a minimum of 0.07% by The grease is fortified with an extreme pressure addi-
weight. Designed to ensure adequate valve train tive and a rust inhibitor to provide even better equip-
wear protection, also meets the special Allison C3 ment protection.
and Caterpillar TO−2 friction requirements; which
were developed to overcome excessive slippage A multi-purpose grease that can be pumped from
and clutch wear in powershift transmissions normal grease dispensing equipment at tempera-
tures down to a −65_F (−54_C). Good for heavy
The following additives shall be blended into the duty operation.
high quality base stocks; detergency, dispersancy, Recommended for use in centralized lube systems,
anti-wear, anti-thickening, and friction control (for wheel bearings. chassis bearings, universal joints and
powershift transmissions) and additives to provide all other applications requiring a grease of this type.
protection against bearing corrosion and product This grease offers full protection regardless of the sea-
foaming. son. Pumpable at −65_F (−54_C), even in a hand
grease gun. Excellent anti-wear and load carrying abil-
Non engine uses include the powershift transmis- ity, stays in place better than lighter greases, waterproof
sion applications, manual transmissions, and hy- to resist washout, good shear stability. Assures good
draulic systems for which a motor oil is recom- high temperature performances. Compatibility of this
mended. grease with ordinary greases presents no problems be-
low an operating temperature of 200_F (93.3_C).
Physical Properties: Above this temperature, its compatibility is like any oth-
er bentone thickened grease.
Gravity, _API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2
Flash Point, COC, _F (_C) . . . . . . . . 420 (216) Physical Properties:
Viscosity Thickener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bentone
cSt @ 100°F (37.5°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 114.4 Penetration worked @ 77_F (25_C) (ASTM D217)
cSt @ 210°F (98.8°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 60 stroke units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
SUS @ 100°F (37.5°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 10,000 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
SUS @ 210°F (98.8°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.4 Roll Stability (ASTM D1831)
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Penetration Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Pour Point (_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −25 Oil Separation, WT.% (ASTM D1742) . . . . . 12.6
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −32 Dropping Point (_F) (ASTM D2265) . . . . . . 500
Corrosion, CU Strip −3 hrs @ 212 _F . . . . 1A (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Total Base Number (TBN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Viscosity @ -30_F (-34_C) cSt (ASTM D446) . 6750
Sulphated Ash, (ASTM D−874) (%) . . . . 0.94 Wheel Bearing Leakage Wt.% (D1263) . . . . . . . 2.83
Phosphorus (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.20 Water Washout Wt.% 77_F (25_C) (D1264) . . . . 1.2
Calcium (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.22 Rust Properties (ASTM D1743) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Zinc (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.11 Falex Test (ASTM D2670)
Color, ASTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2.5 Teeth Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Texaco, Inc. − Ursa Oil Super Plus−Prod. Code Seizure, PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3175
2109 or Equivalent. Four Ball, EP (ASTM D2596)
Wear, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
Weld, kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
LWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
No Seizure, kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural Tan
Continental Oil Co. (CONOCO) DN600 Grease or

Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Type TT
ISO Viscosity Grade 220
A specially formulated lubricant for applications
where service conditions are severe because of
high operating and bulk oil temperatures. The high
viscosity index allows the oil to flow at low tempera-
tures and maintain viscosity at high temperatures.
Typical applications are spur, helical, herringbone,
bevel, planetary gears, and gear boxes with multi-
ple disc brakes. This lubricant is derived from syn-
thetic based oils that are more resistant to thermal
and oxidative life and reduced risk of damage to
machine elements.
Physical Properties:
Gravity, _API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.6−32.4

ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Viscosity, cSt (ASTM D−445)
@ 104_F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217−228
@ 212_F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2−28.8
Viscosity Index (ASTM D−2270) . . . . . . 146−165
Pour Point (ASTM D−97)
(_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −35−49
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −37−45
Flash Point, COC (ASTM D−92)
(_F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482−510
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250−266
Rust Test, Distilled Water (ASTM D−665) . . Pass
Mobil Oil Company − Mobilgear SHC 220 −

or Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Correct;
Oil level at bottom of filler hole.
Incorrect;
Oil level below filler hole.
3
1. Travel Unit Note: Oil level close enough to the hole to be seen or
2. Check/Fill Plug touched is not sufficient. It must be level with the
3. Drain Plug bottom of the hole.

Travel Unit Checking The Oil Level
Travel Unit Lubrication 3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear
case around the check/fill and drain plugs to pre-
Check the oil level in the travel unit after every 250 vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
hours of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt gear case Figure 2−4.
or planetary, should be changed after the initial 250 4. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil with the oil to drain into a suitable container.
each 1,000 hours of operation or seasonally, whichever 5. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in-
occurs first. stall the drain plug.
6. Fill the unit with oil until it begins to flow from the
Travel Unit Oil Level Check check/fill hole. Refer to Figure 2−5. Refer to the
1. Travel the crane until the drain plug is positioned on Lubrication Chart for the correct grade and quan-
the bottom vertical centerline of the travel gear. tity of oil.
Crane must be on a firm level surface. Refer to 7. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis-
Figure 2−4. pose of the used oil.
2. Position the upper directly over the rear of the
crawler, engage the swing lock, and shutdown the
engine. Engine Air System Inspection
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear In addition to servicing the air cleaner, it is also recom-
case around the check/fill plug to prevent contami- mended that the engine air system be inspected every
nation from entering the unit. 250 hours or 6 months. Inspect the air system pipes,
4. Remove the plug. Oil should be level with the bot- hoses, air compressor, and turbocharger systems, as
tom of hole. Refer to Figure 2−5. equipped. (Be sure to inspect all the pipes and hoses
5. If necessary, add oil as required until it begins to associated with the air compressor, turbocharger, air
flow from the check/fill plug hole. Refer to the Lu- cleaner, and air intake.) Check for any cracks, corro-
brication Chart for the correct grade of oil. sion, loose clamps, wear points, leaks, or punctures
6. Clean and install the check/fill plug. which can allow contaminants to enter the system and
damage air system components and/or the engine. All
Travel Unit Oil Change hoses should be kept free of oil contaminants, both in-
1. Travel the crane for several minutes, without a load, ternally and externally. Disassemble and clean as re-
to agitate and warm the oil within the gear case. quired. Tighten or replace parts as necessary to en-
2. Park the crane of a firm level surface with the drain sure that the air system does not leak.
plug positioned on the bottom vertical centerline of
the travel gear. Position the upper directly over the
rear of the crawler, engage the swing lock, and
shutdown the engine.

Operator’s Manual
6 5
00000 P
TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL
Service Monitor in Operator’s Cab
1. Air Inlet Assembly 3. Element 5. Dust Cup

2. Body Assembly 4. Wing Nut 6. Air Cleaner Warning Lamp
Figure 2−6
Engine Air Cleaner Assembly
2. Loosen the wing nut and remove the cover from the
Engine Air Cleaner end of the body assembly. Refer to Figure 2−6.
Variations in job site conditions prevent establishing a 3. Remove the wing nut which secures the element
set interval for air cleaner servicing. For this reason a within the body. Remove the element.
warning lamp on the service monitor is used to assist in 4. Wipe inside of filter body clean using a clean, damp
determining the condition of the air cleaner elements. cloth.
Refer to Figure 2−6. Anytime the filter lamp illumi- 5. Remove the dust cup and wipe clean using a clean,
nates, service the air cleaner immediately. Clean or re- damp cloth. Install the dust cup.
place an air cleaner element as often as required. Re- 6. Clean or replace the element, as required. Refer to
place an air cleaner element after six cleanings or an- Cleaning The Air Cleaner Element" found later in
nually, whichever occurs first. Service the engine air this Section of the Operator’s Manual.
cleaners as follows: 7. Slide the element inside the filter body and install
the wing nut.
Changing Air Cleaner Element 8. Install the cover back on the body and tighten the
1. Properly park the crane on a firm level surface. Po- wing nut.
sition the upper directly over the right side of the
crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
down the engine.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 2−7
Cleaning the air cleaner Figure 2−9
element by soaking. Inspecting the air cleaner element.
Washing
Soak the air cleaner element for 15 minutes or more, in
a solution of water and Donaldson D−1400 detergent,
or equivalent. Refer to Figure 2−7. Thoroughly rinse
the element by spraying it with a hose in the direction
opposite the air flow. Use water pressure of less than
40 psi (2.8kgf/cm 2) to prevent damage to the filter pa-
per within the element. Rinse until the water is clear; air
dry. Do not attempt to dry the element using com-
pressed air or light bulbs. This may ruin the element.
Thoroughly inspect the element after cleaning.
Compressed Air
Hold an air hose nozzle at least 1 inch (25mm) away
Figure 2−8 from the air cleaner element. Spray air through the ele-
Cleaning the air cleaner element with ment in the direction opposite to normal air flow. Move
compressed air. the nozzle up and down while rotating the element.
Use air pressure of less than 100 psi (7kgf/cm 2) to pre-
vent damage to the filter paper within the element.
Inspecting The Air Cleaner Element Thoroughly inspect the element after cleaning. Refer
Place a bright light inside the air cleaner element and to Figure 2−8.
rotate the element. Inspect the element from the out-
side looking for ruptures, tears, and holes. If any dam- Boom Hoist Lubrication
age is discovered, replace the element. Refer to
Figure 2−9. Check the oil level in the gear case and planetary every
250 hours of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt gear
Cleaning Air Cleaner Elements case or planetary, should be changed after the initial
250 hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil with
Air cleaner elements can be cleaned by washing or us- each 1,000 hours of operation or seasonally, whichever
ing compressed air. Compressed air is recommended occurs first.
when the element is to be reused immediately. A
washed element must dry before reuse, however the
washing method does a better job and must be used
when exhaust soot has lodged in the fine pores of the
filter media. Use one of the following procedures to
clean the air cleaner element:

Operator’s Manual
5 6
1. Gear Case Fill Plug

2 4. Planetary Drain Plug
2. Gear Case Check Plug
3 5. Planetary Check Plug
3. Gear Case Drain Plug 6. Planetary Fill Plug
Figure 2−10
Boom Hoist Gear Case And Planetary
Boom Hoist Gear Case Oil Level Check 3. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
2. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of down the engine.
the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut- 4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear
down the engine. case around the check, fill, and drain plugs to pre-
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
case around the check and fill plugs to prevent Figure 2−10.
contamination from entering the unit. Refer to 5. Remove the check, fill, and drain plugs and allow
Figure 2−10. the oil to drain into a suitable container.
4. Remove the check plug. Oil should be level with 6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in-
the bottom of hole. Refer to Figure 2−11. stall the drain plug.
5. If necessary, remove the fill plug and add oil as re- 7. Fill the unit with oil, through the fill hole, until it be-
quired until it begins to flow from the check plug gins to flow from the check hole. Refer to
hole. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct Figure 2−11. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the
grade of oil. correct grade and quantity of oil.
6. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. 8. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. Properly
dispose of the used oil.
Boom Hoist Gear Case Oil Change
1. Park the crane of a firm level surface.
2. Cycle the boom hoist winch for several minutes,
without a load, to agitate and warm the oil within
the gear case.

Operator’s Manual
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the plane-
tary around the check, fill, and drain plugs to pre-
vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
Figure 2−10.
5. Remove the check, fill, and drain plugs and allow
the oil to drain into a suitable container.
6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in-
stall the drain plug.
7. Fill the unit with oil through the fill hole, until oil is
level with the bottom of the hole. Refer to
Figure 2−11. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the
Correct; correct grade and quantity of oil.
Oil level at bottom of filler hole. 8. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. Properly
Incorrect;
Oil level below filler hole. dispose of the used oil.
Note: Oil level close enough to the hole to be seen or
touched is not sufficient. It must be level with the Front And Rear Winch Drum
bottom of the hole.
Figure 2−11
Lubrication
Checking The Oil Level Check the oil level in the gear case and planetary every
250 hours of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt gear
case or planetary, should be changed after the initial
Boom Hoist Planetary Oil Level Check 250 hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil with
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. each 1,000 hours of operation or seasonally, whichever
2. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of occurs first.
the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
down the engine. Winch Drum Gear Case Oil Level
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the plane- Check
tary around the check and fill plugs to prevent con-
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
tamination from entering the unit. Refer to 2. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of
Figure 2−10. the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
4. Remove the check plug. Oil should be level with
down the engine.
the bottom of the hole. Refer to Figure 2−11.
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear
5. If necessary, remove the fill plug and add oil as re-
case around the check and fill plugs to prevent
quired, until it begins to flow from the check plug
contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
hole. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct Figure 2−12.
grade of oil. 4. Remove the check plug. Oil should be level with
6. Clean and install the check and fill plugs.
the bottom of hole. Refer to Figure 2−11.
5. If necessary, remove the fill plug and add oil as re-
Boom Hoist Planetary Oil Change quired until it begins to flow from the check plug
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. hole. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct
2. Cycle the boom hoist winch for several minutes, grade of oil.
without a load to agitate and warm the oil within the 6. Clean and install the check and fill plugs.
planetary.
3. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of
the crawler, engage the travel swing lock and shut-
down the engine.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 5 6 7
9 8
1. Gear Case Check Plug 4. Planetary Drain Plug 7. Gear Case Fill Plug
2. Planetary Fill Plug 5. Gear Case Fill Plug 8. Gear Case Check Plug
3. Planetary Check Plug 6. Gear Case Check Plug 9. Gear Case Drain Plugs
Figure 2−12
Front And Rear Winch Drum Gear Case And Planetary
Winch Drum Gear Case Oil Change 4. Remove the check plug. Oil should be level with
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. the bottom of the hole. Refer to Figure 2−11.
2. Cycle the boom hoist winch for several minutes, 5. If necessary, remove the fill plug and add oil as re-
without a load, to agitate and warm the oil within quired until it begins to flow from the check plug
the gear case. hole. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct
3. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of grade of oil.
the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut- 6. Clean and install the check and fill plugs.
down the engine.
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear Winch Drum Planetary Oil Change
case around the check, fill, and drain plugs to pre- 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to 2. Cycle the boom hoist winch for several minutes,
Figure 2−12. without a load to agitate and warm the oil within the
5. Remove the check, fill, and drain plugs and allow planetary.
the oil to drain into a suitable container. 3. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of
6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in- the crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
stall the drain plug. down the engine.
7. Fill the unit with oil, through the fill hole, until it be- 4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the plane-
gins to flow from the check hole. Refer to tary around the check, fill, and drain plugs to pre-
vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
correct grade and quantity of oil.
Figure 2−12.
8. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. Properly
5. Remove the check, fill and drain plugs and allow
dispose of the used oil.
the oil to drain into a suitable container.
Winch Drum Planetary Oil Level Check 6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in-
stall the drain plug.
7. Fill the unit with oil through the fill hole, until it be-
gins to flow from the check plug hole. Refer to
down the engine. Figure 2−11. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the plane- correct grade and quantity of oil.
tary around the check and fill plugs to prevent con- 8. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. Properly
tamination from entering the unit. Refer to dispose of the used oil.
Figure 2−12.

Operator’s Manual
1. Check/Fill Plug 3. Boom Base Section

2. Third Drum 4. Drain Plug
Figure 2−13
Third Drum Lubrication
Third Drum Lubrication Third Drum Oil Change

Check the oil level in the gear case after every 250 2. Cycle the third drum winch for several minutes,
hours of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt gear case without a load, to agitate and warm the oil within
should be changed after the initial 150 hours of opera- the gear case.
tion. Thereafter, change the oil with each 1,500 hours 3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the
of operation or seasonally, whichever occurs first. crawler and engage the swing lock .
4. Lower the boom to the ground to ease access to
Third Drum Oil Level Check the third drum.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. 5. Operate the third drum until the check/fill and drain
2. Position the upper directly over the rear of the plugs line up to the appropriate hole in the side
crawler and engage the swing lock. frame. Shutdown the engine
3. Lower the boom to the ground to ease access to 6. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear
the third drum. case around the check/fill and drain plugs to pre-
4. Operate the third drum until the check/fill plug vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
aligns with the hole in the side frame. Shutdown Figure 2−13.
the engine 7. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
5. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear the oil to drain into a suitable container.
case around the check/fill plug to prevent contami- 8. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in-
nation from entering the unit. Refer to stall the drain plug.
Figure 2−13. 9. Fill the unit with oil, through the check/fill hole, until
6. Remove the check/fill plug. Oil should be level with it begins to flow from the check/fill hole. Refer to
the bottom of hole. Refer to Figure 2−11. Figure 2−11. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the
7. If necessary, add oil as required, until it begins to correct grade and quantity of oil.
flow from the check/fill plug hole. Refer to the Lu- 10. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis-
brication Chart for the correct grade of oil. pose of the used oil.
8. Clean and install the check/fill plug.

Operator’s Manual
Swing Speed Reducers
Lubrication Full
Check the oil level in the swing speed reducers after

every 250 hours of operation. The oil in a new or rebuilt Low
swing speed reducer should be changed after the in-
itial 250 hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil
with each 1000 hours of operation or seasonally,
whichever occurs first. 1
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. 1
down the engine. Refer to Figure 2−14.
3. Clean the speed reducer around the dipstick fill
pipe to prevent contamination from entering the
system. Remove the dipstick.
4. Wipe the dipstick dry, with a clean cloth and insert it
back into the speed reducer until dipstick bottoms
out.
5. Remove the dipstick and note the oil level reading.
If the oil level indicated is on or below the Low" 2
position, add oil to bring the oil level back to the
Full" position. Refer to Figure 2−14. Refer to the
Lubrication Chart for the correct grade of oil.
6. Thoroughly clean the dipstick and install it in the 1. Dipstick
2. Drain Plug
speed reducer.
Figure 2−14
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change Swing Speed Reducer
2. Swing the upper for several minutes, to agitate and
6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and
warm the oil within the swing speed reducer.
install the drain plug.
3. Position the upper over the front or rear of the
7. Fill the speed reducer with oil, until the oil level
crawler, engage the travel swing lock, and shut-
reaches the Full" mark on the dipstick. Refer to
down the engine.
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the swing
correct quantity and grade of oil.
speed reducer around the dipstick fill pipe and
8. Thoroughly clean the dipstick and install it in the
drain plug to prevent contamination from entering
speed reducer. Properly dispose of the used oil.
the unit. Refer to Figure 2−14.
9. Repeat process as required for other swing speed
5. Remove the dipstick and drain plug and allow the
reducer.
oil to drain into a suitable container. Inspect the oil
for large quantities of metal particles. After the ini-
tial oil change, this is a sign of damage or extreme
wear within the unit, and a complete internal in-
spection may be necessary.

Operator’s Manual
5
1 3
4
2
1. Water Drain Plug 4. Hydraulic Reservoir

2. System Drain Plug (Magnetic) 5. Filler Cap
3. Sight Gauge
Figure 2−15
Hydraulic Reservoir
forth several times until the hydraulic pressure

Hydraulic Reservoir gauge in the operator’s cab reads zero.
The hydraulic reservoir is used to supply and store hy-
draulic oil needed to operate all hydraulic functions of
the crane. The hydraulic reservoir, as shown in WARNING
Figure 2−15, is equipped with a sight gauge for check-
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
ing the oil level. exhausted from the system before removing
Drain any water from the hydraulic reservoir and check any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
the oil level daily. Operating the crane with the oil level could cause burns or other serious injury.
below the full mark or with water in the system can lead Allow the oil within the reservoir to cool before
to hydraulic component failure. The system’s pressure removing the water drain plug.
and return filters should be changed every 500 hours
of operation and the hydraulic reservoir oil should be 4. Remove the house access panel, located directly
changed every 1,500 hours of operation or seasonally, below the hydraulic reservoir, to gain access to the
whichever occurs first. Refer to the following proce- reservoir water drain plug. Locate the water drain
dures when servicing the hydraulic reservoir. plug. Refer to Figure 2−15.
5. Place a suitable container under the water drain
Water Drain plug. Loosen the plug and allow the water to drain
into a suitable container.
Drain the water from the hydraulic reservoir daily before
6. When a clean flow of hydraulic oil begins to drain
start-up. Contaminated oil will damage the hydraulic
from the water drain plug, tighten the plug.
components.
7. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir before
1. Properly park the crane on a firm level surface.
beginning operation of the crane. Add oil if neces-
sary. Properly dispose of the contaminated water.
crawler, apply the travel swing lock, and shutdown
the engine. Allow the hydraulic oil to cool.
3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure from the
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check
system by working the crane controls back and 1. Properly park the crane on a firm level surface.

Operator’s Manual
2. With all upper hydraulic cylinders fully retracted, 3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure from the
position the upper over the front or rear of the system by working the crane controls back and
crawler, apply the travel swing lock, and shutdown forth several times until the hydraulic pressure
the engine. gauge in the operator’s cab reads zero.
3. With the hydraulic oil cold (approximately 62_F
17_C), check the level through the sight gauge lo-
cated on the front of the hydraulic reservoir. Refer
to Figure 2−15.
WARNING
4. The proper level must be maintained at all times.
exhausted from the system before removing
Add hydraulic oil as necessary to bring the oil level
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
slightly above the midpoint between the upper
could cause burns or other serious injury.
black area on the gauge label. Refer to Adding Oil
To The Hydraulic Reservoir" following this proce-
4. Remove the house access panel, located directly
dure for the correct instructions.
below the hydraulic reservoir, to gain access to the
system drain plug. Refer to Figure 2−15.
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir 5. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the hy-
draulic reservoir, around the filler cap and drain
2. With all upper hydraulic cylinders fully retracted,
plug, to prevent foreign materials from entering the
position the upper over the front or rear of the
system.
6. Remove the filler cap and pump the hydraulic oil
the engine.
into suitable containers. Refer to the Lubrication
Chart to determine the volume of oil to be removed.
system by working the crane controls back and
forth several times until the hydraulic pressure Note: If a pump is not available to remove the oil
gauge in the operator’s cab reads zero. from the reservoir, place a suitable container
under the water drain plug. Open the plug and
drain one container full at a time, until the oil has
WARNING thoroughly drained from the reservoir.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be 7. Remove the system and water drain plugs and al-
exhausted from the system before removing low any remaining oil to drain into a suitable con-
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil tainer. Inspect the oil and magnetic system drain
could cause burns or other serious injury. plug for large quantities of metal particles. This
may be a sign of excessive hydraulic component
4. Clean the top of the hydraulic reservoir and filler wear or damage.
cap to prevent foreign material from entering the 8. Clean and install the system and water drain plugs.
hydraulic system. 9. Replace the hydraulic system pressure and return
5. Remove the filler cap. filters. Refer to the appropriate procedures given
6. Add hydraulic oil to bring the oil level slightly above later in this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
the midpoint between the upper black area on the 10. Add hydraulic oil to bring the oil level slightly above
gauge label. Use only Hi Performance Hydraulic the midpoint between the upper black area on the
Oil or an approved substitute. Do Not Overfill. gauge label. Use only Hi Performance Hydraulic
7. Install filler cap. Oil or an approved substitute. Do Not Overfill.
11. Start the engine and allow the engine to idle sev-
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change eral minutes to ensure oil is being cycled properly.
Change the hydraulic reservoir oil at the end of a work- Check for any leaks.
ing day when any foreign particles will be suspended in 12. Recheck the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir for
the warm oil. If this is not possible, cycle the crane until proper level. Add oil if necessary. Properly dis-
the oil is warm and proceed as follows: pose of the used oil.
Note: In case of hydraulic system component
2. With all upper hydraulic cylinders fully retracted,
failure, a more thorough oil change procedure
position the upper over the front or rear of the
is required. Consult your distributor for this
procedure.
the engine.

Operator’s Manual
1. Pressure Filter 2
2. Return Filter
3. Hydraulic Reservoir
Figure 2−16
Hydraulic System Filters
Hydraulic System Filters 4. Position an appropriate container under the filter

assembly. Clean the filter housing and head as-
The upper hydraulic system utilizes one pressure filter
sembly to prevent contamination from entering the
and one return line filter to continuously clean the oil
system. (Refer to Figure 2−16 for location of the
during operation. These filters are shown in
pressure filter).
Figure 2−16. Change all the hydraulic system filter
5. Loosen the filter housing from the head assembly
elements after the initial 50 hours of operation and
and allow any oil in the filter assembly to drain into
every 500 hours of operation thereafter. Refer to the fol-
the container. Refer to Figure 2−17.
lowing procedures when changing the hydraulic sys-
6. Remove the filter housing and element.
tem filter elements.
7. Remove and inspect the bypass valve, o-ring, and
Hydraulic System Pressure Filter Change back-up ring within the head assembly. Clean or
1. Properly park the crane on a firm level surface. replace as required.
2. Position the upper over the front or rear of the 8. Properly discard the filter element and clean the fil-
crawler, apply the travel swing lock, and shutdown ter housing and head assembly.
the engine. 9. Install the o-ring, back-up ring, and bypass valve in
3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure from the the head assembly.
system by working the crane controls back and 10. Insert the new filter element and install the filter
forth several times until the hydraulic pressure housing.
gauge in the operator’s cab reads zero. 11. Start the engine and inspect the system for leaks.
12. Shutdown the engine and check the oil level in the
hydraulic reservoir. Refer to Hydraulic Reservoir
Oil Level Check" found earlier in this Section of the
WARNING Operator’s Manual for specific instructions.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be 13. Properly dispose of the used oil and element.
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.

Operator’s Manual
1 6
2
6
7
5
8
4 9
1
1. Capscrew & Washer

2. Cover 10
3 3. Spacer
3
2 4. Elements
5. Drain Plug
1. Head Assembly
6. Air Vent & Gasket 4
7. O-ring
2. Filter Housing
8. Spring
3. Element
9. Bypass Valve
4. Back Up Ring
10. Housing 5
5. O-ring
6. Bypass Valve
Figure 2−18
Figure 2−17 Hydraulic System Return Filter
Hydraulic System Pressure Filters
Hydraulic System Return Filter Change WARNING

The filter housing cover is used to retain a
spring under tension. Evenly remove the
capscrews and washers which secure the
the engine.
cover to relieve tension on the spring.
system by working the crane controls back and
8. Remove the spring and bypass valve from the top
forth several times until the hydraulic pressure
of the filter element within the housing.
gauge in the operator’s cab reads zero.
9. Remove the filter elements from the housing.
Separate the two elements and save the spacer.
10. Properly discard the used filter elements and clean
WARNING the inside of the filter housing.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be 11. Install a new filter element in the housing, position
exhausted from the system before removing the spacer, and install the second filter element.
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil 12. Clean and install the drain plug. Fill the filter hous-
could cause burns or other serious injury. ing with hydraulic oil.
13. Inspect the bypass valve and o-ring for damage or
4. Position an appropriate container under the filter wear. Clean or replace as required.
assembly. Clean the filter housing air vent and 14. Install the bypass valve, spring, and o-ring in the fil-
drain plug to prevent contamination from entering ter housing.
the system. (Refer to Figure 2−16 for location of 15. Install the housing cover using the capscrews and
the return filter.) washer. Close the air vent.
5. Slowly open the air vent. Refer to Figure 2−18. 16. Start the engine and inspect the system for leaks.
6. Remove the filter housing drain plug and allow the 17. Shutdown the engine and check the oil level in the
oil to drain into the container. hydraulic reservoir. Refer to Hydraulic Reservoir
7. Evenly loosen the capscrews and washers which Oil Level Check" found earlier in this Section of the
secure the filter housing cover. Carefully remove Operator’s Manual for specific instructions.
the cover and o-ring. 18. Properly dispose of the used oil and elements.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 Lubricate the deflector rollers, head machinery, and
other parts of the boom, jib, and live mast as specified
on the Lubrication Chart.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or jib. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
3 6
4
5 Wire Rope Lubrication
1. Connecting Lug 4. Picture Frame
2. Bar Pendant 5. Lattices Wire rope is like a machine. Each time a wire rope
3. Diagonal 6. Main Chord bends over a sheave or straightens from a slack posi-
Figure 2−19 tion many wires move against each other. Lubrication
Boom Section Nomenclature is necessary to help prevent wear caused by this move-
ment. Lubrication also helps prevent deterioration of
wire rope due to rust and corrosion.
Boom And Jib Inspection
And Lubrication WARNING
Inspect all parts of each boom and jib section daily. Pay Keep all wire rope well lubricated to minimize
particular attention to the chords and lattice. Also pay wear and prevent corrosion. Rusty rope is
attention to the bar pendants stored on top of each dangerous since there is no way to determine
boom section. Refer to Figure 2−19. If any dents, its remaining strength and reliability.
bends, cracked welds, etc. are found, do not use the
damaged section. Contact your nearest distributor for Most wire ropes are lubricated during manufacture, but
repair procedures. the lubricant does not last the life of the rope.
The lubricant is squeezed out of the rope as it runs over
sheaves under tension, or washed off by rain.
WARNING
Do not use a boom or jib section which has
been damaged. The structural integrity of the
section is lost and the attachment could
collapse with any load. Use the damaged
section only after it has been properly
repaired and passed a thorough inspection.

Operator’s Manual
Painting
Continuous Bath
Pouring
Swabbing
Dripping Spray Nozzle
Figure 2−20
Wire Rope Lubrication
For the above reasons, wire rope MUST BE periodically Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant
lubricated. Crude or used oils and grease should not
be used as lubricants because they may be grit or acid Wire ropes that have been in service should be cleaned
laden. Either of these conditions can cause damage to before relubricating them. Use a wire brush and com-
the rope. pressed air to clean the rope. All possible foreign mate-
rial and old lubricant should be removed from the rope
No set rule can be given for lubrication frequency. This before relubricating it. Use one of the following meth-
will depend on the type of conditions under which the ods to apply the lubricant. Refer to Figure 2−20.
rope is used.
A rope used in wet conditions would need to be lubri- 1. Continuous Bath
cated more often than one used in dry conditions, to Run the rope through a container filled with lubri-
prevent rust and corrosion. cant. A sheave mounted in the center of the con-
Lubricants used for wire rope lubrication should have tainer will hold the rope submerged as it passes
the following properties: through the container. Use swabbing to remove
1. They must be free from acids and alkalis. excess lubricant as the rope leaves the container.
2. They must have enough adhesive strength to stay
on the rope. 2. Dripping or Pouring
3. They must be able to penetrate between the wires Pour or drip oil on the wire rope as it passes
and strands. through the sheave groove.
4. They must have high film strength.
5. They must resist oxidation. 3. Swabbing or Painting
6. They must remain soft and pliable.
Two fast methods are swabbing the lubricant on
with rags or painting it on with a brush.
4. Spraying
Light lubricants may be applied with a spray gun.
Aerosol cans of lubricant are also available.

Operator’s Manual
ment Limiter in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual
Load Moment Limiter for Boom Radius/Angle Adjustment" procedure.
Maintenance of the Load Moment Limiter System con- 2. If a known test weight is available, check that the
sists of the following daily inspection prior to the first displayed weight agrees with the test load. The
operation: displayed load includes the hookblock and any lift-
1. Check that the system is operating normally as de- ing attachments such as slings, pins, and
scribed in this Operator’s Manual. shackles. Refer to Load Moment Limiter in Section
2. Check the electrical cables connecting the various 1 of this Operator’s Manual for Self-weight Adjust-
parts of the system. ment" procedure.
3. Check insulation on the boom reeling drum cable. 3. If the capacity chart is rated for specific areas e.g.
4. Check boom reeling drum cable for proper ten- side, front, or rear, the system should be checked
sion. by swinging the boom into the permitted areas and
5. Check the anti-two block boom switches for free- checking that the rated capacity reading agrees
dom of movement. with the crane capacity chart. Refer to Load Mo-
6. Check that the anti-two block weights are installed ment Limiter in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual
and working properly with the anti-two block for Self-weight Adjustment" procedure.
switches.
7. Test that the function limiters activate properly. (Do
this by manually lifting the ATB weight.) WARNING
Check the following every 30 days. Any unusual or erratic system operation must
1. Check that the displayed boom angle, boom be investigated and corrected immediately. If
length, and the operating radius displays agrees any problem is found with any of the above
with the measured readings. Refer to Load Mo- inspection steps, the problem must be
corrected/repaired before continuing
operation.

Operator’s Manual
Hook Balls: Check pin, nut, and washer to ensure
Hook Block, Ball And ball halves are held securely together. Check lo-
Swivel Inspection And cating pin for excessive wear. Inspect swivel parts
as specified previously. Check that hook latch is
Maintenance operative.
1. All nuts, setscrews, pins, bolts, and retainers 3. If a swivel is constantly overloaded, it will cause
should be checked for tightness every 14 to 30 damage to the unit. The first sign of damage is
days, depending on the operating conditions and often bearing brinelling (dimpling of the bearing
the product involved. races). This condition is determined by spinning
2. Inspect the components carefully at least once a the swivel by hand. If the motion is rough, or has a
month. ratchet-like effect, the bearing has been damaged
Swivels: Check for excessive gap distance be- and should be replaced.
tween the rotating parts. Check threaded parts 4. The distance between the swivel barrel and shank
that are installed together to see that they are se- or rotating members are pre-set with a factory
cure and tight. Check all setscrews to see that they clearance of .020−.050 inches (.508−1.27mm). If
are tight and staked. this distance increases more than .060 inch
(1.524mm) over the above distance, it is a good in-
Hook Blocks: Check all pins and bolts for tight- dication of bearing fatigue and the unit should be
ness, spreading of side plates, weld cracks, removed from service.
sheave wear, bearing wear, spreading of hook, set-
screws that are tight and staked. Check that hook
latch is operative.
Lubrication Frequency
Under Intermittent Under Continuous
Item
Operating Conditions Operating Conditions
Swivels, Swivel Overhaul Balls, Swivel Balls 14 days 24 hours
Blocks with Bronze Bushed Sheaves 14 days 8 hours
Blocks with Roller Bearing Sheaves 14 days 24 hours
Inspection Frequency
Item Frequency What to Check For Appropriate Action
End play or gap of more than .06 (1.5mm)
14 days under con- Remove from service immediately.
inch along the axis.
tinuous operation
Swivels Defective bearing. Remove from service im-
30 days under inter- Rough turning.
mediately.
mittent operation
Elongated eye holes, bent clevis pins. Indicates overload. Remove for repairs.
Indicates severe bearing wear. Remove
14 days under con- Misalignment, as evidenced by wobble or from service.
tinuous operation uneven groove flange wear. Check for wear in bronze spacers where
Sheaves used.
30 days under inter-
mittent operation Striations or corrugations in sheave
groove. Result of rope wear. If serious, replace.
Hook Missing, off center, bent, broken spring,

Each Use Replace immediately.
Latch missing or defective.
An indication of overload. Replace
Permanent deformation or stretching. Any signs of fractures call for an immediate
investigation and, if necessary, replacement
of part.
Hooks Daily or When Used
Hooks should be tested at least once a year
by magnafluxing, x-ray or other qualified
Crack or other defects.
method. Intermittent tests can be conducted
by an oil stain method.

Operator’s Manual
Air Conditioning Inspection And Maintenance
Sight Glass Coolant Level
Only a few bubbles in

Sufficient
the fluid.
1
Many bubbles are found 2
in the fluid. (Bubbles
Insufficient 3
pass the window contin-
ually.)
Overfilled
No bubbles are seen
Or
through the sight glass. 1. Receiver Tank
Void
2. Condensor
3. Sight Glass
Figure 2−21
Coolant (Gas) Volume Inspection
1. Inspect and clean condensor fin. Remove any for-

Push here 2 eign particles from the condensor. A clogged con-
1
densor may decrease the cooling capacity.
3
WARNING
Use only R134a coolant in air conditioning
system. Use of any other coolant will damage
the system.
2. Check the coolant volume through the sight glass.

Mitsubishi Engine Use the information in Figure 2−21 to visually
check sight gauge and make necessary adjust-
ments to the cooling system.
3. Inspect belt tension. Adjust belt tension so the belt
2 deflects approximately 0.2 in (5mm) when 8 lb
(3.6kg) of pressure is applied in the area shown.
3
Push here
1. Compressor 1
2. Belt
3. Engine Isuzu Engine
Figure 2−22
Belt Tension Check

Operator’s Manual
Pull Out
Compressed air Washing
1. Filter
2. Left Side Cover
Figure 2−23
Inspection And Cleaning Of The Air Conditioning Filter
Air Conditioning Filter up and down. Use air pressure of less than 100 psi
(7kgf/cm 2 ) to prevent damage to the filter paper. Thor-
The filter should be inspected on a monthly basis. A oughly inspect the element after cleaning.
restricted filter may result in decreased air volume and
deterioration of air conditioning capacity. Remove the Washing
left side cover (rear of the Operator’s seat) and remove
Soak the air cleaner element for 15 minutes or more, in
the filter. Lightly soiled filters may be cleaned with com-
a neutral detergent. Thoroughly rinse the element by
pressed air. Highly soiled filters should be cleaned us-
spraying it with a hose in the direction opposite the air
ing a neutral detergent and allowed to thoroughly air
flow. Use water pressure of less than 40 psi (19.4kgf/
dry.
cm 2 ) to prevent damage to the filter paper within the
Compressed Air element. Rinse until the water is clear; air dry. Do not
attempt to dry the element using compressed air or
Hold an air hose nozzle at least 1 in (25mm) away from light bulbs. This may ruin the element. Thoroughly in-
the filter element. Spray air through the element in the spect the element after cleaning.
direction opposite to normal air flow. Move the nozzle

Operator’s Manual
3. Periodic waxing will enhance the luster and protect
Turntable Bearing the paint surface.
Capscrew Torque If environmental damage to the paint finish is detected
Proper tightening of turntable bearing capscrews is (loss of some of its luster due to lack of or inability to
very important. If the bearing has been replaced for maintain as recommended) the paint finish can be re-
any reason, capscrews should be replaced. Reuse of stored to near-new appearance by following a simple
capscrews is not recommended. polishing and waxing procedure.
CAUTION Polishing And Waxing Procedure

1. Clean surface thoroughly by hand washing or
Loctite pipe sealant is used on the turntable power washing with a mild detergent. Rinse thor-
bearing capscrews. The Loctite pipe sealant oughly with water before buffing.
seals the threads to prevent rust and 2. Apply a polishing compound, such as Meguiar’s
corrosion.
M8432, or equivalent, to a surface area approxi-
mately two feet by two feet (5cm by 5cm) at a time.
Capscrews should be inspected and/or torqued after Make sure the cleaner is applied liberally to entire
the first 250 hours of operation. Inspect and/or area and work on only that area with the buffing
torque capscrews every 500 hours of operation wheel.
thereafter. Torque inner race capscrews to 3. Buff surface with an electric or air buffer at 1000
2,080−2,290 ft-lb (2 820−3 105Nm). Torque outer rpm using a 3M Superbuff polishing pad, or equiv-
race capscrews to 1,450 ft-lb (1 966Nm). alent, with light to medium pressure until a uniform
high gloss is obtained. Hand wipe with a clean
Paint Maintenance cloth.
Knowledgeable equipment owners realize the value 4. After surface has been buffed, apply a high quality
of periodic preventative maintenance and responsi- automotive wax such a Meguiar’s M−26 Hi−Tech
ble care. A regular surface care program should be Yellow Wax, or equivalent, and hand buff until the
followed to protect the equipment’s paint finish and cloth moves freely. The original luster of coating
maintain a like-new appearance. There is no one should be restored.
correct/ultimate procedure since the uniqueness of
every crane’s operating environment and owner/op- Cab Console Cleaning
erator maintenance habits differ. However, it is im-
portant to remove surface contaminants before they Care should be taken when cleaning the cab console,
have time to bond or etch into the paint finish. especially the new polycarbonate consoles. If the in-
correct cleaning agent is used, the finish of the material
could be destroyed. It is recommended that only the
Regular Preventative Maintenance following materials be used for cleaning:
1. Regular washing is the best way to remove surface 1. Soap and water
contaminants. 2. Denatured alcohol
2. Always use mild cleaners and soaps, and rinse 3. Joy and Palmolive dishwashing liquids
thoroughly after washing. Do not use harsh deter- 4. Windex with Ammonia D
gents, such as household laundry detergents, or 5. Formula 409, Fantastik, Mr. Clean
cleaners that contain phosphates, as they will
burn" the paint, strip off protective coating, dimin-
ish the gloss and accelerate the contamination
process.

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Track Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−1
Front And Rear Drum Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−2
Brake Pedal Free-Fall Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−5
Winch Drum Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−6
Bubble Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−7
Bar Pendant Inspection And Replacement Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−8
Hydraulic System Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3−15
Section 3 − Periodic Adjustments i

Operator’s Manual
ii Section 3 − Periodic Adjustments

Operator’s Manual
1/2−1"
(1.3−2.5cm)
Sag
1
9
ÄÄÄ
2
3
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
4 SHIM STORAGE AREA
9" (22.86cm) 5 6 7
Take-up
1. Track Shoe 4. Idler Shaft 6. Hydraulic Cylinder 8. Capscrew

2. Idler 5. Shims 7. Shim Storage Area 9. Cover Plate
3. Grease Fitting
Figure 3−1
Track Tension Adjustment
7. Under working conditions, the track should sag

Track Tension Adjustment 1/2−1" (1.3−2.5cm) at each end in the position as
The track tension is adjusted with a hydraulic cylinder shown in Figure 3−1.
and hand pump. The idler shaft is held in place with
shims after adjustment is made.
CAUTION
The tracks should never be allowed to run
when excessively loose as this will result in
abnormal wear to the tracks and sprockets, as
down the engine.
well as allowing the tracks to bind on the
3. Remove shim cover plates from each side of side
sprockets or rollers which could lead to
frame. Refer to Figure 3−1.
failure of some part of the track or drive
4. Remove shims from shim storage area.
machinery. Also, a loose track allows more
5. Install hydraulic cylinder in the side frame. Con-
material to build up in the tracks and on the
nect hand pump to cylinder. This is done on one
sprockets and idlers. This build up will cause
side frame at a time.
tracks to climb on the sprocket lugs.
6. Pump out cylinder to increase track tension. Install
shims to maintain adjustment. Pump out each side
8. Remove hydraulic cylinders. Store cylinders and
equally. Make sure the same thickness of shims
hand pump in crane tool box.
are added to each side to maintain track align-
9. Store unused shims in shim storage area.
ment.
10. Install shim cover plates.
Section 3 − Periodic Adjustments 3−1

Operator’s Manual
1
2
3
5
A
11
4
10
7
A 6
B
9
8
12
1. Stop Bolts 5. Brake Drum 9. Actuating Linkage

2. Adjusting Bolt 6. Bellcrank 10. Actuating Linkage
3. Standoffs 7. Connecting Pins 11. Brake Lining
4. Brake Band 8. Drum Brake Pedals 12. Brake Assist Assembly
Figure 3−2
Front And Rear Drum Brakes
The band should be adjusted tight enough to hold the

Front And Rear Drum Brakes load when the pedal is operated in the lower half of its
The winch band brake applies directly on the winch travel. By adjusting the band in this manner, the maxi-
drum to control free-fall speed. It also applies auto- mum available leverage is being used. Over tightening
matically if hydraulic pressure is lost to stop rotation of the band will result in a much harder working brake, im-
the drum. To compensate for lining wear, linkage ex- proper brake release, abnormal lining wear, and will
pansion, etc., the brake may require periodic adjust- make it difficult, if not impossible, to latch the pedal in
ment. Check the band brake adjustment when a new the fully applied position.
crane is delivered and every 50 Hours of operation
This information is for preliminary adjustment only. Fi-
thereafter.
nal criteria for correct adjustment is safe load handling.
Brake lining wear is taken up by means of an adjusting
bolt located at the split in the band. Tightening this bolt
will reduce clearance between the brake band and Automatic Brake Adjustment
drum, while loosening it will increase the clearance. 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
The adjustment procedure for the front drum and the upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler
rear drum is identical. and engage the travel swing lock.
3−2 Section 3 − Periodic Adjustment

Operator’s Manual
10. Release the drum brake pedal and adjust the
standoffs around the circumference of the brake
WARNING band. Uniform clearance of 0.02−0.03 inch
Position hookball and/or hookblocks on the (0.5−0.75mm) should be maintained between the
ground. Hookball and/or hookblocks must re- brake band and brake drum.
main on the ground during adjustment proce- 11. Check the operation of the drum brake pedal. The
dure to avoid inadvertent loss of control of the band should be adjusted tight enough to hold the
rigging. load when the pedal is operated in the lower half of
its travel. Pedals must also hold the load in the
2. Lower the hook block and hook ball to the ground latched position. Further adjust the band brake, as
to prevent them from falling during the brake ad- required.
justment. Shutdown the engine. 12. Test the adjustment by making sure the brake will
3. Remove the winch drum covers and cab floor en- hold maximum line pull in both the AUTO" and
closure, as required, to expose the band brake, FREE" modes.
bellcranks, and linkage. 13. Install the winch drum covers and cab floor enclo-
4. Start the engine and move the drum brake mode sure.
switches to the FREE" position. Free mode lamps 14. Repeat this procedure for the second band brake,
should illuminate. as required.
5. Beginning at the winch drum brake pedal in the op-
erator’s cab, check all the brake linkage up to the Brake Band Inspection
band brake bellcrank for proper lubrication of pin To ensure safe, trouble free operation of the band
connections, smoothness of operation, and tight- brakes, periodic inspections must be made. A general
ness of linkage. Lubricate, tighten, or replace as visual inspection should be done each 50 hours of op-
required. Refer to Figure 3−2. eration, a more thorough inspection after each 250
6. Move the brake mode switches to the AUTO hours of operation, and a complete disassembly after
BRAKE" position. Free mode lamps should go off. each 500 hours of operation. Use the following instruc-
Shutdown the engine. tions for inspecting the brake bands. All procedures
7. Locate brake assist assembly on the upper frame must be carried out by a qualified technician and de-
and check dimension B". This dimension should tailed records of the work performed must comply with
be between 15.75 in (400mm) and 16.14 in OSHA record keeping practices.
(410mm).
Band Brake Adjustment WARNING

8. If dimension B" is within the range mentioned
above, proceed to step 9. Brake Lining Fiber Warning
Older brake linings may contain asbestos
If dimension B" is 16.14 in (410mm) or greater: fibers, a cancer and lung disease hazard.
a. Note the exact measurement taken. Brake linings manufactured today contain
b. Start the engine, latch the winch brake pedals non-asbestos fibers, whose long-term effects
in the fully applied position, move the drum to health are unknown. Use caution when
brake mode switches to the FREE" position. handling either asbestos or non-asbestos
Carefully release the brake pedals. materials used in brake linings. Refer to
c. Loosen the stop bolts on the brake bands, and OSHA regulations for proper handling of
turn the adjusting bolts. Note the number of these materials. Material Safety Data Sheets
turns made. (MSDS) regarding brake lining materials can
d. Shutdown the engine to allow the automatic be obtained from your local distributor.
brake to apply.
e. Measure dimension B" again.
f. Calculate the difference between the first and 50 Hour Inspection
second measurements at B". Repeat steps a 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
through e, as required, to obtain the correct di- transmission to neutral, and apply the park brake.
mension at B". Tighten the stop bolts. 2. Level the crane of outriggers and position the up-
9. After obtaining the correct dimension at B", start per over the rear of the carrier. Lower hook ball
the engine and move the drum brake mode and/or hook block to the ground. Engage the trav-
switches to the FREE" position. Free mode lamps el swing lock and shutdown the engine.
should illuminate.

Operator’s Manual
3. Remove the winch drum cover to gain access to 10. Install the brake bands back on the brake drum
the brake bands. and connect the bellcrank and standoffs.
4. Inspect all actuating linkage and related pins for 11. Install the drum covers and/or guards.
excessive wear and proper lubrication. Refer to 12. Properly adjust the band brakes. Refer to Band
Figure 3−2. Brake Adjustment" found earlier in this Section of
5. Inspect for any oil, grease, or abrasive particles on the Operator’s Manual.
the friction surface of the brake linings.
6. Visually check the brake bands for indications of 500 Hour Inspection
any bending, cracking, interference, or unusual 1. Perform all 250 hour inspections.
wear of the brake linings. 2. The entire braking system must be removed from
7. Replace any defective parts as required for any of the crane and completely disassembled.
the above reasons. 3. Each component must be thoroughly cleaned of all
8. Properly adjust the brake bands per Band Brake foreign material to ensure an accurate inspection.
Adjustment" in this Section of the Operators Man- 4. Each component must be inspected by a qualified
ual. technician with the proper equipment and tools as
9. Install the drum covers and/or guards. outlined in the 250 hour inspection in addition to
10. Repeat this procedure for the other band brake. training and experience with nondestructive test
(NDT) methods; e.g. dye penetrant and magnetic
250 Hour Inspection particle inspection.
For inspection at this interval, a qualified technician 5. Visually check each brake band for any bending,
must use the proper equipment and tools to perform a indentions, or cracking. Pay particular attention to
more thorough inspection. The tools recommended the welded area which joins the lug to the bellcrank
are a good light source, solvent or degreaser, wiping end of the band. It is not permissible for any grind
cloths, bristle and wire brushes, magnifying glass, me- or indention marks to run across the band in the
chanic’s mirror, measuring tools, etc. welded area. Any grind or indention marks must
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Engage the run lengthwise on the band. The edges of the
park brake and shift the transmission to neutral. band must also be smooth and free of defects.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with Check for elongated holes in the lugs. If any prob-
the tires clear of the ground. lem is found, the brake band must be replaced.
3. Swing the upper over the rear of the carrier and en- 6. Check the brake linings for excessive or uneven
gage the travel swing lock. wear and loose or missing rivets. Tighten any
4. Lower the hook block and hook ball to the ground loose rivets. If any rivet is missing, check the rivet
to prevent them from falling during the brake in- hole in the brake band for wear. If the rivet hole is
spection. Move the drum brake mode switches to oversized, the brake band must be replaced. If the
the FREE MODE" position. Shutdown the engine. rivet hole is not oversized, replace missing rivet.
5. Remove the winch drum covers, as required, from 7. Inspect all pins and bolts for excessive wear and
the end of the winch drum to expose the band rust, especially the thread roots and under bolt
brake and clutch. heads. If any problem is found, the hardware must
6. Perform all 50 hour inspections. be replaced.
7. Disconnect the brake bands from the standoffs 8. Properly Install all brake parts back on the brake
and loosen the stop bolts and adjusting bolt. Refer drum.
to Figure 3−2. 9. Properly adjust the band brakes. Refer to Band
8. Disconnect the brake bands from the bellcrank Brake Adjustment" found earlier in this Section of
and slide the brake bands off the drum. the Operator’s Manual.
9. Replace any defective parts as required for any of 10. Install the drum guards and/or covers.
the above reasons.

Operator’s Manual
Brake Pedal Free-Fall
6
Switch Adjustment
The brake pedal free-fall switch should be adjusted 5
anytime the free-fall function is not operating properly.
1
If the switch is not properly adjusted, the free-fall func-
tion could activate as soon as the brake pedal is de-
pressed even slightly.
1. Lower any load to the ground and disconnect the
lifting sling from the hook. 4
2. Swing the upper over the side of the crawler to al-
low access to the underside of the operator’s cab.
3. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en- 2 3
gine.
1. Volt OHM Meter 4. Switch Actuating Arm
4. Remove the front bottom panel under the opera- 2. Free-Fall Switch 5. Brake Pedal Latch
tor’s cab. 3. Capscrew 6. Brake Pedal
5. Locate the free-fall switches for each drum brake
Figure 3−3
pedal and disconnect them from the wire harness.
Brake Pedal Free-Fall Switch
Refer to Figure 3−3.
6. Set a volt OHM meter to read OHM’s and attach the
leads to the pins in the electrical connector of the 11. Verify the correct operation of the free-fall system.
free-fall switch to be adjusted. a. Properly start the engine.
7. Loosen the allen head screw that secures the b. Hoist the empty hook block/ball while still in the
switch actuating arm and remove the arm. auto brake mode.
8. Position the arm back on the switch so that the c. Stop hoisting when the hook block/ball is
switch is activated (continuity on the volt OHM me- approximately ten feet (3m) off the ground.
ter) just before the brake pedal latches. d. Fully depress and latch the drum brake pedal
9. Remove the volt OHM meter and reconnect the in the fully applied position. Move the drum
switch to the wire harness. brake mode switch on the control lever for the
10. Repeat the above procedure for all of the hoist winch drum being tested to the FREE MODE"
winches on the crane. position.
e. Slowly release the brake pedal to allow the
hook block/ball to free-fall. Stop the hook
block/ball before it reaches the ground by de-
pressing the brake pedal.

Operator’s Manual
7 8
9
6 10
4
3
1. Clutch Shoe Toe 3. Clutch/Brake Drum 5. Adjusting Bolt 7. Shim 9. Clutch Shoe Heel
2. Clutch Shoe 4. Jam Nut 6. Shim Cover 8. Dead End Pin 10. Cotter Pin
Figure 3−4
Clutch Adjustment
Winch Drum Clutches

The front and rear winch systems use clutches to trans-
WARNING
Older clutch linings may contain asbestos
fer torque from the drum shafts to the winch drum.
fibers which may be hazardous to your health.
These clutches are hydraulically applied and spring re-
Caution should be exercised in handling and
leased. To compensate for lining wear, the clutches will
maintenance as described in OSHA
require periodic adjustment. The clutches should have
regulations.
0.015 − 0.025 inch (0.38 −0.63mm) clearance from the
heal to the toe of each clutch shoe, with the clutches
4. Loosen the adjusting bolt jam nut and turn the ad-
released. Inspect the clutch linings for wear or oil dam-
justing bolt until the toe of the clutch shoe just con-
age and check the adjustment when a new crane is de-
tacts the clutch/brake drum. Refer to Figure 3−4.
livered and every 50 hours of operation thereafter.
5. Remove the cotter pin and shim cover from the
dead end pin.
Clutch Adjustment 6. Add shims as required between the dead end pin
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the and clutch shoe until the heel of the clutch shoe is
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler within 0.015−0.025 inch (0.38−0.63mm) of the
and engage the travel swing lock. clutch drum.
2. Lower the hook block/ball to the ground to prevent
them from falling during the clutch adjustment. Note: The 0.015−0.025 inch (0.38−0.63mm)
Shutdown the engine. clearance must be achieved along the entire
3. Remove the winch drum cover from the left end of length of the clutch shoe. Add or remove shims
the winch drum to expose the brake and clutch. as required while turning the adjusting bolt to
obtain the proper clearance.

Operator’s Manual
7. Turn the adjusting bolt until the 0.015−0.025 inch
(0.38−0.63mm) clearance is obtained between
the toe of the clutch shoe and the clutch drum. 2
8. Lightly oil the dead end pin and inspect the clutch
linings for excessive wear or oil damage. Use ex- 1
treme care to avoid getting oil on the clutch shoe or
clutch/brake drum.
WARNING
Use extreme care to avoid getting oil on the 1. Adjustment Nut
clutch shoe or clutch/brake drum. Oil could 2. Glass Vial
cause erratic clutch operation and result in an
Figure 3−5
accident.
Bubble Level Adjustment
9. Replace the shim cover and cotter pin.
10. Tighten the jam nut. 3. Remove the drum covers and/or guards to gain ac-
11. Check the adjustment by making sure the winch cess to all drum clutches.
will lift maximum line pull without slipping. 4. Inspect for any oil, grease, abrasive particles, or
12. Repeat this procedure for each clutch shoe on rust on the friction surface of the clutch drum or on
each winch drum as equipped. the clutch linings.
13. Install the winch drum cover. 5. Inspect all actuating linkage, related pins and bolts
for excessive wear and proper lubrication.
Drum Clutch Inspection 6. Inspect the drum clutches for indications of any
bending, cracking, interference or unusual wear of
To ensure safe, troublefree operation of the drum the clutch linings.
clutches, periodic inspections must be made. An in- 7. Replace any defective parts as required for any of
spection should be done each 50 hours of operation or the above reasons.
monthly whichever occurs first. Use the following in- 8. Properly adjust the clutches as outlined in this Sec-
structions for inspecting the drum clutches. All proce- tion of the Operator’s Manual.
dures must be carried out by a qualified technician and 9. Install the drum covers and/or guards.
detailed records of the work performed must comply
with OSHA record keeping practices.
Bubble Level
A bubble level, for leveling the crane on the jack cylin-
WARNING ders, is mounted in operator’s cab and at the control
station for the jack cylinders. They should be checked
Use extreme care to avoid getting any oil,
periodically to ensure proper adjustment.
water or other liquids on the clutch linings or
clutch drum. They could cause erratic clutch
operation and result in equipment damage
Bubble Level Adjustment
and/or a serious accident. 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler,
1. Properly park crane on a firm level surface. engage the travel swing lock or swing brake, and
2. Apply all brakes and/or drum pawls to secure shutdown the engine.
movement of drums or lower hook ball, hook block 2. Verify the crane is level by placing a carpenter’s
or bucket to the ground. Engage the travel swing level on the lower frame. Check levelness front to
lock and shutdown the engine. back and side to side.
3. Rotate the adjustment nuts as required until the
bubble inside each of the glass vials is centered
WARNING within the vial. Both bubbles must be centered si-
multaneously. Refer to Figure 3−5.
Older clutch linings may contain asbestos
fibers which may be hazardous to your health. Note: Do not flatten out the springs under the
Caution should be exercised in handling and bubble level. Loosen rather that overtighten the
maintenance as described in OSHA adjustment nuts to gain the necessary adjust-
regulations. ment.

Operator’s Manual
If necessary, clean the entire crane, boom, or jib
Bar Pendant Inspection And section of all mud, dirt, grease, oil, etc. so ade-
Replacement quate visual inspection can be performed. Keep-
ing the crane clean and in good working order will
Recommendations facilitate the inspection process.
All Link-Belt bar pendants and bar pendant connecting Establish a pattern of working from one section of
links must be regularly and systematically inspected in the crane to the next to ensure each section is thor-
accordance with the inspection instructions and charts oughly examined.
shown on the following pages. They should be visually Closely observe any areas where the paint has
inspected thoroughly each time the boom is as- been chipped, wrinkled, or is missing, or contains
sembled, boom extensions are added to the boom, or faint rust lines or marks. This may be an indication
anytime there has been a suspected shock loading or that a crack has formed. If any such area is discov-
overloading on the boom. The time intervals shown in ered, proceed with a complete 500 hour Inspec-
this procedure are intended as a guide only. Under un- tion" found later in this Operator’s Manual.
usual working conditions, such as repeated lifts at or
near rated capacity, more frequent inspections may be Pay close attention to all suspension components
required. (bar pendants, bar pendant connecting links, bar
pendant connecting pins, spreader bars, hoist
lines, hoist line dead end lugs and links, etc). If any
part is deemed suspect, proceed with a complete
WARNING 500 hour Inspection" found later in this Operator’s
Do not operate a damaged or poorly Manual.
maintained crane. If a component is damaged 4. Keep a log of all inspection reports and replace-
or worn, replace the component before ment parts used.
operating the crane. Major crane damage or
serious injury could result. 500 hour Inspection
1. Lower the boom to the ground. Block under the
All maintenance and inspection work must be done by boom point as necessary to prevent damage to the
qualified personnel. Inspection of bar pendants and head machinery or jib / tip extension.
bar pendant connecting links requires a unique skill 2. Shutdown the crane and work all control levers
and conscientious workmanship. It is therefore of the back and forth to relieve any hydraulic pressure
utmost importance that the assigned personnel stud- that may be present.
ies these instructions, learns them, follows them, and 3. Remove all bar pendant pins, bar pendant con-
takes the time to develop the necessary skills through necting links, and bar pendants from the top of the
practice. boom to complete the visual and dimensional in-
spections required.
The inspection procedures listed throughout this docu-
ment apply to the entire boom suspension system. If necessary, clean the entire crane, boom, or jib
This includes bar pendants, bar pendant connecting section of all mud, dirt, grease, oil, etc. so ade-
links, bar pendant connecting pins, and spreader bars. quate visual inspection can be performed. Keep-
Ensure that all of these critical components are in- ing the crane clean and in good working order will
spected and maintained properly per this procedure. facilitate the inspection process.
Establish a pattern of working from one section of
50 hour Inspection the crane to the next to ensure each section is thor-
1. Lower the boom to the ground. Block under the oughly examined.
boom point as necessary to prevent damage to the
Closely observe all areas where the paint has been
head machinery or jib / tip extension.
chipped, wrinkled, or is missing, or contains faint
2. Shutdown the crane and work all control levers
rust lines or marks. This may be an indication that
back and forth to relieve any hydraulic pressure
a crack has formed.
that may be present.
3. Perform a complete crane walk around and visual Pay close attention to all suspension components
inspection looking closely at all bar pendants, bar (bar pendants, bar pendant connecting links, bar
pendant connecting links, and bar pendant con- pendant connecting pins, spreader bars, hoist
necting pins. lines, hoist line dead end lugs and links, etc).

Operator’s Manual
4. Keep a log of all inspection reports and replace-
ment parts used.
5. Inspect all bar pendants and bar pendant connect-
Dent
ing links per Replacement Recommendations"
found later in this Operator’s Manual.
Replacement Recommendations
WARNING Depth of Dent

Bar pendants and bar pendant connecting
links are not repairable. Do not operate a Bar Pendant
damaged or poorly maintained crane. If a bar
pendant or bar pendant connecting link is
Dent
damaged or worn, replace the component
before operating the crane. Major crane
damage or serious injury could result.
Type of See
Allowable Deviation
Damage Page
1/8" (3.2mm) of dent depth
Dent 3−9 Depth of Dent
is allowed.
Crack 3−10 None Bar Pendant Connecting Link
Corrosion, Figure 3−6

7.5% of plate nominal thick- Dent
Pitting, or 3−10
ness
Abrasion
0.1% of bar pendant
length. Maximum of 1/16"
Straightness 3−11
(1.6mm) on bar pendant WARNING
connecting link. All bar pendants and bar pendant connecting
0.5% of bar pendant links are made of high strength steel. Do not
length. Maximum of 1/16" drill or weld on bar pendants or bar pendant
Flatness 3−12 connecting links. Boom suspension failure
(1.6mm) on bar pendant
connecting link. and/or serious injury may result.
Elongated
3−13 None
Holes Dent
Length 3−14 None Link-Belt will allow up to 1/8" (3.2mm) of dent depth for
bar pendants and bar pendant connecting links. A
All damaged areas that fall into the Allowable Devi- dent by definition does not reduce plate thickness. The
ation" category as outlined above are to be treated as dent depth given will only be allowed if the plate thick-
cosmetic damage only and are not to be repaired. ness has not been reduced by gouging, scratches,
These areas should be painted to prevent further dete- cuts, or other means, and has not caused bending in
rioration. the bar pendant or bar pendant connecting link. Follow
the thickness requirements listed in Corrosion, Pitting,
or Abrasion" if the plate thickness has been affected.
The dent depth listed will be allowed provided that the
number, size, and location of the dent(s) is/are not
deemed excessive by a qualified Link-Belt representa-
tive. These areas should be painted to prevent further
deterioration.

Operator’s Manual
pendants and bar pendant connecting links for cracks.
Closely observe all areas where the paint has been
chipped, wrinkled, or is missing, or contains faint rust
Crack
lines or marks. This may be an indication that a crack
has formed. If any crack is found, remove the part from
service.
Corrosion, Pitting, or Abrasion

Link-Belt will allow corrosion, pitting, or abrasion up to a
depth of 7.5% of the nominal plate thickness of the bar
Bar Pendant pendant or bar pendant connecting link without replac-
ing or condemning the part. This will be allowed pro-
Crack vided a qualified Link-Belt representative does not
deem the amount, size, and location of the damage to
be excessive. For examples, see the following table.
Bar Pendant or Bar Pen- Allowable Corro-

dant Connecting Link sion, Pitting, or
Nominal Plate Thickness Abrasion
1.00" (2.54mm) 0.075" (1.9mm)
Bar Pendant Connecting Link
Figure 3−7 1.50" (3.8mm) 0.113" (2.9mm)
Crack
All damaged areas that fall into the Allowable Corro-
sion, Pitting, or Abrasion" category as outlined above
Crack are to be treated as cosmetic damage only and are not
Link-Belt will not allow any crack in bar pendants or bar to be repaired. These areas should be painted to pre-
pendant connecting links. Thoroughly inspect all bar vent further deterioration.

Operator’s Manual
Actual Centerline Mark
Deviation
From Straight String
Bar Pendant
Actual Centerline Mark
Deviation String
From Straight
Figure 3−8
Straightness
Straightness 1. Lay the bar pendant on a flat surface. The bar pen-
dant must be in its free state position. Lifting first
Link-Belt will allow up to 0.1% of the bar pendant length
one end and setting it straight down and then lifting
in inches as a Deviation From Straight" condition.
the other end and setting it straight down will ac-
Link-Belt will allow a maximum of 1/16" (1.6mm) as a
complish this.
Deviation From Straight" on bar pendant connecting
2. Determine the actual bar pendant centerline by
links. The deviation from straight will be allowed pro-
measuring the bar pendant height and dividing by
vided it is a gradual out of straight condition. Kinks or
two. Mark the actual centerline on the bar pendant
obvious deformation in a small area are not permitted.
near the center, or any area that appears to not be
Examples: straight.
3. Stretch a line from connecting pin hole center to
Allowable Deviation connecting pin hole centerline.
Bar Pendant Length
From Straight 4. Stretch the line tight to find the expected bar pen-
dant centerline.
Ft (inches) m inches mm
5. Measure the distance from the string to the actual
10 ft (120) 3.05 0.12 3.05 centerline. This is the Deviation From Straight" di-
mension.
20 ft (240) 6.1 0.24 6.1
Visually inspect all bar pendant connecting links for
30 ft (360) 9.1 0.36 9.1 straightness. If any bar pendant connecting link visual-
40 ft (480) 12.2 0.48 12.2 ly appears to not be straight, proceed as follows.
6. Lay the bar pendant connecting link on a flat sur-
Visually inspect all bar pendants for straightness. If any face. Follow Steps 2 through 5 for the bar pen-
bar pendant visually appears to not be straight, pro- dants listed above, substituting bar pendant con-
ceed as follows. necting link for bar pendant in the procedures.

Operator’s Manual
String
Deviation
From Flat
Bar Pendant
String
Deviation
From Flat
Figure 3−9
Flatness
Flatness 1. Lay the bar pendant on a flat surface. Turn the bar
pendant up so it is sitting on one edge (the view
Link-Belt will allow up to 1.25% of the bar pendant
shown above is looking down on the bar pendant).
length in inches as a Deviation From Flat" condition.
The bar pendant must be in its free state position.
Link-Belt will allow a maximum of 1/16" (1.6mm) as a
Lifting first one end and setting it straight down and
Deviation From Flat" on bar pendant connecting links.
then lifting the other end and setting it straight
The out of flatness will be allowed provided it is a gradu-
down will accomplish this.
al out of flat condition. Kinks or obvious deformation in
2. Stretch a string from connecting pin hole centerline
a small area are not allowed.
to connecting pin hole centerline.
Examples: 3. Measure the distance between the line and the bar
pendant near the center, or any area that appears
Allowable Deviation to not be flat. This is the Deviation From Flat" di-
Bar Pendant Length
From Flat mension.
4. Repeat the procedure on both sides of the bar pen-
Ft (inches) m inches mm
dant.
10 (120) 3.05 1.50 38.1 Visually inspect all bar pendant connecting links for
20 (240) 6.1 3.00 76.2 flatness. If any bar pendant connecting link visually ap-
pears to not be flat, proceed as follows.
30 (360) 9.1 4.50 114.3 5. Lay the bar pendant connecting link on a flat sur-
40 (480) 12.2 6.00 152.4 face. Turn the bar pendant connecting link up so it
is sitting on one edge (the view shown above is
Visually inspect all bar pendants on the boom for flat- looking down on the bar pendant connecting link).
ness. If any bar pendant visually appears to not be flat, Follow Steps 2 through 4 for the bar pendants
proceed as follows. listed above, substituting bar pendant connecting
link for bar pendant in the procedures.

Operator’s Manual
Pendant A Link A
Connecting Pin Connecting Pin
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Connecting Pin Connecting Pin
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B B
Pendant Link
Bar Pendant Bar Pendant Connecting Link
Figure 3−10
Elongated Connecting Pin Holes
Elongated Connecting Pin Holes The normal range for dimension A" and dimension B"
is between 0.016" and 0.032" (0.406mm and
Link-Belt will not allow an elongated connecting pin
0.813mm). If either dimension is outside this range, de-
hole in any bar pendant or bar pendant connecting
termine the cause and replace the part.
link. Inspect all the connecting pin holes in all bar pen-
dants and bar pendant connecting links per the follow- Alternative Method: Use a micrometer to measure the
ing. If any elongated hole is found in any bar pendant actual connecting pin hole diameters. A digital mi-
or bar pendant connecting link, remove the part from crometer works well for this. The horizontal and vertical
service. measurements should be equal within 0.005 inches.
1. Insert the connecting pin into the connecting pin
hole.
2. Push the connecting pin tight against the connect-
ing pin hole along the horizontal centerline. Mea-
sure the clearance between the connecting pin
and the connecting pin hole with a feeler gauge (di-
mension A").
3. Push the connecting pin tight against the connect-
ing pin hole along the vertical centerline. Measure
the clearance between the connecting pin and the
connecting pin hole with a feeler gauge (dimen-
sion B").
If the two dimensions are not within 0.005 inches, the
connecting pin hole is elongated and the bar pendant
or bar pendant connecting link must be replaced.

Operator’s Manual
Length
ID Plate
Bar Pendant
Length Bar Pendant
Figure 3−12
Identification
Figure 3−11 Identification
Length
All Link-Belt bar pendants are identified by use of an
aluminum identification plate permanently fixed to the
Length bar pendants. The identification plate contains,
among other things, the official Link-Belt Logo, the
Link-Belt will not allow any length changes in bar pen- Link-Belt part number, and the date of manufacture. In-
dants or bar pendant connecting links. Thoroughly inspect all bar pendants to ensure they have the identifi-
spect all bar pendants and bar pendant connecting cation plate. If the identification plate is missing, the
links per the following. If any change is found in the bar pendant must be replaced.
length of any bar pendant or bar pendant connecting
link, remove the part from service.
Measure the bar pendants and bar pendant connect-
ing links pin connecting hole centerline to pin connect-
ing hole centerline when the bar pendants and bar
pendant connecting links are new. Record the dimen-
sions. If a measurable change in length is detected at
any inspection, remove the bar pendant or bar pendant
connecting link from service.

Operator’s Manual
2. Work the control for the circuit being checked back
Load Moment Limiter and forth to relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure.
The Load Moment Limiter system must be inspected
Note: For functions which are operated by a
as outlined in Section 2 of this Operator’s Manual or at
toggle switch, the ignition switch must be in the
anytime there is an indication of inaccuracy. All test re-
ON" position but do not start the engine.
cords are to be signed and dated. A copy of current
test records is to be available at all times. If recalibra-
tion of the system is required, it must be done by a certi-
fied factory representative. Contact your distributor for
further information.
WARNING
Hydraulic System Relief exhausted from the system before installing a
gauge in any quick disconnect. A sudden
Valve Adjustment release of hot oil could cause burns or other
serious injury.
The following instructions pertain to checking and ad-
justing relief valve pressures in the hydraulic system. 3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Refer to the Hydraulic Pressure Setting" Chart to
CAUTION determine the correct pressure setting for the cir-
Relief valves are provided to protect the cuit being checked. Also, review the procedure for
hydraulic system. Do not increase relief valve checking that particular circuit outlined on the
pressures above specifications or hydraulic chart.
system damage may occur. 5. Start the engine.
6. If applicable, fully engage the control for the circuit
being checked and hold it in that position.
Preparing the Crane For Checking 7. With the engine running at the speed specified on
Relief Pressures the Hydraulic Pressure Settings" chart, check the
gauge for the correct reading, and adjust as re-
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
quired.
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler,
engage the travel swing lock, or brake, and shut- Note: If adjustment of the relief valve is re-
down the engine. quired, start the adjustment with the gauge
reading below the prescribed value. Make the
Note: Checking relief valve pressures is simpli-
final adjustment by bringing the pressure set-
fied by using two persons, one to operate the
ting up to the final value, not backing down to
controls and one to check and adjust the relief
the final value.
valves.
8. Allow the engine to return to idle before shutting it
down.
Relief Valve Pressure Checking 9. Work the control back and forth to relieve any hy-
Instructions draulic pressure before removing pressure gauge
from quick disconnect fitting.
Refer To Chart A" and Figure 3−13 thru Figure 3−17
for relief valve and quick disconnect fitting locations.
1. Use a gauge of known accuracy. Have the gauge
calibrated if necessary.

Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Pressure Settings

Relief Quick Disconnect & Main Relief Port Relief
Hydraulic Circuit
Valve Adjustment Location Setting Setting
Front Drum Hoist/Lower−2nd Speed
4,555 psi
Rear Drum Hoist/Lower−1st Speed 4,120 psi
1 Refer to Figure 3−14 (320kgf/cm 2)
Boom Hoist (289kgf/cm 2)
See Note 2
Right Hand Travel
Front Drum Hoist/Lower−1st Speed
4,555 psi
Rear Drum Hoist/Lower−2nd Speed 2,990 psi
2 Refer to Figure 3−15 (320kgf/cm 2)
Left Hand Travel (210kgf/cm 2)
See Note 2
Third Drum
3,335 psi
3 Swing Refer to Figure 3−16 −
(234kgf/cm 2)
2,990 psi
4 Counterweight Removal Refer to Figure 3−17 −
(210kgf/cm 2)
1,140 psi
5 Control Pressure Refer to Figure 3−18 (80kgf/cm 2) −
See Note 2
Notes: 1. All relief valve settings are ± 50 psi (3.5kgf/cm 2).

2. Adjust relief valves 1 & 2 before making final adjustment to relief valve 5.
Chart A
Relief Valve Pressures And Adjustment Locations
FRONT
3 4 1 2 5
Figure 3−13
Relief Valve Locations

Operator’s Manual
Upper Platform
5 6
4 3
8
9
10 Upper Cab
Rear Drum Clutch
1. Rear Drum Motor 5. Port Relief Adjustment Point 8. Throttle Control Pedal
2. Port Relief Gauge Port Location 6. Rear Drum Control Lever 9. Pin
3. Main Relief Gauge Port Location 7. Rear Drum Brake Pedal 10. Capscrew
4. Main Relief Adjusting Point
Figure 3−14
Hydraulic Pressure Setting − Relief Valve 1
Relief Valve 1 Adjusting Procedure 4. Fully apply and latch the winch drum brake pedals.
1. Review all the general instructions given earlier in 5. Install a pressure gauge in port relief gauge port.
this Section per Relief Valve Pressure Checking 6. Start engine. Engage the rear drum lowering con-
Instructions". trol and gradually increase engine to 2,000 rpm’s.
2. Shutdown the engine. 7. Adjust rear drum port relief pressure to 4,120 psi
(289kgf/cm 2).
Note: Pins are available to lock the rear drum 8. Shutdown the engine.
clutch spider to the drum to achieve a positive 9. Move the rear drum control lever back and forth
lock to prevent the clutch from slipping during several times to release any residual pressure from
pressure setting. the hydraulic lines.
10. Remove right travel motor hydraulic lines. Install all
3. If using pins to lock the rear drum clutch spider to dust caps and plugs to prevent contaminants from
the drum, install them and secure with the entering the system.
capscrews. 11. Install a pressure gauge in main relief gauge port.

Operator’s Manual
12. Start engine and gradually increase engine speed 16. Move right travel control back and forth several
to 2,000 rpm’s. times to release any residual pressure from the hy-
13. Engage right travel control in the forward or reverse draulic lines.
position. 17. Remove pressure gauge and install right travel hy-
14. Adjust the main relief pressure to 4,555 psi draulic lines to their original location.
(320kgf/cm 2). 18. Remove the pins from rear drum.
15. Shutdown the engine.

Operator’s Manual
5 2
4
Upper Platform 6
9 8
10
Front Drum Clutch Upper Cab
1. Front Drum Motor 5. Port Relief Adjusting Point 8. Throttle Control Pedal
2. Port Relief Gauge Port Location 6. Front Drum Control Lever 9. Pin
3. Main Relief Gauge Port Location 7. Front Drum Drake Pedal 10. Capscrew
4. Main Relief Adjusting Point
Figure 3−15
Relief Valve 2 Adjusting Procedure 4. Fully apply and latch the winch drum brake pedals.
1. Review all the general instructions given earlier in 5. Install a pressure gauge in port relief gauge port.
this Section per Relief Valve Pressure Checking 6. Start engine. Engage the front drum lowering con-
Instructions". trol and gradually increase engine to 2,000 rpm’s.
2. Shutdown the engine. 7. Adjust front drum port relief pressure to 2,990 psi
(210kgf/cm 2).
Note: Pins are available to lock the rear drum 8. Shutdown the engine.
clutch spider to the drum to achieve a positive 9. Move the front drum control lever back and forth
lock to prevent the clutch from slipping during several times to release any residual pressure from
pressure setting. the hydraulic lines.
10. Remove left travel motor hydraulic lines. Install all
3. If using pins to lock the front drum clutch spider to dust caps and plugs to prevent contaminants from
the drum, install them and secure with the entering the system.
capscrews. 11. Install a pressure gauge in main relief gauge port.

Operator’s Manual
12. Start engine and gradually increase engine speed 16. Move left travel control back and forth several times
to 2,000 rpm’s. to release any residual pressure from the hydraulic
13. Engage left travel control in the forward or reverse lines.
position. 17. Remove pressure gauge and install left travel hy-
14. Adjust the main relief pressure to 4,555 psi draulic lines to their original location.
(320kgf/cm 2). 18. Remove the pins from front drum.
15. Shutdown the engine.

Operator’s Manual
1 2
5 3
4
Upper Platform
Upper Cab 7 6
1. Left Swing Planetary 5. Swing Control Lever

2. Right Swing Planetary 6. Throttle Control Pedal
3. Gauge Port Location 7. Swing Lock Control
4. Adjusting Point
Figure 3−16
Relief Valve 3 Adjusting Procedure 4. Engage the travel swing lock.

1. Review all the general instructions given in this 5. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to
Section per Relief Valve Pressure Checking In- 2,000 rpm.
structions". 6. Engage the swing control lever to swing right and
2. Shutdown the engine and bleed any pressure from hold.
the circuit. 7. Adjust relief pressure to 3,335 psi (234kgf/cm 2).
3. Install the pressure gauge. Refer to Figure 3−16 8. Shutdown the engine, bleed any pressure from the
for pressure gauge and adjusting screw locations. circuit, and remove the pressure gauge.

Operator’s Manual
3 2
1
CTWT CYL.
POWER 1
EXTEND
BOTH
CYL.
ON
ONLY ONLY
L.H. R.H.
RETRACT CYL. CYL. OFF
IN OUT OUT IN
CTWT PIN
CTWT REMOTE CONTROL BOX CER2435
CTWT Remote Control Box
4 5
1. Counterweight Removal Cylinder 4. Gauge Port Location

2. Power Switch 5. Adjusting Point
3. Counterweight Cylinder Switch
Figure 3−17
Relief Valve 4 Adjusting Procedure 4. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section speed to 2,000 rpm.
per Relief Valve Pressure Checking Instructions". 5. Fully retract the counterweight removal cylinder
2. Shutdown the engine and bleed any pressure from and hold.
the circuit. 6. Adjust relief pressure to 2,990 psi (210kgf/cm 2).
3. Install the pressure gauge. Refer to Figure 3−17 7. Shutdown the engine, bleed any pressure from the
for pressure gauge and adjusting screw locations. circuit, and remove the pressure gauge.

Operator’s Manual
Upper Platform
5 4
TEMP OIL TEMP FUEL
3 6
Upper Cab
1. Adjusting Point 3. Hydraulic Oil Pressure Gauge 5. Rear Drum Control Lever
2. Relief Valve 4. Front Drum Control Lever 6. Winch Drum Brake Pedals
Figure 3−18
Relief Valve 5 Adjusting Procedure 4. Observe the pressure gauge on the face of the hy-
1. Review all the general instructions given in this draulic oil pressure gauge. The indicator needle
Section per Relief Valve Pressure Checking In- will read the control pressure. Refer to
structions". Figure 3−18.
2. Start engine and let it run at idle 5. Adjust the control pressure relief valve as required
3. Fully apply and latch winch drum brake pedals. with the engine at idle. Normal operating pressure
is 1,140 psi (80kgf/cm 2).

Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Boom Backstops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−1
Using Live Mast As A Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−3

Live Mast Lower Limit Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−4
Crane Assembly Component Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−5
10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7
Open Throat Boom Assembly And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−7

Main Pendants And Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Basic Pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Basic Boom Pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Standard Boom Pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9

Live Mast Addition Pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Extension Pendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Pendant Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−9
Pendant Make-Up Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−11
Mid-Point Suspension Pendants (Open Throat Boom Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−12
Boom Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
Boom Label Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−13
Boom Connecting Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
Boom Connecting Pin Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
Boom Connecting Pin Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−14
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−15
Boom Base Section Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−17
Boom Base Section Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−19
Recommended Boom Make-Up − Open Throat Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−20
Boom Self Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−22
Load Moment Limiter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−25
Boom Backstops Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−26
Boom Hoist Limit Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−27
Boom Self Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−28
Horizontal Boom Travel (Assembly Only)
And Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits Charts (Open Throat Boom Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−32
5 Ft (1.5m) Tip Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−34
Hammerhead Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−35
Section 4 − Attachments i
Operator’s Manual
Tubular Jib (Open Throat Boom Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−36
Tubular Jib Assembly And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−36
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−36
Jib Assembly And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−38
To Change The Jib Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−40
To Change The Jib Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−41
Jib Removal And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−41
Liftoff Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4−42
ii Section 4 − Attachments
Operator’s Manual
1
2
1. Boom Base Section Targets 5. Telescoping Strut

2. Spring Loaded Bumper 6. Backstop Support
3. Backstop Tube 7. Boom Base Section
4. Live Mast Backstop
Figure 4−1
Boom Backstops
backstops lay in the rest, the telescoping struts will ex-

Boom Backstops tend until the boom contacts the ground.
This crane is equipped with mechanical type back- The backstops can be adjusted so the boom base sec-
stops. The backstops consist of tubes with spring tion targets contact the spring loaded bumpers at max-
loaded bumpers at one end. The other end is pinned to imum angle. After the boom is installed, properly ad-
the upper frame. A pair of telescoping struts are just the backstops before beginning operations. Refer
pinned between the backstops and base section. Re- to Boom Backstops Adjustment" found in this Section
fer to Figure 4−1. of the Operator’s Manual.
When hoisting the boom, the telescoping struts raise The boom backstops are also equipped with live mast
the boom backstops. As the boom nears maximum backstops. The live mast backstops are smaller spring
angle, the spring loaded bumpers on the end of the loaded tubes attached to the boom backstop tubes.
backstop tubes contact a pair of targets on the boom When the live mast backstops are properly positioned
base section. they will contact a target on the live mast. Refer to Us-
When the boom is lowered the backstops will lay in the ing Live Mast As A Boom" found in this Section of the
backstop support. If the boom is lowered after the Operator’s Manual.
Section 4 − Attachments 4−1

Operator’s Manual
1 8
7
2
3
5
4
6
1. Standard Boom Hoist Reeving 4. Boom Backstop (Mechanical Type) 7. 3 Part Line − 1" (25.4mm) Diameter Wire
2. Winch Line Reeved To Rear Drum 5. Live Mast Rope
3. Live Mast Backstop 6. Hook Block 8. Auxiliary Lifting Sheaves
Figure 4−2
Live Mast As A Boom
4−2 Section 4 − Attachments

Operator’s Manual
Live Mast Target & Backstop In Live Mast Target & Backstop In
Working Position Stored Position
1
1
2
1 3 4 1 2
3
5 5
4 6
6
7 7
1. Live Mast 5. Boom Backstop

2. Target 6. Lock Pin NOTE: Remove lock pin (Item 6)
3. Live Mast Backstop 7. Backstop Support when boom is installed.
4. Position Pin
Figure 4−3
Boom Backstop Used As Live Mast Backstop
The following is a list of requirements when using the

Using Live Mast As A Boom live mast as a boom:
The live mast can be used as a boom using the capaci- 1. The auxiliary lifting sheave must be properly in-
ties listed on the Live Mast Lifting Capacities" chart lo- stalled and reeved with three parts of 1" (25.4cm)
cated in the Crane Rating Manual. The primary appli- diameter wire rope.
cation for lifting with the live mast is during boom as- 2. The winch line must be reeved over live mast cross
sembly/disassembly, side frame removal/installation, member and from rear drum only.
jack cylinder removal/installation, counterweight re- 3. The live mast backstops and targets must be in the
moval/installation, and counterweight assist frame re- working position with boom backstops pinned to
moval/installation/storage. The weights for each of backstop support. Refer to Figure 4−3.
these components are listed in Figure 4−2 and in the 4. Do not exceed the capacity ratings, mast radii, or
Crane Rating Manual. other stipulations as outlined on the Live Mast Lift-
ing Capacities" chart located in the Crane Rating
Manual.
5. Do not install the counterweights while crane is
raised on the carbody jack cylinders. Side frames
must be installed and set before installing the
counterweights.

Operator’s Manual
2 A
1
3
4
1
2° 5
A
7 6
1. Striker Plate 3. Switch Arm 5. Switch 7. Live Mast

2. Roller 4. Setscrew 6. Horizontal
Figure 4−4
Live Mast Lower Limit Switch
Live Mast Lower Limit Switch Ensure the live mast lower limit switch is properly ad-
justed. Adjustment procedure is as follows:
Adjustment 1. Position live mast 2° above horizontal.
When preparing the crane for transport, the live mast 2. Loosen setscrew and properly adjust switch arm
can be lowered to reduce the overall travel height. and roller to contact the striker plate. Continue to
However, a lowering limit switch is utilized to prevent move the switch arm against the striker plate until a
the live mast from being lowered below 2° above hori- click" (indicating the switch is activated) is heard.
zontal. If the live mast is lowered to 2°, the limit switch Tighten the setscrew.
activates disabling the boom lowering and winch hoist- Do not tie the live mast down during transport unless
ing function. This will prevent the live mast from falling. the live mast is securely supported on blocking. If the
live mast is tied down onto blocking, ensure that there
is adequate slack in the boom hoist ropes to prevent
WARNING the ropes from becoming tight and damaging the live
During all transporting and operations mast.
utilizing the live mast, do not allow it to be
lowered 2° above horizontal unless
supported by an auxiliary lifting device. The
live mast will fall, causing live mast and/or
equipment damage.

Operator’s Manual
Crane Assembly Component Weights

Weight
Component
lb kg
1 30’ Top Section With 6 Sheave Head Machinery 4,488 2 036
2 10’ Boom Extension With Lifting Sheaves 2,422 1 099
3 5’ Hammerhead With Head Machinery 3,400 1 542
4 10’ Tapered Hammerhead Extension 1,840 835
5 20’ Base Section (Without Third Drum) 4,479 2 032
6 20’ Base Section (With Third Drum, Fleeting Sheave, and 9,035 4 098
850’ Of Type RB" Wire Rope)
7 Boom Extensions (With Bar Pendants and Connecting Links & Pins)
10’ Assembly 1,151 522
20’ Assembly 1,862 845
30’ Assembly 2,590 1 175
40’ Assembly 3,292 1 493
50’ Assembly 4,176 1 894
8 Upper Counterweights
D Counterweight A" 40,000 18 144
D Counterweight AB" 66,000 29 938
D Counterweight ABC" 92,000 41 731
D Counterweight ABCD" 118,000 53 525
D A", B", C", & D" Wing Counterweights (Each) 13,000 5 897
9 Auxiliary A" Lower Counterweights (Each)
D With 44" (1.12m) Track Shoes 24,000 10 886
10 Side Frames (Each) (With Lifting Links, Pins, and Shackles)
11 Carbody Jack Cylinders (Each) 560 254

Operator’s Manual
6 7
4
1
5 8
7
3
B
13
2
9
10
12
A
A B
14
11
11
15
16
17
Working Position for Stored Position When Not Us-
Self Assembly Section ing Self Assembly Section
1. Self Assembly Section/Mid-Point/Boom 7. 1 in (25.4mm) X 8 ft (2.4m) Pendant 12. ABCD" Counterweight

Assembly Pendant Link 8. 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section 13. Backstops
2. Boom Self Assembly Pendant Connection 9. 1,692 lb (767.5kg) 60 Ton (54.4t) Minimum 14. Self Assembly Section Striker
3. Mid-Point Pendant Connection Hook Block 15. Luffing Boom Striker
4. Boom Pendant Link 10. Standard Base Section 16. Striker Assembly
5. Boom Self Assembly Pendant (Stored) 11. Backstop Target Extension 17. Limit Switch
6. 50.5 in (1.28m) Live Mast Pendant
− Stored Position
Figure 4−5
10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section

Operator’s Manual
10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly
Section
The optional 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section is used
during self assembly operations of the crane. Use the
capacities listed on the 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly
Section" chart located in the Crane Rating Manual. The
10 ft (3.05m) extension along with the base section can
remain on the crane during transportation. Refer to
Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual. This will decrease
the time it takes to assemble the crane when arriving at
the job site.
WARNING 4 Part Reeving Diagram

The optional 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly From Front or Rear Drum
section is used only for self assembly
operations of the crane. Do not use as an
auxiliary lifting device.
The following is a list of requirements when using the Figure 4−6

10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section: 10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section Reeving
1. Crane on a firm level surface. Diagrams
2. A 1,692 lb (767.5kg) 60 ton (54.4t) minimum hook
block must be used.
3. Four part load hoist line reeved from the front or
rear drum. Refer to Figure 4−6.
Open Throat Boom
4. The 1 in (25.4mm) x 8 ft (2.4m) pendant must be
installed as shown in Figure 4−5.
Assembly And Disassembly
5. The backstop target extension must be flipped The following procedures outline the recommended
down to the working position. steps necessary for safe boom base section
6. Adjust self assembly section striker to contact the
installation and complete self assembly and/or disas-
switch roller in the center of the striker and to dis-
able the boom hoist function at 84° boom angle. If sembly of the boom. Depending upon job site
necessary rotate the striker assembly. conditions and the availability of auxiliary lifting equip-
7. Install the load moment limiter by-pass connector ment, these procedures can be modified using only
located at the front of the upper frame. known, proven, safe procedures to increase the
8. Crane in top condition and equipped as when it left efficiency of boom assembly.
the factory.
WARNING
Do not exceed the rated capacities listed in the
Crane Rating Manual. Refer to the Crane
Rating Manual before lifting a load.

Operator’s Manual
1
2
15 14
5
12
13 6
11
8
10
1. Jib Frontstay Pendant 5. Bridle 9. Boom Base Section 12. Boom Top Section
2. Jib Mast 6. Live Mast 10. 10 Ft (3.05m) Self Assembly 13. Hook Block
3. Jib Backstay Pendant 7. Boom Backstop Section 14. Jib Assembly
4. Boom Pendant 8. Bail 11. Boom Extension(s) 15. Hook Ball
Figure 4−7
Boom Nomenclature
Regardless of the specific method used to assemble or

disassemble the boom, certain procedures must be
followed to prevent reckless or inadvertent dropping of
DANGER
the boom. Improper assembly or disassembly of the To avoid serious injury, carefully read and
boom can lead to severe personal injury or death. understand all boom assembly, disassembly,
Unrepairable damage to boom sections could occur and safety instructions outlined in this
also. Operator’s Manual. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in severe personal
The boom can be assembled/disassembled using the
injury or death.
live mast or the optional 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly
section to handle all the lifting required. The illustra-
tions show the live mast being used but the procedures The basic boom for this crane is 50 ft (15.24m) in
will work for both the optional 10 ft (3.05m) self assem- length, and consists of a 20 ft (6.10m) boom base
bly section or the live mast. section and 30 ft (9.15m) boom top section. The two
Any questions regarding safe boom assembly or dis- sections are connected by four pins, in line with the
assembly procedures should be directed to your dis- boom chords. Additional boom extensions are
tributor or factory. available in 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 ft (3.05, 6.10, 9.15,
12.19, and 15.24m) lengths and may be combined to
form a maximum boom length of 280 ft (85.34m).

Operator’s Manual
2 4 5
3 3
1 1
1. Boom Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. 9.5 in (24.13cm) Pendant Connecting Link
2. Tension Lock Pin 5. Extension Pendant
3. Pendant Connecting Pin
Figure 4−8
Pendant Storage
Main Pendants And Links Extension Pendants

Bar type pendant are used on this crane. For ease of Additional pendants are available to match the avail-
installation and handling, the bar pendants are self- able boom extensions. Refer to Boom Extension Pen-
stored on each boom section. Refer to Bar Pendant dant Arrangements" table for pendant lengths for each
Inspection And Replacement Recommendations" lo- extension. They are pinned together using dual 9.5 in
cated in Section 3 of this Operator’s Manual before as- (24.13cm) links that are supplied with each pendant.
sembling the bar pendants. An additional pair of 61.75 in (1.57m) pendants are re-
quired on boom lengths of 70 ft (21.3m) and longer and
Basic Pendants connect to the 23.5 in (59.69cm) live mast links. Refer
to Figure 4−9.
Basic Boom Pendants
Boom Extension Pendant Arrangements
A pair of 19 ft-2.5 in (6.36m) top section pendants and a
pair of 50.5 in (1.64m) live mast pendants are used with 10 Ft (3.05m) Self As-
None
sembly Section
the 50 ft (15.24m) basic boom, one each on each side
of the boom. The basic pendants are pinned together None if pinned to base section
using dual 9.5 in (24.13cm) links that are supplied with If used in boom length
10 Ft (3.05m) Extension
each pendant. The live mast pendants connect to the 9.5" (24.13cm) Dual Links
spreader bar. The top section pendants connect to 9’-2.5" (2.81m) Pendant
17.5 in (44.45cm) links at the boom head machinery. 9.5" (24.13cm) Dual Links
Refer to Figure 4−9. 20 Ft (6.10m) Extension
19’-2.5" (5.85m) Pendant
Standard Boom Pendants 9.5" (24.13cm) Dual Links
30Ft (9.15m) Extension
On booms 60 ft (18.29m) and longer, a pair of 28 ft-3.25 29’-2.5" (8.90m) Pendant
in (8.62m) top section pendants and a pair of 61.75 in 40 Ft (12.19m) Extension (2) 9.5" (24.13cm) Dual Links
(1.57m) live mast pendants are used, one each on (See Note) (2) 19’-2.5" (5.85m) Pendant
each side of the boom. The live mast pendants con- (2) 9.5" (24.13cm) Dual Links
nect to the spreader bar. The top section pendants 50 Ft (15.24m) Extension
(2) 24’-2.5" (7.38m) Pendant
connect to 17.5 in (44.45cm) links at the boom head
Note: Earlier cranes use one pair of 39’-2.5" (11.95m) bar pen-
machinery. Refer to Figure 4−9. dants for the 40 ft (12.19m) extension. The 39’-2.5" bar pendant
is no longer available and is replaced with two (2) 19’-2.5"
Live Mast Addition Pendants (5.85m) bar pendants.
On boom lengths of 70 ft (21.34m) and longer, an addi-
Pendant Storage
tional pair of live mast pendants must be used. These
pendants must connect to the 61.75 in (1.57m) live The bar pendants supplied with each extension are
mast pendants using dual 10.25 in (26.03cm) connect- stored on brackets mounted on the boom extension.
ing links. Refer to Figure 4−8.

Operator’s Manual
11.5 in (29.21cm) Live Mast Link
Spreader Bar
Live
Mast 50.5 in (1.28m) Live Mast Pendant
9.5 in (24.13cm) Pendant Link

19 ft 2.5 in (5.85m) Top Section Pendant
17.5 in (44.45cm) Top Section Link
50 Ft (15.24m) Boom
Spreader Bar
Live
Mast
61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant Note: A 10 ft (6.10m) extension is re-
9.5 in (24.13cm) Pendant Link quired for all boom lengths 60−280 ft
28 ft3.25 in (8.62m) Top Section Pendant
(18.29−85.34m). The 10 ft extension can
be a standard extension or the self as-
sembly section.
60 Ft (18.29m) Boom
Spreader Bar
Live 61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant
Mast
61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant Addition
Extension Pendant(s)
70−120 Ft (21.34−36.58m) Boom

Spreader Bar
61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant
Live 10.25 in (26.03cm) Pendant Link

Mast 61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant Addition
Extension Pendants

130−240 Ft (27.43−73.15m) Boom
Spreader Bar
11.5 in (29.21cm)
Live Mast Link 61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant
Live
Mast 61.75 in (1.57m) Live Mast Pendant Addition 17.5 in (44.45cm)
Top Section Link
Extension Pendants 28 ft 3.25 in (8.62m)
Top Section Pendant
Mid Point Pendant
130 ft (39.62m)
250 & 280 Ft (76.20 & 85.34m) Boom
Figure 4−9
Bar Pendant Installation

Operator’s Manual
Pendant Make-Up Requirements
Pendant Make-up
Boom Length
Top Section Extension Live Mast Live Mast Addition
Ft m Ft-In m Ft m In m In m
50 15.24 19−2.5 5.85 − − 50.50 1.28 − −
60 18.29 28−3.25 8.62 − − 61.75 1.57 − −
70 21.34 28−3.25 8.62 10 6.10 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
80 24.38 28−3.25 8.62 20 9.15 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
90 27.43 28−3.25 8.62 30 12.19 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
100 30.48 28−3.25 8.62 40 15.24 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
110 33.53 28−3.25 8.62 50 18.29 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
120 36.58 28−3.25 8.62 60 21.34 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
130 39.62 28−3.25 8.62 70 24.38 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
140 42.67 28−3.25 8.62 80 27.43 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
150 45.72 28−3.25 8.62 90 30.48 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
160 48.77 28−3.25 8.62 100 33.53 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
170 51.82 28−3.25 8.62 110 36.58 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
180 54.86 28−3.25 8.62 120 39.62 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
190 57.91 28−3.25 8.62 130 42.67 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
200 60.96 28−3.25 8.62 140 45.72 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
210 64.01 28−3.25 8.62 150 48.77 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
220 67.06 28−3.25 8.62 160 51.82 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
230 70.10 28−3.25 8.62 170 54.86 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
240 73.15 28−3.25 8.62 180 57.91 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
250* 76.20 28−3.25 8.62 190 60.96 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
260* 79.25 28−3.25 8.62 200 64.01 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
270* 82.30 28−3.25 8.62 210 67.06 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
280* 85.34 28−3.25 8.62 220 70.10 61.75 1.57 61.75 1.57
* Mid-point pendants are required on boom lengths of 250 ft (76.20m) and longer and installed 130 ft
(39.62m) from boom foot.
Note: A 10 ft (6.10m) extension is required for all boom lengths 60−280 ft (18.29−85.34m). The 10 ft exten-
sion can be a standard extension or the self assembly section.
CAUTION
Always use the correct pendant length. Use of incorrect pendant lengths can cause boom or suspension
failure.
Figure 4−10
Pendant Requirements

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
10
1. Top Boom Connecting Pins 5. Mid-Point Suspension Pendant 9. 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section
2. Capscrew, Spacer, & Locknut 6. Pin & Cotter Pins Pendant Connection
3. Mid-Point Links 7. Live Mast Links 10. Boom Assembly Pendant Connection
4. Pin & Cotter Pins 8. Live Mast
Figure 4−11
Mid-Point Suspension Pendant Assembly
Mid-Point Suspension Pendants Mid-point suspension pendants must be installed on

all booms 250 ft (76.20m) and longer. The pendants at-
(Open Throat Boom Only) tach to a pair of mid-point links which fit over the top
The mid-point suspension pendants are designed to boom connecting pin at a point 130 ft (39.62m) from the
support the middle portion of the boom while it is being boom foot. The other end of the mid-point pendants
raised from or lowered to the ground. At low boom an- pin to links on the live mast. The mid-point pendants
gles some mid-portion support is provided by these are 112 ft (34.14m) long and .88 in (22mm) in diameter.
pendants. The amount of support gradually reduces Refer to Figure 4−11.
as the boom angle increases.
Note: The crane may be equipped with an optional
live mast link that can accommodate the mid-point
pendants, the boom assembly pendants, and the 10
ft (3.05m) self assembly section pendant.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 4−12
Boom Pin Danger Label
Boom Inspection Boom Label Inspection

Inspect the boom periodically to make sure it has not Boom extensions, boom top section, and the boom
been damaged. If a boom or jib section has been base section must be equipped with boom pin removal
damaged, it must be repaired or replaced before the danger labels. Refer to Figure 4−12. These danger
boom is used. Damaged lattice can be replaced. labels are placed on all pin connected boom sections,
Consult Distributor for information on lattice at the factory, as a reminder of the importance of using
replacement. correct procedures to remove pins from these booms.
Note: If a main chord is bent or damaged, the boom Before starting boom assembly or after disassembly,
section must be replaced before making any lifts. check each boom section for warning labels. Any
labels that are scratched, painted over, worn, or
unreadable must be replaced. Contact your nearest
distributor for replacement boom pin removal danger
labels.

Operator’s Manual
1
1. Boom Connecting Pin
2. Lock Pins
Figure 4−13
Double Tapered Boom Connecting Pins
Boom Connecting Pin 3. Drive connecting pin through the boom connec-
tion from outside to the inside of the boom. Install
Boom extensions are connected by four double ta- lock pins in both ends of boom connecting pins.
pered pins, in line with the boom chords and are se- See Figure 4−13.
cured by two lock pins. Refer to Figure 4−13. Each 4. Use this procedure to install all boom connecting
boom extension has storage locations for the pins. Re- pins required for boom assembly.
fer to Figure 4−8 for boom connecting pin storage
location. Boom Connecting Pin Removal
1. First read and carefully understand the boom dis-
assembly instructions in this Operator’s Manual.
WARNING 2. Stand outside the boom connecting pin lug. Do
To avoid serious injury, carefully read and not stand inside the boom at anytime. Refer to
understand the boom assembly and Figure 4−14.
disassembly instructions in this Operator’s
Manual. Read these instructions before
beginning boom assembly or disassembly. DANGER
Do not stand or work inside or under the boom
at anytime. If the boom falls, serious injury
Boom Connecting Pin Installation may result.
1. First read and completely understand the boom
assembly instructions in this Operator’s Manual. 3. Remove both lock pins from boom connecting pin.
2. Stand outside the boom connecting pin lug. Do Drive connecting pin from the outside to the inside
not stand inside or under the boom at anytime. Re- of the boom. Remove connecting pin.
fer to Figure 4−14. 4. Use this procedure to remove boom connecting
pins specified in the boom disassembly procedure
DANGER
Do not stand or work inside or under the boom
at anytime. If the boom falls, serious injury
may result.

Operator’s Manual
Wrong
Pendants Incorrectly Located
For Boom Disassembly.
Do Not Stand Inside

Or Under The Boom.
Right
Pendants Correctly Located At Or Behind

Boom Connection To Be Disassembled.
Stand Outside The Boom.

Drive Connecting Pin To The Inside
Figure 4−14
Boom Safety
Safety Instructions 5. Always wear proper eye protection when driving

connecting pins.
The following points must be observed while 6. Do not remove any connecting pins which are
performing any boom assembly or disassembly: located behind the boom supporting pendants.
1. Read and understand the instructions outlined in Refer to Figure 4−15.
this Operator’s Manual before attempting to as- 7. Stay clear of pinch points when aligning boom
semble or disassemble the boom. section connecting lugs. Never place your fingers
2. Do not stand inside, on top, or under the boom at in connecting pin holes.
anytime while assembling or disassembling the 8. Do not exceed cantilever limits shown on the
boom. Refer to Figure 4−14. Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" chart found in
3. Do not climb, stand, or walk on the boom. Use a this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
ladder or similar device to reach necessary areas. 9. Use caution when disconnecting the dead end of
4. When removing or installing the boom section wire ropes. Reeved rope can become twisted on
connecting pins, drive the pins from the outside of the sheaves. When the dead end pin or socket is
the boom toward the inside. removed, the rope may spin.

Operator’s Manual
Pendants Tight And

Located Behind Boom Right
Connection To Be
Disassembled.
Centerline Of
Boom Straight.
Boom Head Machinery
Just Resting On Blocking.
Lower Pins Only

May Be Removed.
Lower Pins Removed.
Pendants Incorrectly Wrong

Located In Front Of
Connection To Be
Disassembled.
Pendants Were
Located Behind Boom
Connection To Be Wrong
Disassembled.
Boom Head Machinery
Was Not Resting On
Blocking When The Upper Pins Removed.
Pins Were Removed.
Figure 4−15
Pin Connected Boom Disassembly

Operator’s Manual
2
IN 3
1
OUT
1
BOOM FOOT BOOM FOOT

PIN (L) PIN (R)
6 5
Load Moment Indicator Panel Boom Foot
1. Removal Cylinder Control Switches 4. Key Plate 4
2. Quick Disconnect Hose Connections 5. Capscrew
3. Boom Foot Pin 6. Removal Cylinder
Figure 4−16
Boom Foot Pin Controls
Boom Base Section Installation 6. Make the quick disconnect type hose connections
1. Read and fully understand all the safety instruc- on each of the boom foot pin removal cylinders.
tions given in this Section of the Operator’s Manu- Refer to Figure 4−16.
al. 7. Start the engine and move one of the boom foot pin
2. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the control switches, on the upper cab control con-
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler sole, to the IN" position. When the first boom foot
and apply the swing brake. pin is completely installed, install the second boom
3. Refer to the Liftoff Capabilities" chart found in this foot pin in the same manner.
Section of the Operator’s Manual and in the Crane 8. Install the key plates on each of the removal cylin-
Rating Manual to determine the correct amount of ders and secure with the capscrews.
counterweight required based on the boom con- 9. Carefully lower the unattached end of the boom
figuration to be used. Add or remove counter- base section to the ground or onto secure block-
weight as required. Refer to the proper procedure ing.
in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual for specific 10. Shutdown the engine. With the engine shutdown
instructions. and the ignition key in the ON" position, bleed any
4. Using the live mast as a boom, lift the boom base hydraulic pressure from the boom foot pin removal
section onto the upper and align the boom foot pin circuit by working the toggle switch on the control
mounting holes. console back and forth.
5. Shutdown the engine. With the engine shutdown 11. Disconnect the hoses from each of the removal cyl-
and the ignition key in the ON" position, bleed any inders.
hydraulic pressure from the circuit by working the 12. Install the telescopic struts to the backstops using
toggle switch on the dash back and forth. Refer to the pins, spacers and cotter pins as shown in Inset
Figure 4−16. A", Figure 4−17. Check also that the struts at the
base section of the boom are securely in place as
shown in Inset B". Remove the link which secures
the backstops to the backstop supports and posi-
WARNING tion the live mast backstops as shown in Inset C".
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be Refer to Figure 4−17.
exhausted from the system before installing
or removing any hose connections. A sudden
release of hot oil could cause burns or other
serious injury.

Operator’s Manual
1 A B 2
3
C
4 B
A
16 12 5
15 7
14 13 8
2 9 C
10
BOOM BOOM CHORD
11*
1. Boom Backstop 5. Cotter Pin 9. Connecting Link 13. Live Mast Backstop
2. Telescoping Strut 6. Pin 10. Pin, Washers, & Lock Pins 14. Link
3. Boom Base Section 7. Spacers 11. Pin, Washers, & Cotter Pin* 15. Backstop Support
4. Boom Backstop 8. Telescoping Strut 12. Boom Backstop 16. Position Pin
* Pin must be installed from the inside as shown to provide clearance for the backstop switch.
Figure 4−17
Boom Base Section Removal/Installation

Operator’s Manual
Boom Base Section Removal hydraulic pressure from the boom foot pin removal
1. Read and fully understand all the safety instruc- circuit by working the control switch back and
tions given in this Section of the Operator’s Manu- forth.
al.
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler WARNING
and apply the swing brake. All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
3. Lower the boom base section to the ground or onto exhausted from the system before installing
secure blocking. or removing any hose connections. A sudden
4. Remove the cotter pins and pins which secure the release of hot oil could cause burns or other
telescoping struts to the boom backstop. Fold the serious injury.
telescoping struts forward and secure them to the
boom base section using a rope, cable tie, or some 9. Make the quick disconnect type hose connections
other means. Refer to Figure 4−17. on each of the boom foot pin removal cylinders.
5. Rig the live mast to be used as a boom. Refer to Refer to Figure 4−16.
Using The Live Mast As A Boom" found in this 10. Start the engine and move one of the boom foot pin
Section of the Operator’s Manual. control switches, on the upper cab control con-
6. Support the boom base section with the live mast. sole, to the OUT" position. When the first boom
foot pin is completely withdrawn, remove the sec-
ond boom foot pin in the same manner.
WARNING 11. Shutdown the engine. With the engine shutdown
and the ignition key in the ON" position, bleed any
Properly support the boom base section with
hydraulic pressure from the boom foot pin removal
the live mast and adequate rigging. Once the
circuit by working the toggle switch on the control
boom foot pins are withdrawn the boom base
console back and forth.
section will fall unless it is properly
12. Disconnect the hoses from each of the removal cyl-
supported.
inders.
7. Remove the capscrews and key plates which se- 13. Carefully lower the boom base section to the
cure the boom foot pins. Refer to Figure 4−16. ground or onto a transport vehicle.
8. Shutdown the engine. With the engine shutdown
and the ignition key in the ON" position, bleed any

Operator’s Manual
Recommended Boom Make-Up
50 20 30
60 20 10 30
70 20 10 10 30
80 20 10 20 30
90 20 10 30 30
100 20 10 40 30
110 20 10 50 30
120 20 10 20 40 30
130 20 10 30 40 30
140 20 10 30 50 30
150 20 10 40 50 30
160 20 10 50 50 30
170 20 10 20 40 50 30
180 20 10 20 50 50 30
190 20 10 30 50 50 30
200 20 10 40 50 50 30
210 20 10 20 30 50 50 30
220 20 10 20 40 50 50 30
230 20 10 30 40 50 50 30
240 20 10 10 30 40 50 50 30
250 20 10 20 30 50 40 50 30
260 20 10 20 30 50 10 40 50 30
270 20 10 20 30 50 20 40 50 30
280 20 10 20 30 50 10 20 40 50 30
Recommended Boom Make-Up − (76.2 and 85.34m) booms, a short extension will a have
to be installed 130 ft (39.62m) from the boom foot to ac-
Open Throat Boom commodate the mid-point pendants. Keeping the
To assemble any boom length from 50 to 280 ft (15.24 short extensions close to the boom foot improves
− 85.34m) a combination of some or all of the following boom stability.
boom extensions are required: two 10 ft (3.05m), one
Note: A 10 ft (6.10m) extension is required for all
20 ft (6.10m), two 30 ft (9.15m), one 40 ft (12.2m), and
boom lengths 60−280 ft (18.29−85.34m). The 10 ft
two 50 ft (15.24m). It is important that the boom sec-
extension can be a standard extension or the self
tions be positioned so that the shortest extensions are
assembly section.
closest to the boom foot. However, on 250 − 280 ft

Operator’s Manual
Boom Length Boom Extensions
20 ft (6.10m) 30 ft (9.14m)
ft m 10 ft (3.05m) 20 ft (6.10m) 30 ft (9.14m) 40 ft (12.19m) 50 ft (15.24m)
Base Top
50 15.24 1 − 1
60 18.29 1 1 1
70 21.34 1 2 1
80 24.38 1 1 1 1
90 27.43 1 1 1 1
100 30.48 1 1 1 1
110 33.53 1 1 1 1
120 36.58 1 1 1 1 1
130 39.62 1 1 1 1 1
140 42.67 1 1 1 1 1
150 45.72 1 1 1 1 1
160 48.77 1 1 2 1
170 51.82 1 1 1 1 1 1
180 54.86 1 1 1 2 1
190 57.91 1 1 1 2 1
200 60.96 1 1 1 2 1
210 64.01 1 1 1 1 2 1
220 67.06 1 1 1 1 2 1
230 70.10 1 1 1 1 2 1
240 73.15 1 2 1 1 2 1
250 76.20 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
260 79.25 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
270 82.30 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
280 85.34 1 2 2 1 1 2 1
Totals 1 2 2 1 1 2 1

Operator’s Manual
Boom Self Assembly
Before beginning the boom self assembly procedure, refer to the Liftoff Capabilities" chart found later in this Section
of this Operator’s Manual and in the Crane Rating Manual to determine the correct amount of counterweight re-
quired for the boom configuration to be installed. The live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section can be
rigged as a boom to perform all the lifting procedures required to assemble the boom. Refer to Using The Live Mast
As A Boom" or 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section" found earlier in this Section of this Operator’s Manual for the
correct procedure. On booms 250 ft (76.20m) and longer, midpoint suspension pendants are required 130 ft
(39.62m) from boom foot. See Midpoint Suspension Pendants" earlier in this Section of the Operator’s Manual.
1. Read and fully understand all the safety instructions given earlier in this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
DANGER
To avoid serious injury, carefully read and understand the boom safety instructions outlined earlier in
this Section of this Operator’s Manual. Failure to follow these instructions could result in severe
personal injury or death.
2. Ensure that the Rigging Mode switch located on the left control console is the in the ON position and that the
by-pass connector is installed in the front of the upper. Refer to Rigging Mode" found in Section 1 of this Opera-
tor’s Manual.
Right
Figure 4−18
Lattice Within The Boom Sections Must Create A Continuous Zig Zag Pattern.
3. Using the live mast or the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section, layout the top section and boom extensions. Pin
them together on blocking as shown in Figure 4−18. Locate the shorter boom sections toward the base section
and make sure the lattice form a continuous zig zag pattern from one section to another. Improper assembly will
cause unequal loads to be carried through the boom, weakening the structure. The boom base section must
remain separate from the rest of the boom at this point.
4. Install the correct amount of counterweight required for the boom configuration to be installed. Refer to Coun-
terweight Installation and Removal" found in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual for the correct procedure.
Figure 4−19
Installing The Base Section Using The Live Mast As A Boom.
5. If using the live mast as a boom, install the boom base section. Refer to Boom Base Section Installation" found
in this Section of this Operator’s Manual. If using the10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section, go to Step 7.

Operator’s Manual
A
7
6
1. Pin − Supplied With Pendant
2. Pin & Cotter Pin− From Live Mast
1
3. Boom Base Section Connecting Lug
4. Boom Base Section Lifting Lug
5. Assembly/Transporting/Traveling Link − Stored On Live Mast
6. 22’ (6.7m) Boom Assembly Pendant − Stored On Live Mast 2
5
7. 10’ (3.05m) Self Assembly Section/Mid-Point/Boom Assembly Pendant Link
4
A 3
Figure 4−20
Install Transporting/Traveling Link And 22 ft (6.7m) Boom Assembly Pendant.
6. If using the live mast as a boom, lower the base section onto blocking and connect the boom backstops to the
base section. Remove the auxiliary lifting sheave and install the 22 ft (6.7m) boom assembly pendant and as-
sembly/transporting/traveling link as shown in Inset A", Figure 4−20.
Figure 4−21
Raise Base Section & Maneuver Crane To Align Top Connecting Pin Hole.
7. With the travel swing lock engaged over the front of the crawler, maneuver the crane to align the top connecting
pin holes on the base section or the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section with the top connecting pin holes on the
preassembled extensions.
Figure 4−22
Drive Top Connecting Pins In Place On Each Side Of The Boom, While Standing Outside The Boom.
8. Drive the top connecting pins in place on each side of the boom, while standing outside the boom, and secure
them with lock pins.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 4−23
Raise Boom To Align Bottom Connecting Pin Holes While Keeping Boom Head On The Blocking.
9. Raise the boom just enough to align the bottom connecting pin holes. Do not allow the boom tip to leave the
blocking. Drive the bottom connecting pins in place, while standing outside the boom, and install the lock pins.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the cantilever limits as shown on the Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" chart found
later in this Section of this Operator’s Manual. Lifting spans of boom longer than the listed amount will
permanently damage the boom. Properly install the pendants before attempting to lift the boom.
Figure 4−24
Install The Boom Pendants.
10. Lower the boom to the blocking and allow the assembly pendant to go slack and disconnect the pendant. If the
live mast was used as a boom, store the assembly pendant and transporting/traveling link on the live mast.
11. Install main pendants. Refer to Figure 4−9 and Figure 4−10 for the proper pendant arrangement based on the
desired boom length. Connect pendants to the pendant links on the end of the live mast and the boom top section.
12. Install midpoint suspension pendants 130 ft. (39.62m) from boom foot on booms 250 ft. (76.20m) or longer. See
Midpoint Suspension Pendants" found in this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
13. Rig the boom head machinery and hook block.
14. Remove the by-pass connector located at the front of the upper and make the cable connections for the SML-10
system. Refer to Load Moment Limiter Wiring" found later in this Operator’s Manual.
15. Move the Rigging Mode switch to the OFF position and properly configure the SML-10 system. Refer to Section
1 of this Operator’s Manual.
16. Carefully raise the boom to a working radius (where a capacity is listed in the Crane Rating Manual). Refer to
Liftoff Capabilities" chart found later this section of this Operator’s Manual to determine proper crane setup
during boom erection.
17. Perform the angle/radius adjustment routine in the SML-10 system. Refer to Boom Angle/Radius Adjustment"
found in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual.
18. Perform the self-weight adjustment routine in the SML-10 system. Refer to Self-weight Adjustment" found in
Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual.
Note: The self-weight adjustment needs to be done only once for each boom length.
19. Check the backstop alignment and boom hoist limit switch operation. Refer to Boom Backstops Adjustment"
and Boom Hoist Limit Switch Adjustment" found later in this Section of the Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
BOOM BASE BOOM TOP JIB

SECTION SECTION (IF EQUIPPED)
2
10 T0 JUNCTION BOX (A)
6 8 9
7
11 10
TO JIB ATB
OR 5 FOOT
TIP ATB
5 9 T0 JUNCTION BOX (A)
3 10
4
1 11 10
UPPER MAIN BOOM 5 FOOT TIP EXTENSION
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. SML-10 Computer 6. Cable Reel (A) 10. Anti-Two Block Switch w/ 2 ft (0.6m)
2. Load Cell (Boom Hoist Dead End) 7. Cable Assy − Upper to Cable Reel Cable Assy
3. Cable Assy − Angle Sensor 8. Junction Box (A) 11. Cable Assy − Junction Box to ATB
4. Angle Sensor CR" 9. Cable Assy − Junction Box to ATB Switch
5. Cable Assy −Cable Reel Switch
Figure 4−25
Load Moment Limiter Wiring Diagram
Load Moment Limiter Wiring

The wiring for the SML-10 must be properly connected
in order for the system to function properly. Refer to
Figure 4−25. Test all functions of the system before
placing the crane in service.

Operator’s Manual
8 9
2
OR
B
87°
75°
3
7
4
B
5
−1°
6
1. Backstop Bumper Pin Holes 5. Base Section 8. Target

2. Backstop Bumper 6. Backstop Supports 9. Target Shims
3. Telescoping Link 7. Backstop Target Extension In The Stored
4. Telescoping Pin Holes Position − Used If Equipped With 10 Ft
(3.05m) Self Assembly Section
Figure 4−26
Folding Backstops
Boom Backstops Adjustment 3. Observe the relationship between the backstop

bumper and the target on the boom base section.
The backstops are designed to prevent the boom from 4. Lower the boom until backstops rest in the sup-
being raised beyond the maximum boom angle. In or- ports (approximately −1°).
der to do this they must be properly adjusted. The 5. Adjust the pins in the bumper, the telescoping link,
backstops must be adjusted every time the boom is and/or add or remove shims behind the target as
installed on the crane. Use the following procedure to required.
adjust the backstops. 6. Repeat Steps 2 thru 5 until backstop bumpers con-
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the tact the target at a 75° boom angle.
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler 7. Check that the boom hoist limit switch activates at
and apply the swing brake. 82° boom angle. Refer to Boom Hoist Limit
2. Raise the boom to a 75° angle.

Operator’s Manual
Switch Adjustment" found in this Section of the Op-
erator’s Manual.
CAUTION 2
Do not raise the boom too tightly against the 3

backstops. When setting down a heavy load 1 82°
at maximum boom angle, the recoil action of Boom
the boom could damage either the boom or Angle
the backstops.
8. When using the conventional boom, the backstop 4

target extension must be in the stored position.
The extension is used for the 10 ft (3.05m) exten-
sion with lifting sheave only.
Boom Hoist Limit Switch Adjustment

1. Boom Base Section 3. Actuator Arm
The boom hoist limit switch is designed to prevent the 2. Striker Plate 4. Boom Hoist Limit Switch
boom from being raised beyond the maximum boom
angle. In order to do this it must be properly adjusted. Figure 4−27
Boom Hoist Limit Switch
The boom hoist limit switch must be adjusted every
time the boom is installed on the crane. Use the follow-
ing procedure to adjust the boom hoist limit switch. 4. Lower boom to a position which allows room to ad-
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface and set the just the switch. Loosen setscrew in actuator arm.
boom onto secure blocking. Slowly raise the boom to 82° angle. Tighten the
2. Manually operate the limit switch by pushing the setscrew.
actuator arm. Pull the boom hoist lever. Boom 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until boom contacts the
should not raise. Allow switch to return to original backstops at approximately 72.7° and the boom
position and pull boom hoist lever again. Boom hoist limit switch activates at 82°.
should raise indicating limit switch is functioning
properly.
3. Slowly and carefully boom up until boom contacts CAUTION
the backstops (approximately 72.7°). Continue to Do not raise the boom too tightly against the
boom up until the boom reaches 82°. If limit switch backstops. The recoil action of the boom
does not actuate or actuates before boom reaches when setting down a heavy load at maximum
the 82_ boom angle, limit switch must be adjusted. boom angle could damage either the boom or
the backstops.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 4−28
Boom Pin Danger Label
Boom Self Disassembly

1. Read and fully understand all the safety instructions given earlier in this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
DANGER
To avoid serious injury, carefully read and understand the boom assembly safety instructions outlined
earlier in this section of this Operator’s Manual. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
severe personal injury or death.
2. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler and engage
the travel swing lock.
3. Move the Rigging Mode switch located on the left control console to the ON position.
Figure 4−29
Lower The Boom Onto Blocking.
4. Lower the boom onto secure blocking. Remove the hook block and secure the winch line at the drum. Discon-
nect the cable connections for the SML-10 system and install the by-pass connector. Refer to Rigging Mode"
found in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual.
5. Lower the live mast to remove and disconnect the boom pendants. Store each pendant on its corresponding
extension. Refer to Main Pendants And Links" found in this Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
A
7
6
1
2
5
4
3
1. Pin − Supplied With Pendant

2. Pin & Cotter Pin− From Live Mast
3. Boom Base Section Connecting Lug
4. Boom Base Section Lifting Lug
5. Assembly/Transporting/Traveling Link − Stored On Live Mast
6. Boom Assembly Pendant − 22 ft (6.7m)
7. 10’ (3.05m) Self Assembly Section/Mid-Point/Boom Assembly Pendant Link
Figure 4−30
Install The Boom Assembly Link And 22 Ft (6.7m) Pendant.
6. If using the live mast as a boom, install the boom assembly/transporting/traveling link and the 22 ft (6.7m) boom
assembly pendant as shown in inset A", Figure 4−30.
7. If using the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section, install the 8 ft (2.4m) pendant. Refer to Figure 4−5.
8. Raise the boom just enough to fully tension the boom hoist ropes, but leaving the boom head machinery on the
blocking. Remove both lock pins from each of the bottom connecting pins located at the pedant connection
only. Drive out these bottom connecting pins only, while standing outside the boom.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the cantilever limits as shown on the Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" chart found
later in this Section of this Operator’s Manual. Lifting spans of boom longer than the listed amount will
permanently damage the boom. Properly install the pendants before attempting to lift the boom.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 4−31
Lower The Boom Onto Blocking.
9. Lower the boom onto the blocking. Keep the boom hoist rope tight to support the boom and relieve the pressure
on the top connecting pins. Check that the boom is adequately supported. Drive out the top connecting pins,
located at the pendant connection only, while standing outside the boom.
Figure 4−32
Raise Base Section & Pull Away From The Boom.
10. Check that the boom is adequately supported. Carefully pull away from the boom and raise the boom base
section, or the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section.

Operator’s Manual
Figure 4−33
Lower The Base Section Onto Blocking.
11. Lower the boom base section or 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section onto sturdy blocking. If the live mast was
used, remove the 22 ft (6.7m) assembly pendant and store the pendant and assembly/transporting/traveling
link on the live mast.
Note: The assembly/transporting/traveling link can be used to carry the boom base section. Refer to
Traveling The Crane" found in Section 1 of this Operator’s Manual.
If equipped with the 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section, it can remain installed on the crane during trans-
port. Refer to 10 ft (3.05m) Self Assembly Section − Transporting" found in Section 1 of this Operator’s
Manual.
Figure 4−34
Removing The Boom Base Section Using The Live Mast As A Boom.
12. If required, rig the live mast to be used as a boom or use an auxiliary lifting device of sufficient size and remove
the boom base section. Refer to Using Live Mast As A Boom" and Boom Base Section Removal" found earlier
in this Section of this Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
Horizontal Boom Travel (Assembly Only) And Boom
Assembly Cantilever Limits Charts (Open Throat Boom Only)
If the boom must be traveled during boom assembly, use the Horizontal Boom Travel (Assembly Only)" in conjunc-
tion with the Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" chart. These charts are intended to assist the operator in safe
boom assembly and disassembly. Before traveling the crane during assembly/disassembly procedures, determine
how much boom the crane can safely travel with depending on how the crane is configured. First check the counter-
weight combination that corresponds with the current crane configuration. Then move down and across the Hori-
zontal Boom Travel (Assembly Only)" chart to the appropriate boom arrangement. Understanding how much hori-
zontal boom the crane can safely travel, refer to the Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" chart to determine where the
boom pendants are to be connected and how much boom can be cantilevered during assembly/disassembly pro-
cedures. The minimum of what is shown between the two charts is what boom the crane can safely travel.
Horizontal Boom Travel (Assembly Only)

Counterweight Top+Extensions+Base
Combination ft (m)
0+0 30 (9.15) + 80 (23.38) +20 (6.10) = 130 (39.62)
A+0 30 (9.15) + 130 (39.62) +20 (6.10) = 180 (54.86)
AB+0 30 (9.15) + 160 (48.77) +20 (6.10) = 210 (64.01)
ABC+0 30 (9.15) + 180 (54.86) +20 (6.10) = 230 (70.10)
ABC+A 30 (9.15) + 180 (54.86) +20 (6.10) = 230 (70.10)
ABCD+A 30 (9.15) + 180 (54.86) +20 (6.10) = 230 (70.10)
Notes:
1. Refer to Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits" Chart for the Proper Pendant Connection.
2. Upper Must be Over End of Crawler.
3. All Lengths Are Maximum.
Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits

WARNING Travel Only Limits
Do not cantilever or assemble.
Refer to Boom Assembly Link"
found in Section 1 of this Opera-
tor’s Manual for details on travel-
ing using the boom assembly link.
Maximum boom angle is 35_. Assembly Link

Operator’s Manual
Boom Assembly Cantilever Limits

Assembly Cantilever Limits
See Note 1
110’ (33.53m) Max
See Note 1
60’ Max
Or
See Note 2
110’ (33.53m) Max
See Note 2
60’ Max
Assemble Only Limits

See Note 1
220’ (70.10m) Max
Or
Blocking
See Note 2
230’ (70.10m) Max
WARNING
Do not allow boom top section to
leave blocking. Boom damage will
occur. Properly install pendants
before attempting to lift the boom.
Note 1: The 8 Ft (2.4m) self assembly pendant connected to the 10 Ft ((3.05m) self assembly section lifting
lug. Refer to 10 Ft (2.4m) Extension With Lifting Sheave" found in the Operator’s Manual for correct pen-
dant installation.
Note 2: 22’ (6.70m) boom assembly pendant +26.9" (68.3cm) assembly link connected to base section
lifting lug, or 10’, 20’, or 30’ (3.05, 6.10, or 9.15m) boom pendant +10" (55.9cm) adapter link + 22" (55.9cm)
mid-point link connected to base section connecting lug.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4
5
9
5
8
7
6
10
1. Head Sheave Rope Guards 6. Boom Top Section

2. Tip Extension 7. Mounting Bracket
3. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard 8. Tip Extension Head Sheave
4. Tip Extension Deflector Sheave 9. Anti-Two Block Switch
5. Mounting Shafts & Cotter Pins 10. Anti-Two Block Weight
Figure 4−35
5 Ft (1.5m) Tip Extension
The tip extension adds weight to the boom which must

5 Ft (1.5m) Tip Extension be considered in the lifting capacities. When making
An optional 5 ft (1.5m) 45° offset tip extension can be lifts from the main boom with the tip extension installed,
added to the boom top section for 1 or 2 part auxiliary refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the appropriate de-
hoist line use. The tip extension is secured to a bracket ductions from lifting capacities.
on the boom top section with shafts and cotter pins. The tip extension cannot be used on booms longer
Reeve the hoist line over the deflector sheave and head than 240 ft (73.15m).
sheave. All rope guards must be installed.
Before making any lifts with the tip extension, refer to
the Crane Rating Manual to make sure load is within WARNING
the rated capacity of the tip extension.
Do not simultaneously lift a load with the
boom tip extension and the main boom. Lift-
ing two loads at the same time may cause
boom failure.

Operator’s Manual
2 5
7
1
1. 92,000 lb (41 731kg) ABC Upper Counterweights 6. 14 Parts of 1" (25.4mm) Diameter Type N" 625 (619
2. Live Mast class) I.W.R.C. Load Hoist Line
3. 10’ (3.05m), 1" (25.4mm) Diameter Pendant (4) 7. 20’ (6.10m) Base Section
4. 5’ (1.52m) Hammerhead Tip Section 8. 48,000 (10 886kg) Side Frame Counterweights
5. 10’ (3.05m) Tapered Extension
Figure 4−36
Hammerhead Boom Nomenclature
6. 14 parts of 1" (25.4mm) diameter Type N" 625

Hammerhead Boom (619 class) I.W.R.C. load hoist line, reeved from
The hammerhead boom is available in a 35’ (10.67m) the front drum.
length only. It consists of a 20’ (6.10m) base section, a 7. Load hoist rope on first or second layer of front
10’ (3.05m) tapered extension, and a 5’ (1.52m) ham- drum.
merhead tip section. 8. Working area is over the end.
9. Crane in top condition and equipped as when it left
The maximum lifting capacity of the hammerhead
the factory.
boom is based on several factors:
1. Boom Length 35’ (10.67m).
2. 10’ (3.05m) minimum radius.
3. Crane on a firm level surface. WARNING
4. 92,000 lb (41 731kg) ABC upper counterweights. Do not exceed the rated capacities listed in the
5. 48,000 (21 773kg) Side Frame Counterweights. Crane Rating Manual. Refer to the Crane Rat-
ing Manual before lifting a load.

Operator’s Manual
Avoid injury to yourself. Jib can fall when pins are removed. Do not
remove pins until jib is supported properly by blocking or jib
suspension ropes are relocated as described in the Operator’s
Manual. In the absence of sufficient information in the manual,
consult your Link-Belt distributor.
Figure 4−37
Jib Pin Danger Label
Tubular Jib (Open Throat DANGER

Boom Only) To avoid serious injury, carefully read and un-
The tubular jib is assembled from multiple sections derstand all jib assembly, disassembly and
which are pinned together to obtain a variety of lengths safety instructions outlined in this Operator’s
ranging from 30 ft (9.15m) to 100 ft (30.5m). When in- Manual. Failure to follow these instructions
stalled on the boom, the tubular jib uses a mast, back- could result in severe personal injury or
stops, and a specific number of pendants to support it- death.
self and maintain the desired offset angle.
The available offset angles of 5°, 15° and 25° allow for Safety Instructions
more horizontal reach when the boom is at a steep an- The following points must be observed while
gle. Changing the jib length or offset angle will vary the performing any jib assembly or disassembly:
number of pendants used to support the jib. Refer to 1. Read and understand the instructions outlined in
Figure 4−38. this Operator’s Manual before attempting to as-
semble or disassemble the jib.
Tubular Jib Assembly And 2. Do not stand inside, on top, or under the jib at any-
Disassembly time while assembling or disassembling the jib.
3. To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, or
The following procedures outline the recommended
walk on the jib. Use a ladder or similar device to
steps necessary for safe jib installation. Depending
reach necessary areas.
upon job site conditions and the availability of auxiliary
4. Each individual jib section must be adequately
lifting equipment, these procedures can be modified
supported before attempting to disassemble the
using only known, proven, safe procedures to increase
jib. Removing the connecting pins from the jib be-
the efficiency of the jib installation.
fore it is supported, may allow the jib to fall.
Regardless of the specific method used for the installa- 5. Stay clear of pinch points when aligning jib section
tion of the jib, certain procedures must be followed to connecting points. Never place your fingers in
prevent reckless or inadvertent dropping of the jib or jib connecting pin holes.
mast. Improper assembly or disassembly of the jib can 6. Fully assemble the jib before installing it on the
lead to severe personal injury or death. Unrepairable boom. Do not attempt to add or remove jib exten-
damage to jib could occur also. Any questions regard- sions with the jib installed on the boom. Properly
ing safe jib assembly or disassembly procedures can remove the jib from the boom before modifying the
be directed to your distributor or the factory. jib length.
7. Use caution when disconnecting the dead end of
wire ropes. Reeved rope can become twisted on
the sheaves. When the dead end pin or socket is
removed, the rope may spin.
8. The jib cannot be used on open throat boom
lengths longer than 240 ft (73.15m).
9. Before making any lifts with the jib, refer to Jib Ca-
pacities" in the Crane Rating Manual to make sure
load is within the rated capacity of the jib.

Operator’s Manual
2
1
7
3
4
5
14
10 8
13
9
11
12
1. Jib Head Machinery 5. Mast Rest 9. Guide Sheaves 12. Boom Top Section
2. Frontstay Pendant 6. Mast 10. Front Backstop 13. Jib Base Section
3. Jib Skywalk (If Equipped) 7. Equalizer Sheaves 11. Rear Backstop 14. Jib Top Section
4. Deflector Roller 8. Backstay Pendant
Note: All jib pendants are 0.88 in (22mm) in diameter. Basic Backstay
Backstay Pendant
Jib Pendants Extensions
Pairs Of Offset Required Required
Jib Basic
Frontstay Angle
Jib Extensions Frontstay 66 ft−5 in 5 ft− 5 in
Pendant (20.24m) (1.65m)
Length Required Pendants
Extensions
Required
Required 5_ 1 0
ft m 10 ft 20 ft 71 ft−6 in 9 ft−6 in 19 ft 15 _ 1 1
(3.05m) (6.10m) (21.8m) (2.90m) (5.79m)
30 9.15 0 0 1 0 0 25 _ 1 2
40 12.20 1 0 1 1 0 Weight
Jib
50 15.25 0 1 1 0 1 Section
lb kg
60 18.30 1 1 1 1 1 Base (With Mast) 900 408
70 21.34 0 2 1 0 2
Tip 595 270
80 24.38 1 2 1 1 2
Extension 178 81
90 27.43 0 3 1 0 3 10 ft (3.05m)
Extension
100 30.48 1 3 1 1 3 20 ft (6.10m) 336 152
Figure 4−38
Tubular Jib Assembly

Operator’s Manual
Right
2
1
Wrong
3
1. Jib Foot
2. Boom Head Machinery
3. Connecting Lug
Figure 4−39
Assemble the jib so the lattice form a Figure 4−41
continuous zig zag pattern. Jib Foot To Boom Head Connection
Jib Assembly And Installation

1. Read and fully understand all the safety instruc-
tions given in this Operator’s Manual.
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler
and apply the travel swing lock.
3. Position blocking, layout, and assemble the jib
sections. When assembling jib sections, make
4 sure the lattice form a continuous zig zag pattern
2 from one section to another. Improper assembly
will cause unequal loads to be carried through the
jib, weakening the structure. Refer to Figure 4−39
1 and Figure 4−40.
4. Install the skywalk 16 ft (4.8m) from the jib foot.
5. Maneuver the crane to align the connecting lug on
3 the boom top section with the jib foot mounting
holes or use an auxiliary lifting device to lift the jib
into place.
3
6. Install the jib mounting pins and keepers to secure
the jib foot to the boom head connecting lugs. Re-
fer to Figure 4−41.
1. Jib 3. Blocking 7. Determine the number of frontstay and backstay
2. Auxiliary Lifting Device 4. Boom Head Machinery extensions that are required to support the jib and
obtain the desired offset angle. Refer to the tables
Figure 4−40 in Figure 4−38.
Properly support both ends of each jib section 8. Connect the frontstay and backstay extension
and boom head during assembly. pendants to the basic frontstay and backstay pen-
dants, as required.

Operator’s Manual
4
3
1 2 3 3 4 5
2 5
1 1
1. Backstops (Disconnected) 4. Auxiliary Lifting Device 1. Frontstay Pendant 4. Rear Equalizer Sheave
2. Frontstays (Connected) 5. Backstays 2. Front Equalizer Sheave 5. Backstay Pendant
3. Jib Mast 6. Boom Top Section 3. Cotter Pins

Raising/Lowering The Jib Mast Jib Equalizer Sheaves
9. Remove the equalizer sheaves by removing the

cotter pins. Reeve the the frontstay and backstay 5
pendants on the equalizer sheaves. Properly 4
install the equalizer sheaves and secure with the
6
cotter pins. Refer to Figure 4−43.
Note: The basic frontstay and backstay pen- 3 4

dants must always be reeved through the equal-
7
izer sheaves.
2 2
10. Connect the basic frontstay pendant or frontstay
extension pendants to the jib head machinery and 8
lay the loose ends of the backstay pendant next to
the jib.
11. Using an appropriate lifting device, raise the jib
mast into working position. Refer to Figure 4−42.
12. Install the backstay links to the boom top section
and pin the backstay pendants to the links. Pin the 1
front backstops in place. Refer to Figure 4−44 and 1. Jib Base Section 5. Jib Mast
2. Pin & Cotter Pin 6. Guide Sheave
Figure 4−45.
3. Front Backstop 7. Rear Backstop
Note: When pinning the front backstop to the jib 4. Cotter Pin 8. Boom Head
base section, use the lug nearest to the jib foot.
Figure 4−44
Jib Backstop Installation
WARNING 14. Carefully boom up until both the frontstay and
Until both the frontstay and backstay are tight,
the jib mast can fall forward or backward. Use backstay pendants are tight. Refer to Liftoff Capa-
auxiliary lifting device to stabilize the jib mast. bilities" charts at the end of this Section of the Op-
erator’s Manual to determine proper counter-
13. Reeve the winch rope over the guide sheave on the weights during boom and jib erection.
jib mast and the jib head sheave. Refer to 15. Pin the rear backstops in place. Refer to
Figure 4−44. Figure 4−44.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 5 3 6 upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler
and apply the travel swing lock.
3. Boom down so the winch rope can be removed
from the jib head sheave. Leave the winch rope
reeved through the guide sheave, but lay it aside
where it will not be damaged.
4. Boom down until the jib head sheave is on the
ground and the backstay pendant is slack. Use
care not to bottom out both the front and rear back-
stops.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear backstops to bottom out
when booming down. Damage to the
1. Backstay Pendant 4. Boom Top Section backstops and/or jib base section may result.
2. Pin & Cotter Pin 5. Backstay Link Boom down just far enough to disconnect the
3. Capscrew, Spacer & Locknut 6. Pin & Cotter Pins
backstay pendant.
Figure 4−45
Backstay Pendant Installation 5. Disconnect the backstay pendant from the back-
stay link on the boom top section and add or re-
16. Check the winch line reeving and anti-two block move backstay pendant extensions to obtain the
operation. desired offset angle. Refer to Figure 4−45.
Note: It may be necessary to attach the winch

rope to the mast and winch up to relieve any ten-
WARNING sion on the backstay pendant caused by the
The jib adds weight to the boom which must weight of the mast. Do not disconnect the
be considered in the lifting capacities. When frontstay pendant.
making lifts from the main boom, refer to
Capacity Deductions For Lifting Off Main 6. Properly connect the backstay pendant to the
Boom Hook With Jib Installed" in the Crane backstay link on the boom top section and reeve
Rating Manual for the appropriate deductions the winch rope over the jib head sheave.
from lifting capacities. 7. Carefully boom up until both the frontstay and
backstay pendants are tight. Refer to Liftoff Capa-
bilities" charts at the end of this Section to deter-
To Change The Jib Offset Angle mine proper counterweights during boom and jib
1. Read and fully understand all the safety instruc- erection.
tions given in this Operator’s Manual.

Operator’s Manual
To Change The Jib Length
The jib must be removed from the crane before adding
CAUTION
or removing jib sections. Remove the jib and place Do not allow the rear backstops to bottom out
adequate blocking under each end of each section be- when booming down. Damage to the
fore removing any connecting pin. Add or remove jib backstops and/or jib base section may result.
sections as required to achieve the desired jib length. Boom down just far enough to relieve tension
Refer to the instructions in this Section of the Opera- on the backstay pendant.
tor’s Manual for proper removal and installation proce-
dures. 5. Using an appropriate lifting device, support the jib
mast in the working position so the rear backstops
Note: Regardless of the jib length, the skywalk must can be disconnected safely. Refer to Figure 4−42.
be installed 16 ft (4.8m) from the jib foot. 6. Disconnect the rear backstop.
7. Position blocking under each end of every jib sec-
tion and the boom head machinery.
WARNING 8. Keeping the jib mast supported with the auxiliary
lifting device, carefully boom down onto the block-
Properly remove the jib from the crane before
ing.
attempting to modify the length. Do not place
9. Remove the winch rope from the guide sheave on
any part of your body under the jib when it is
the jib mast. Properly secure the winch rope.
being assembled or disassembled. Remov-
ing any connecting pins from the jib before it is
properly supported may allow the jib to jack-
knife and injure someone. Adequately sup- WARNING
port each end of each section before attempt- While either the frontstay or backstay are
ing to lengthen or shorten the jib. slack, the jib mast can fall. Use the auxiliary
lifting device to stabilize the jib mast.
Jib Removal And Disassembly 10. Disconnect the front backstops and the front and
1. Read and fully understand all the safety instruc- rear backstay pendants.
tions given in this Operator’s Manual. 11. Use the auxiliary lifting device to fold the jib mast
2. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the forward and lower it onto the mast rest on the jib
upper directly over the front or rear of the crawler base section.
and apply the travel swing lock. 12. Secure the front and rear backstays to the mast.
3. Boom down so the winch rope can be removed 13. Secure the mast to the mast rest for transportation
from the jib head sheave and the anti-two block or unpin the jib mast from the jib foot and remove
system can be disconnected. Leave the winch the mast.
rope reeved through the mast guide sheave, but 14. Check that the jib and boom head machinery are
lay it aside where it will not be damaged. adequately supported. Remove the pins and
4. Boom down until the jib head sheave is on the keeper pins which mount the jib to the boom top
ground and the backstay pendant is slack. Use section. Refer to Figure 4−41.
care not to bottom out both the front and rear back- 15. Using the auxiliary lifting device, lift the jib and dis-
stops. connect the jib foot from the boom top section.
16. Before attempting to disassemble the jib sections
be sure that both ends of each section are ade-
quately supported. Disassemble the jib sections
as required.

Operator’s Manual
Liftoff Capabilities
Maximum Boom Maximum Boom + Jib
Counterweight
Feet Meters Feet Meters
0+0 150 45.72 N/A N/A
A+0 210 64.01 N/A N/A
AB+0 240 73.15 N/A N/A
ABC+0 260 79.25 220+100 67.06 + 30.48
ABC+A 280 85.34 240+100 73.15 + 30.48
ABCD+A 280 85.34 240+100 73.15 + 30.48
Minimum Boom Minimum Boom + Jib

Counterweight
Feet Meters Feet Meters
0+0 50 15.24 50 + 30 15.24 + 9.14
A+0 50 15.24 50 + 30 15.24 + 9.14
AB+0 50 15.24 50 + 30 15.24 + 9.14
ABC+0 120 36.58 100 + 30 30.48 + 9.14
ABC+A 50 15.24 50 + 30 15.24 + 9.14
ABCD+A 90 27.34 80 + 30 24.38 + 9.14
Notes: 1. For maximum stability, booms must be erected or lowered over the end with no load and
adequate blocking placed under the tread sprockets/idlers to prevent rocking.
2. Crane on firm and level surface.
WARNING
ABCD+0" counterweight is prohibited. Crane will tip over backwards. Install A" auxiliary lower
counterweights prior to ABCD" upper counterweights. Remove ABCD" upper counterweights prior to
removing A" auxiliary counterweights. Failure to do so will result in a backward tipping condition.

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Rating Manual & Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
Wire Rope Capacity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
Wire Rope Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
Wire Rope Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−1
Wire Rope Inspection And Replacement Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−3

Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
Wire Rope Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−4
Wire Rope Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
Uncoiling/Unreeling Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−5
Winding Rope On Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−6
Causes Of Irregularly Wound Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−6
Wire Rope Reeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−6
SocketsAnd Wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−7
Socket & Wedge Assembly − Without Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−8
Socket & Wedge Assembly − With Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−10
Wire Rope Sockets With Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
Wire Rope Clip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−12
Wire Rope Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−13
Cutting Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14
Rotation Resistant Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14

Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14
Non-Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14
Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14
Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−14
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−15
Boom Hoist Reeving Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−16
Crane Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−17

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−17
Base Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−19
Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−19
Upper Counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−20
Section 5 − General Information i

Operator’s Manual
Lower Counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−20
Upper Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Load Hoist Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Optional Front−Mounted Third Hoist Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−21
Boom Hoist Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Swing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Operator’s Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Rated Capacity Limiter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Boom Hoist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Machinery Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Catwalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−22
Lower Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−23
Carbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−23
Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−23
Travel and Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−23
Jack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−23
Attachment and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−24
Conventional Tubular Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−24
Main Boom Make-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−24
Tubular Jib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−25
Auxiliary Tip Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−25
Luffing Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−25
Luffing Jib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−25
Fixed Jib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−25
Working Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−27
Transport Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−27
Transport Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−28
Load Hoist Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5−31
ii Section 5 − General Information

Operator’s Manual
of line to make the lift. When making a lift with more
Crane Rating Manual & parts of line that is needed to make the lift, remember to
Serial Number add 1.76 lb (.80kg) for each one (1) foot (.3 m) of extra
rope required to reeve the extra parts of line, to the ac-
The Crane Rating Manual is located in the lower right tual load weight. The extra parts of line act as addi-
interior of the operator’s cab. This manual has the tional load weight.
crane serial number on it. The serial number is also
stamped on the right side of the upper frame just below
the boom hoist cylinder lug. The serial number must be
used with any correspondence with the factory con-
WARNING
Do not exceed the capacities listed for wire
cerning parts or warranty. This manual also lists the
rope capacity or crane capacity, whichever is
maximum allowable lifting capacities for the crane. The
less, when making a lift. Serious personal in-
manual should be checked for the proper lifting capaci-
jury or crane damage may result.
ties before making any lifts.
If the Crane Rating Manual becomes lost, damaged
or unreadable, it must be replaced before operating
the crane. Information contained in the Crane Rating
Wire Rope Specifications
Manual is important and failure to follow the information The specifications for the wire rope used on this crane
it contains could result in an accident. A replacement are on the Wire Rope Capacity chart located in the
manual can be ordered through your distributor. Crane Rating Manual. Refer to Figure 5−1 for a typical
example. Always refer to the Wire Rope Capacity chart
in the Crane Rating Manual when ordering replace-
CAUTION ment wire rope.
The Crane Rating Manual in the crane is the
only authorized listing of lifting capacities for Wire Rope Diameter
the crane. It supercedes any other printed
literature which lists lifting capacities. It alone In standard practice, the nominal diameter of wire rope
is to be used for determining crane capacities. is the minimum acceptable diameter. It is always made
larger, not smaller, than the nominal diameter accord-
ing to the allowable tolerances shown in the following
chart:
Wire Rope Capacity Chart
The Wire Rope Capacity chart gives the maximum lift- Allowable
Nominal Rope Diameter
ing capacities based on wire rope strength. Refer to Limits
Figure 5−1 for a typical example. It is located in the Thru 1/8" (3.2mm) −0 +8%
Crane Rating Manual. It lists the maximum load that
Over 1/8" (3.2mm) thru 3/16" (4.8mm) −0 +7%
should be lifted with different sizes and types of wire
rope. The weights shown are based on wire rope Over 3/16" (4.8mm) thru 5/16" (8.0mm) −0 +6%
strength alone. Exceeding these load weights may re- Over 5/16" (8.0mm) and larger −0 +5%
sult in rope damage or failure.
Before making a lift, compare the weight being lifted Wear and stress tend to reduce the diameter. It should
(remember to add the weight of the hook block, slings be measured periodically and replaced if the size is be-
and riggings to the actual load weight) with the Wire low the nominal size of the wire rope being used as
Rope Capacity chart located in the Crane Rating Manu- shown in the chart on page 5−4. It should always be
al. Check the chart for the number of parts of line re- measured across the largest diameter that will fit inside
quired to make the lift. Use at least that number of parts a true circle. Refer to Figure 5−2.
Section 5 − General Information 5−1

Operator’s Manual
Wire Rope Capacity
Parts 1”
of Notes
Line Type N Type CC Type DB Type LB Type RB
1 29,500 30,700 29,500 32,500 22,760 Capacities shown are in

pounds and working loads
2 59,000 61,400 59,000 65,000 45,520 must not exceed the
3 88,500 92,100 88,500 97,500 68,280 ratings on the capacity
charts in this Crane Rating
4 118,000 122,800 118,000 130,000 91,040 Manual.
5 147,500 153,500 147,500 162,500 113,800 Study Operator’s Manual
for wire rope inspection
6 177,000 184,200 177,000 195,000 136,560 procedures and single part
of line operation.
7 206,500 214,900 206,500 227,500 159,320
8 236,000 245,600 236,000 260,000 182,080
9 265,500 276,300 265,500 292,500 204,840
10 295,000 307,000 295,000 325,000 227,600
11 324,500 337,700 324,500 357,500 250,360
12 354,000 368,400 354,000 390,000 273,120
13 383,500 399,100 383,500 422,500 295,880
LBCE
Description
Type
6 X 25 (6 X 19 Class) − Filler Wire − Extra Improved Plow Steel − Preformed −
N I.W.R.C. − Right Lay − Regular Lay − SF = 3.5:1
(36 X 7 Class) − Non Rotating − Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel − Right Lay − Regular Lay
CC − Compacted Strands
6 X 26 (6 X 19 Class) − Warrington Seale − Extra Improved Plow Steel − Preformed − Right Lay −
DB Regular Lay − I.W.R.C.
6 X 25 (6 X 19 Class) − Filler Wire − Preformed − I.W.R.C. − Right Lay − Regular Lay −
LB Compacted Strands
19 X 19 Rotation Resistant − Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel − Preformed Right
RB
Lay − Regular Lay. Swaged − SF = 5:1
Note: The Wire Rope Capacity chart depicted above is shown as an example only. Use the Wire Rope Ca-
pacity chart located in the Crane Rating Manual to determine the correct parts of line required for the
given wire rope type and diameter.
Figure 5−1
Typical Wire Rope Capacity Chart
Right
Wrong
Figure 5−2
Measuring Wire Rope Diameter
5−2 Section 5 − General Information

Operator’s Manual
Figure 5−3
Typical Wire Rope Inspection Report
According to ASME standards, all wire ropes in active

Wire Rope Inspection And service MUST BE visually inspected daily. A qualified,
Replacement trained person should be appointed to conduct the in-
spection. Also on a monthly basis, that person is re-
Recommendations quired to inspect all wire ropes and keep a dated, written
record noting any damage and recording when ropes
There are many reasons for rope deterioration, such as are replaced.
abrasion, corrosion, fatigue, crushing, kinking, and
forces causing damage or abuse to the rope during These inspections should be done to determine the de-
normal usage. gree of deterioration of the rope at any given section
(refer to Wire Rope Replacement). This will determine
When wire rope is replaced, use the type specified on the suitability of the rope for continued service. A sam-
the Wire Rope Capacity chart located in the Crane Rat- ple inspection report is shown in Figure 5−3. (It can be
ing Manual. Cranes are designed to use a specific type reproduced and used if desired.)
and size of rope. Using ropes other than those recom-
mended, may result in short life or even breakage of the
rope.

Operator’s Manual
Wire Rope Inspection Wire Rope Replacement
Any of the following are reasons to question rope Any of the following are reasons for rope replacement:
safety: 1. In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken
1. More than one broken wire in any one strand wires in one rope lay, or three broken wires in one
should be cause for caution. Breaks that occur on strand in one rope lay.
the worn crowns of the outside wires usually indi-
For rotation resistant ropes, two randomly distrib-
cate normal deterioration. Breaks that occur in the
uted broken wires in six rope diameters, or four
valleys between strands can indicate an abnormal
randomly distributed broken wires in thirty rope di-
condition, possibly fatigue and breakage of other
ameters.
wires that are not readily visible. One or more val-
2. In pendants or standing ropes, evidence of more
ley breaks should be cause for replacement.
than two broken wires in one lay in sections be-
2. Wire breaks generally occur in those portions of
yond end connections or more than one broken
wire rope which pass over sheaves, wind onto
wire in one rope lay at end connection.
drums, or receive mechanical abuse. Breaks that
3. One outer wire broken at the contact point with the
occur near end attachments are apt to result from
core of the rope which has worked its way out of
fatiguing stresses concentrated in these localized
the rope structure and protrudes or loops out from
sections. Breaks of the latter type should be cause
the rope structure.
for replacement of the rope or renewal of the at-
4. Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of
tachment to eliminate the locally fatigued area.
more than 1/3 the original diameter of individual
When running ropes over nylon sheaves, inspect
wires.
the wire rope where it travels over the point
5. Evidence of rope deterioration from corrosion.
sheaves. Inspect for a loss of diameter and then
6. Kinking, crushing, bird caging", or other damage
bend the rope to inspect the internal wires for
resulting in distortion of the rope structure.
breaks and wear.
7. Evidence of any heat damage.
3. Heavy wear or broken wires may occur in sections
8. Marked reduction in diameter indicates deteriora-
under equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where
tion of the core resulting in lack of proper support
rope travel is limited or in contact with saddles.
for the load carrying strands. Excessive rope
Particular care should be taken to inspect rope at
stretch or elongation may also be an indication of
these points. If wire rope wear is detected at these
internal deterioration. Reduction from nominal di-
locations, the wear points can be shifted by remov-
ameter of more than:
ing a 20 ft (6.1m) section off the drum end. This
may assist in extending the wire rope life. Reduction of Nominal Rope Diameters
4. Rope stretch is generally greatest during initial
1/64" (.4mm) up to and including 5/16" (8mm)
stages of operation when the strands are becom-
ing adjusted and seated. This is accompanied by 1/32" (.8mm) over 5/16" (8mm) to 1/2" (13mm)
some reduction in rope diameter. 3/64" (1.2mm) over 1/2" (13mm) to 3/4" (19mm)
5. Time for rope replacement is indicated by the ex- 1/16" (1.6mm) over 3/4" (19mm) to 1-1/8" (29mm)
tent of abrasion, scrubbing, and peening on the
outside wires, broken wires, evidence of pitting, or 3/32" (2.4mm) over 1-1/8" (29mm)
severe corrosion, kink damage, or other mechani- 9. Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires
cal abuse resulting in distortion of the rope struc- in the area of connections.
ture.
6. Sheaves, guards, guides, drums, flanges, and Note: When replacing wire rope, the sheaves
other surfaces contacted by wire rope during op- and grooves in drums should be checked for
eration should be examined at the time of inspec- wear or damage and replaced if necessary.
tions. Any condition harmful to the rope in use at Damaged, worn, or undersized sheaves will
the time should be corrected. This will assist in ex- damage the rope. On older equipment, remem-
tending rope life. The same equipment, particu- ber that new rope is usually bigger in diameter
larly sheave and drum grooves, should be in- than the worn rope it replaces. The sheave
spected and placed in proper condition before a grooves may be worn to the smaller diameter of
rope is installed. the old rope.
A new rope should be broken in by running it
slowly through its working cycle for a short pe-
riod under a light load. Refer to Wire Rope
Break-In" found later in this section.

Operator’s Manual
Right 3
2
1
1. Winch Drum
2. Wire Rope 4
3. Wedge
Figure 5−4 4. Clips (Type CC Only) (Remove after installation)
Uncoil/Unreel Wire Rope
Figure 5−5
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum
Wire Rope Installation
When installing wire rope, the primary concern is get- Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum
ting the rope onto the drum without trapping any twist
that may have been induced during handling. Use the
following procedure to install the rope on the crane. WARNING
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope
Uncoiling/Unreeling Wire Rope socket or drum. The use of an incorrect size
wedge in a drum is dangerous as it may not
1. To avoid twists, unreel the entire rope on the
ground in line with the boom head sheave and hold. The size on the drum and wedge must
drum. Set the reel up horizontally so it can rotate as correspond with the size of rope being used.
the rope is reeled off. Refer to Figure 5−4. Reel the
rope off slowly, so the reel won’t tend to throw" the
rope off. If the new rope cannot be laid out on the CAUTION
ground, further steps are necessary:
The ends of type CC rope must be fuse
a. Mount the reel on a shaft through flange holes
welded. Failure to do so may cause the core
and on jack stands, making sure the reel is set
to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing
to be unreeled over the top. Do not allow the
reel to free-wheel". Brake the reel by applying major rope damage.
pressure to a flange. Do not apply braking
pressure to the rope on the reel or pass rope If crane is equipped with type CC wire rope, attach two
between blocks of wood or other material. clips (hose clamps are an effective and efficient alterna-
2. Reeve the rope over the boom head sheave and tive if traditional clips are not available) about 24 inches
anchor it to the drum. (609.6mm) from the end with a 3 inch (76.2mm) space
between them. Refer to Figure 5−5. The seizings will
Note: When replacing wire rope, the sheaves prevent any looseness of the outer strands from travel-
and grooves in drums should be checked for ing up the rope during installation. Insert the free end
wear or damage and replaced if necessary. of the rope into the small opening of the anchor pocket.
Damaged, worn, or undersized sheaves will Loop the rope and push the free end about 3/4 of the
damage the rope. Remember that new rope is way back through the pocket. Install the wedge, then
usually larger in diameter than the worn rope it pull the slack out of the rope. If using type CC rope, re-
replaces. The sheave grooves may be worn to move the seizings after the rope is secured in the drum.
the smaller diameter of the old rope. Keep tension on the rope to prevent the rope from be-
A new rope should be broken in by running it coming slack and forming loops or kinks and also to al-
slowly through its working cycle for a short pe- low uniform winding on the drum. It is important that
riod under a light load. Refer to Wire Rope original rope lay is maintained at all times.
Break-In" found later in this Section. Use the correct size wedge for the drum and wire
rope being used. Refer to Figure 5−11 for correct
identification.

Operator’s Manual
4. If the crane is provided with a guide sheave on the
Right front of a drum, smooth movement of the guide
Wrong
sheave is essential to prevent irregular winding of
the rope. Check the guide sheave for smooth rota-
tion and lubrication.
Wire Rope Reeving
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand
or walk on the boom or jib. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas when
reeving the crane.
Only if certain criteria are met may a swivel
hook ball be used with rotation resistant rope.
Refer to Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Re-
sistant Rope" found in this Operator’s Manual.
Use a minimum of 4 parts of hoist line and
Figure 5−6 3,500 lb (1 588kg) hook block on all booms
Hook Block Reeving 50−100 ft (15.24−30.5m). Live mast can over-
haul boom at short radii. Crane damage and/
or serious personal injury could occur.
Winding Rope On Drum
Proper winding of the first layer of rope on a multiple The crane can use from one to twelve parts of line (four-
wrap drum is important. If the first layer is properly teen for the hammerhead boom) when reeving the
wound, succeeding layers will be easier to control. main winch, depending on the lift being made. When
This is especially important on ungrooved drums. reeving the main winch, odd parts of line dead end at
When starting new wire rope on such drums, drive the hook block and even parts dead end at the boom
each wrap of the first layer lightly with a wooden mal- peak. Even parts of line will resist block rotation better
let so each wrap barely contacts the preceding one. than odd parts of line. It may be advantageous to use
Keep tension on the rope to prevent the rope from even parts of line. The jib may be reeved with two parts
becoming slack and forming loops or kinks and also of line for better line control, but can lift no more than
to allow uniform winding on the drum. It is important with a single part of line due to structural capacities of
that original rope lay is maintained at all times. the jib. Figure 5−18 and Figure 5−19 illustrates the
It’s important to apply a tensioning load while spooling proper reeving for various parts of line. The reeving
the rope on the drum. (If not, the lower layers may be patterns shown must be used at all times. To deter-
loose enough that the upper layers become wedged mine how many parts of line to use for a particular lift,
into the lower layers under load, which can seriously check the Wire Rope Capacity chart located in the
damage the rope.) The tensioning load should range Crane Rating Manual. Figure 5−20 gives the proper
from 1 to 2% of the rope’s nominal strength. reeving for the boom hoist rope.
Causes Of Irregularly Wound Rope Note: Rope guards must always be used during op-
1. Irregular winding of the first layer of rope on the erations. They must be pinned in place to prevent
drum. Never leave any gap between the ropes. wire rope from jumping off the sheaves. Deflector
2. Incorrect approach. A transition from one layer to rollers must also be used to prevent frictional dam-
the next must be made after the layer comes into age to boom sections.
contact with the drum flange.
3. Rope should be wound on a drum with sufficient Hook blocks should be reeved correctly so they hang
tension. Lifting a heavy load with a loosely wound straight and do not cause undue wear on the rope and
rope will cause irregular winding of the rope on the sheaves. Refer to Figure 5−6.
drum or breaking of rope wires.

Operator’s Manual
Socket And Wedge Socket And Wedge

Without Terminator" Wedge With Terminator" Wedge
Refer to page 5−8 Refer to page 5−10
Figure 5−7
Sockets And Wedges
SocketsAnd Wedges
This crane may be equipped with two styles of sockets
and wedges. One style socket uses a terminator"
wedge and the other does not. The wedges for each
style are installed differently. Refer to Figure 5−7 to de-
termine which style your crane has and where to find
the appropriate information for use and installation.
Type CC Type LB Type RB

WARNING
Do not interchange sockets and wedges.
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are Figure 5−8
not properly matched. Use a terminator" Wire Rope Identification
wedge with a utility socket for a terminator"
wedge and a non-terminator" wedge with a
non-terminator" ready socket.

Operator’s Manual
Right
Wrong
Right
Wrong
1
4
2
5
6
3
1. Clips (Type CC Only) (Remove after installation)

2. Wire Rope Live End
3. Socket
4. Dead End Seizing
5. Tail Length − 20 Rope Diameters Minimum for Rotation
Resistant Ropes, 6 Rope Diameters Minimum for 6 to 8
Strand Rope Figure 5−10
6. Wedge Socket & Wedge Installation
Figure 5−9
Socket & Wedge Connections
The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a
wedge and socket to wire rope are shown in
Socket & Wedge Assembly − Figure 5−9. The dead end of the wire rope must al-
Without Extended Wedge ways be on the sloped portion of the socket. The load
line must be in a straight line pull with the eye of the
socket. If the rope is installed wrong as shown in
Figure 5−9, a permanent set will develop at the point
WARNING where the rope enters the socket. This permanent set
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope will weaken the rope and accelerate wear at this point.
socket or drum. The use of an incorrect size, Wedges and sockets shipped from the factory are
type, or brand of wedge in a socket or drum is stamped with size and type or pair identification. Refer
dangerous as it may not hold. Wedges and to Figure 5−11. A drum, socket, or wedge may be
sockets shipped from the factory are stamped stamped for two or more sizes of rope. The size on the
with size and type identification. A drum or drum, socket, and wedge must correspond with the
socket may be stamped for two or more sizes size of rope being used. The part number may also be
of rope and a wedge for one or two. The size stamped on the socket and wedge. Consult the Parts
on the drum, socket, and wedge must Manual for confirmation. If there is any doubt as to the
correspond with the size of rope being used. mating of the socket and wedge, consult your distribu-
tor.
Note: The sockets and wedges in the boom hoist

WARNING system are metric sizes. Make sure English and
metric sizes are not mixed.
Do not interchange sockets and wedges.
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are Before installing type CC wire rope into a socket or
not properly matched. Use a terminator" wedge, attach two clips (hose clamps are an effective
wedge with a utility socket for a terminator" and efficient alternative if traditional clips are not avail-
wedge and a non-terminator" wedge with a able) approximately 3−4 feet (0.9−1.2m) from the end
non-terminator" ready socket. with a 3 inch (76.2mm) space between them. Refer to
Figure 5−9. The dead end must also be seized and a
minimum tail length of 20 rope diameters (15 inches for
3/4 inch rope) is required. The clips will help prevent

Operator’s Manual
GO
LIVE
NO GO
LINE
CLIP
BASE x
x
x
1 Extended Wedge
Front & Rear
1
2
1
Boom Hoist
5 4
Non-Extended Wedge
DRUM WEDGES WINCH ROPE BOOM HOIST DEAD END

METRIC SOCKET & WEDGE SOCKET & WEDGE
ENGLISH METRIC
1. Rope Size (mm) 3. Rope Sizes (mm) 5. Pairing Designator
2. Angle of Wedge 4. Rope Sizes (fractional inches)
Figure 5−11
Examples Of Typical Socket & Wedge Identifiers
core slippage and any looseness of the outer strands When anchoring the socket to the boom head, make
from traveling up the rope during installation while still sure the flat face is facing out as shown in Figure 5−10.
allowing the rope strands to be free to adjust. If using If socket is not installed correctly, structural damage to
type CC rope, remove clips from the live end after rope the boom head may occur.
is securely installed into the socket. It is recommended that annually, the socket and
Note: Refer to Figure 5−8 to identify which type of wedge connection be removed, that portion of wire
rope is installed on the crane. rope be removed, and a new connection be installed.
CAUTION WARNING
The ends of type CC rope must be fuse welded Wire rope can spin uncontrollably when
and the tail length of the dead end must be a removing wire rope dead end pins. Serious
minimum of 20 rope diameters (15 inches for personal injury can result if rope spin is not
3/4 inch rope). Failure to do the above may properly controlled. Take the appropriate
cause the core to slip and/or the strands to safety precautions to control the rope and
loosen causing major rope damage. wear the appropriate safety equipment before
removing wire rope dead end pins.

Operator’s Manual
1
4
5
2
3
No-Go"
6
Go"
1. Clips (Type CC Only) (Remove after installation) 5. Tail Length − 20 Rope Diameters Minimum for Rotation Re-
2. Wire Rope Live End sistant Ropes, 6 Rope Diameters Minimum for 6 to 8 Strand
3. Socket Rope
4. Dead End Seizing 6. Wedge
Figure 5−12
Socket & Wedge Assembly
Socket & Wedge Assembly − With The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a
wedge and socket to wire rope are shown in
Extended Wedge Figure 5−12 and Figure 5−13. The dead end of the
wire rope must always be on the sloped portion of the
socket. The load line must be in a straight line pull with
WARNING the eye of the socket. If the rope is installed wrong as
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope shown in Figure 5−13, a permanent set will develop at
socket or drum. The use of an incorrect size, the point where the rope enters the socket. This per-
type, or brand of wedge in a socket or drum is manent set will weaken the rope and accelerate wear at
dangerous as it may not hold. Wedges and this point.
sockets shipped from the factory are stamped Wedges and sockets shipped from the factory are
with size and type identification. A drum or stamped with size and type or pair identification. Refer
socket may be stamped for two or more sizes to Figure 5−11. A drum, socket, or wedge may be
of rope and a wedge for one or two. The size stamped for two or more sizes of rope. The size on the
on the drum, socket, and wedge must drum, socket, and wedge must correspond with the
correspond with the size of rope being used. size of rope being used. The wedge also has a
go"/no-go" feature cast into the wedge to assist in
determining the proper size wire rope that can be used
with that particular socket and wedge. Refer to
WARNING Figure 5−12. The proper size wire rope is determined
when: 1) the wire rope shall pass through the go" hole
Do not interchange sockets and wedges. in the wedge, and 2) the wire rope shall not pass
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are
through the no-go" hole in the wedge. The part num-
not properly matched. Use a terminator"
ber may also be stamped on the socket and wedge.
wedge with a utility socket for a terminator"
Consult the Parts Manual for confirmation. If there is
wedge and a non-terminator" wedge with a
any doubt as to the mating of the socket and wedge,
non-terminator" ready socket.
consult your distributor.

Operator’s Manual
Right
Wrong
Right Wrong

Socket & Wedge Connections Socket & Wedge Installation
Before installing type CC wire rope into a socket or Use a hammer to seat the wedge and rope as deep into
wedge, attach two clips (hose clamps are an effective the socket as possible before applying first load. Lift
and efficient alternative if traditional clips are not avail- the first load a few inches from the ground to fully seat
able) approximately 3−4 feet (0.9−1.2m) from the end the wedge and wire rope in the socket. This load
with a 3 inch (76.2mm) space between them. Refer to should be of equal or greater weight than loads ex-
Figure 5−12. The dead end must also be seized and a pected in use.
minimum tail length of 20 rope diameters (15 inches for
Secure the dead end section of the rope by installing
3/4 inch rope) is required. The clips will help prevent
the clip through the wedge as shown in Figure 5−12.
core slippage and any looseness of the outer strands
Tighten the nuts on the clip to the recommended
from traveling up the rope during installation while still
torque as shown on the table in Figure 5−17.
allowing the rope strands to be free to adjust. If using
type CC rope, remove clips from the live end after rope When anchoring the socket to the boom head, make
is securely installed into the socket. sure the flat face is facing out as shown in Figure 5−14.
If socket is not installed correctly, structural damage to
Note: Refer to Figure 5−8 to identify which type of the boom head may occur.
rope is installed on the crane.
It is recommended that annually, the socket and
wedge connection be removed, that portion of wire
CAUTION rope be removed, and a new connection be installed.
The ends of type CC rope must be fuse welded

and the tail length of the dead end must be a
minimum of 20 rope diameters (15 inches for
WARNING
3/4 inch rope). Failure to do the above may Wire rope can spin uncontrollably when
cause the core to slip and/or the strands to removing wire rope dead end pins. Serious
loosen causing major rope damage. personal injury can result if rope spin is not
properly controlled. Take the appropriate
safety precautions to control the rope and
wear the appropriate safety equipment before
removing wire rope dead end pins.

Operator’s Manual
The Double-Saddle−Clip Method The Loop Back Method The Extended Wedge Method
Figure 5−15
Wire Rope Socket With Clip
Wire Rope Sockets With Clips Right
Some codes require the use of a wire rope clip in con-

junction with a socket and wedge connection.
Figure 5−15 illustrates some typical methods of clip
installation with sockets. In some cases, particularly in Wrong
wrecking ball work, there is a chance that the wedge
can loosen, releasing the socket from the rope. This
could be caused by the banging action and alternate
loading and unloading of the rope that occurs during
Figure 5−16
this type work. Wire Rope Clip Installation
WARNING Wire Rope Clip Installation

The point at which a rope enters an end The correct method of installing u-bolt wire rope clips is
attachment (clips, wedge, or socket) must be shown in Figure 5−16. The u-bolt must always be over
thoroughly examined during regular the short end of the wire rope and the base must al-
inspections. This is a location where fatigue ways contact the long end.
of wires occurs due to the restriction of the Clips should NOT be staggered, that is u-bolt of one
rope in the end attachment. Any broken wires clip over short end and u-bolt of next clip over long end.
at this point is reason for cutting off the This practice will not only distort the wire rope exces-
affected area and making a new end sively, but will prevent maximum strength of this type
attachment, or for replacing the entire rope. fastening. Placing all clips with the u-bolt over the long
end of the wire rope will damage strands and result in
The use of wire rope clips with a socket and wedge an unsafe condition.
connection can weaken the connection if done improp- The distance between clips should be not less than six
erly. Do not attach the dead end of the rope to the live times the wire rope diameter. In relation to size of wire
side with the clip as this will seriously weaken the con- rope, the minimum number of clips recommended for
nection. The clip may ultimately take the load and may safe connections is given in Figure 5−17.
deform or break the rope.
If using the loop back method, the loop formed must
not be allowed to enter the wedge, or the connection
CAUTION
will be weakened. The tail length of the dead end must Apply the initial load and retighten nuts to the
be a minimum of 20 rope diameters. recommended torque. Rope can stretch and
shrink in diameter when loads are applied.
Inspect periodically and retighten as
required.

Operator’s Manual
Recommended Wire Rope Clips
Minimum No. Amount of Rope
Clip Size Torque
of Clips To Turn Back*
Inches mm Quantity Inches mm Ft Lb Nm
1/8 3.2 2 3 1/4 82.5 − −
3/16 4.7 2 3 3/4 95.2 − −
1/4 6.3 2 4 3/4 120.6 15 20.0
5/16 7.9 2 5 1/4 133.3 30 40.7
3/8 9.5 2 6 1/2 165.1 45 60.1
7/16 11.1 2 7 177.8 65 86.8
1/2 12.7 3 11 1/2 292.1 65 86.8
9/16 14.3 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
5/8 15.9 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
3/4 19.0 4 18 457.2 130 173.6
7/8 22.2 4 19 482.6 225 300.6
1 25.4 5 26 660.4 225 300.6
1−1/8 28.6 6 34 863.6 225 300.6
1−1/4 31.7 6 37 939.8 360 480.9
1−3/8 34.9 7 44 1117.6 360 480.9
1−1/2 39.1 7 48 1219.2 360 480.9
1−5/8 41.3 7 51 1295.4 430 574.4
1−3/4 44.5 7 53 1346.2 590 788.1
2 50.8 8 71 1803.4 750 1001.9
2−1/4 57.2 8 73 1854.2 750 1001.9
2−1/2 63.5 9 84 2133.6 750 1001.9
2−3/4 69.9 10 100 2540.0 750 1001.9
3 76.2 10 106 2692.4 1200 1603.0
*If a greater number of clips are used than shown in this table, the amount of rope turn back should be increased proportionally.
Figure 5−17
Recommended Wire Rope Clips
close watch should be kept on all working parts-

Wire Rope Break-In sheaves, drums, roller, etc. to make certain that the
After the rope has been installed and the ends secured rope runs freely, and without any possible obstruc-
in the correct manner, the new rope must be run tions as it makes its way through the system.
through a break-in period. This allows the component
parts of the new rope to gradually adjust itself to actual Note: Run these loads with reeving that places
operating conditions. the loads on the block with all rope off the drum
1. Properly park the crane on a firm, level surface. except the last three wraps. If this is not pos-
Fully extend the side frames. Swing the upper over sible, alternate methods must be used to assure
the end of the carrier and engage the swing lock. proper tensioning of the rope on the drum.
2. Fully raise the boom. Attach a light load at the hook
4. If no problems appear in running the rope, repeat
and raise it a few inches off the ground. Allow to
procedure with an increased load.
stand for several minutes.
3. Run the rope through a cycle of operation at very
slow speeds. During this trial operation, a very

Operator’s Manual
A rotating load on an unrestrained, non-swivel hook ball
Cutting Wire Rope without a tagline, also affects the internal loading of the
rope in this manner. This practice, or any other which al-
CAUTION lows the rope to rotate while in service, leads to unbal-
anced loading between the inner and outer layer of
The ends of type CC rope must be fuse strands, which may result in core failure. Wire rope
welded. Failure to do so may cause the core manufacturer’s testing has shown that rotation resistant
to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing rope utilized with a swivel hook ball has reduced the
serious rope damage. breaking strength by as much as 50% if excessive rota-
tion occurs.
When wire rope is to be cut, seizing should be placed
on each side of the point where the rope is to be cut, to Hook Ball Usage With Rotation
keep the strands in place. On preformed rope, one
seizing on each side of the cut is enough. On non-pre-
Resistant Rope
formed rope less than 7/8 in (23mm) diameter, two seiz-
ings are recommended. On non-preformed rope over
Non-Swivel Usage
7/8 in (23mm) diameter, three seizings are recom- A non-swivel hook ball in conjunction with a tagline or
mended. Wire or strand must be used to seize non- other device to control load spin should be used when
preformed rope. Wire, strand, or heavy tape may be the crane is equipped with rotation resistant wire rope.
used to seize preformed rope. This is to avoid unrestrained rotation of the wire rope.
Three Basic methods of cutting wire rope are recom-
Swivel Usage
mended:
1. Abrasive cutting tools. A swivel hook ball can be used with rotation resistant
2. Shearing tools. (Wire cutters on small rope, a wire rope if:
rope cutter, and hammer for larger ropes.) 1. The wire rope is not shock loaded or overloaded.
3. Oxy/Acetylene fuel torch. A torch can be used to 2. Wire rope working strength is reduced to maintain
cut type CC rope only. The heat will fuse weld the original design safety factors.
end, which is OK for type CC , but not for other 3. The wire rope is inspected frequently as outlined in
types which are not to be fuse welded. this Section of this Operator’s Manual.
Rotation Resistant Wire Rope Inspection

Marked reduction in diameter indicates deterioration of
Rope the core resulting in lack of proper support for the load
carrying strands. Excessive rope stretch or elongation
The rotation resistant characteristic is achieved by laying
may also be an indication of internal deterioration. Major
the outer strands around an independent wire rope that
concerns and replacement recommendations include:
is wound in the opposite direction. When the rope has
1. Loss of rope diameter (in excess of those listed in the
tension on it, opposing rotational forces are created be-
table in the Wire Rope Replacement" section found
tween the core and outer strands. If a swivel hook ball is
earlier in this Operator’s Manual), abnormal length-
utilized with rotation resistant rope, the rope is allowed to
ening of rope lay, or protrusion of wires between the
twist. The outer strands unwind and get longer while the
outer strands.
inner core is forced to rotate in the same direction and
2. Two randomly distributed broken wires in 6 rope di-
shortens in length. As a result of this treatment, the inner
ameters, or 4 randomly distributed broken wires in
core sees a disproportionately greater load, and core
30 rope diameters.
damage may occur due to shock loading or overloading.

Operator’s Manual
3 Parts
1 Part 2 Parts 4 Parts
5 Parts 6 Parts 7 Parts 8 Parts
10 Parts 11 Parts
9 Parts
12 Parts 13 Parts 14 Parts
Hammerhead Reeving Only
Figure 5−18
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

Operator’s Manual
Jib Head Sheave
Boom Head Sheaves
Hook Ball
Hook Block
Rear Drum
Note: Reeving shown is typical. Either drum may

be reeved over boom head sheaves or jib sheave. Front Drum
Figure 5−19
Wire Rope Reeving Diagram
1
1
1
1
1
1
3 2 1
2 1
2
2
5 2
2
2
6
1. Bridle Sheaves 3. LH Guide Sheave 5. Dead End Anchor (On Frame)
2. Bail Sheaves 4. RH Guide Sheave (Fleeting) 6. Boom Hoist Drum
Figure 5−20
Boom Hoist Reeving Diagram

Operator’s Manual
Crane Specifications
The information in the following specifications are general in nature and is used for reference purposes only. De-
pending upon the vintage of the crane, some features may no longer be available. Standard and optional features
may vary from crane to crane. Consult the factory to verify the specific information if required.
Dimensions
General Dimensions English Metric

Basic Boom 50 ft 15.24m
Minimum Load Radius 12 ft 3.66m
Maximum Boom Angle 80° 80°
Track Shoe Width 44 in* 1.12m
Maximum height of
live mast from ground
is 39’ 7" (12.06m)
**
25’ 8"
(7.83m)
13’ 3"
(4.04m)
7’ 6.75"
5’ 5"
(2.31m)
(1.65m)
28’ 6" (8.69m)
18’ 2.25" (5.54m)
22’ 0.75" (6.71m)

Note:* Optional − 50 in (1.27m) track shoe width
** @ Maximum boom angle (80°) with maximum boom [280 ft (85.34m)], maximum rotation radius occurs.

Operator’s Manual
Tailswing Radius
19’ 10" (6.05m)
15’ 2"
(4.62m)
23’ 7.50"
(7.20m)
22’ 6"**
(6.86m)
14’ 0.75"
(4.28m)
11’ 4.75"
(3.35m)
52.75"
(1.34m)
22"
44"* 14.75" (55.88cm)
(1.12m) (37.47cm)
* Optional − 50" (1.27m)

** With 50" (1.27m) track shoes, dimension is 23’ 0" (7.01m).

Operator’s Manual
Base Crane
Base Crane Ê
Length 1 20 ft 4 in (6.20m)
Length 2 52 ft (15.85m)
Length 3 8 ft 4 in (2.54m)
Width 9 ft 1.50 in (2.78m)
Height 1 11 ft 3 in (3.43m)
Height 2 37.50 in (0.95m)
Height 3 44.0 in (1.12m)
Weight 83,332 lb (37 799kg) H 2*
* Maximum height
on pontoons W
PART HIGH
NUMBER STRENGTH
CONSTRUCTION
DON2P0014
NOT
LGN2P0017
DATE
DRILL WELDSTEEL
EQUIPMENT
ORMATERIAL
ON THIS
H1 OF ARROW
MEMBER
PARALLEL TO
H3
DIRECTION
INPAD
2418−LB
!CAUTION
UNLATCHING
H3A0194
TREAD
INJURY
FLOATBE
OF
!CAUTION
RESULT
CLEAR
PERSONAL
DROPPING
COULD
STAND
TO
WHILE
DO NOT BRIDGE
L3 L1
L2
Side Frames
With 44 in (1.12m) Track Shoes Ë

W
Length 28 ft 6 in (8.69m)
Width 44 in (1.12m)
Height 52.75 in (1.34m)
Weight 36,410 lb (16 515kg)
L
With 50 in (1.27m) Track Shoes Ë H

Width 50 in (1.27m)
Height 52.75 in (1.34m)
Weight 37,610 lb (17 060kg)
Number inside black circle Ê" = # of components

Operator’s Manual
Upper Counterweights W
A" Slab Counterweight Ê L

Length 5 ft 9.50 in (1.77m)
Width 15 ft 2 in (4.62m)
Height 32.25 in (0.82m)
Weight 14,000 lb (6 350kg)
L1 L1
A", B", C", and D" (2 Each)
Wing Counterweights Ñ
Length 1 61 in (1.55m)
W
Length 2 46.50 in (1.18m)
Width 50.75 in (1.29m)
Height 20.25 in (51.44cm) H L2 L2
Weight 13,000 lb (5 897kg)
Lower Counterweights
Side Frame Counterweights

With 44 in (1.12m) Track
Shoes Ë
Width 17.50 in (44.45cm)
Height 33.75 in (0.86m) H L
Weight 24,000 lb (10 886kg)
Side Frame Counterweights

With 50 in (1.27m) Track
Shoes Ë
W
Length 16 ft (4.88m)
Width 17.40 in (44.20cm)
Height 31.10 in (0.79m)
Weight 21,500 lb (9 752kg)
Number inside black circle Ê" = # of components

Operator’s Manual
Upper Structure
Frame Hydraulic System Load Hoist Drums
All welded and precision machined Hydraulic Pumps Each drum contains a pilot controlled,
surfaces. The pump arrangement is designed to bi-directional, axial piston motor and a
provide hydraulically powered functions planetary gear reduction unit to provide
Turntable Bearing
positive control under all load condi-
S Outer race bolted to upper frame; allowing positive, precise control with in-
dependent or simultaneous operation of tions.
inner race with internal swing gears
bolted to lower frame. all crane functions. S Power up/down and free-fall opera-
S Two variable displacement pumps tion modes
operating at 4,451 psi (312.9kg/cm2) S Automatic brake mode (spring ap-
Engine and 83 gal/min (314.2L/min) powers plied, hydraulically released, band
load hoist drums, boom hoist drum, type brake)
optional third drum, and travel. S Grooved lagging
Engine
S Two fixed displacement gear type S Drum pawl controlled manually
Full pressure lubrication, oil filter, air S Electronic drum rotation indicators
cleaner, hour meter, throttle, and electric pumps operating at 3,342 psi
(235kg/cm2) and 21 gal/min S Mounted on anti-friction bearings
control shutdown. S 19.00 in (48.26cm) root diameter
(79.5L/min) powers the swing motor,
lower jacks, and counterweight S 33.86 in (86.00cm) flange diameter
Mitsubishi Isuzu
removal. S 22.52 in (57.20cm) width
6D24-TLA2L AH−6HK1X
S One fixed displacement gear type The free-fall operation mode is designed
Number of
6 6 pump operating at 1,991 psi to prevent load lowering even if the free-
cylinders
(140kg/cm2) and 8.1 gal/min fall switch is accidentally activated.
5.12 x 5.91 in
4.53 x 4.92 in (30.7L/min) powers the fan for the oil The automatic brake mode meets all
Bore and stroke (130 x
150mm)
(115 x 125mm) cooler. OSHA requirements for personnel han-
S One fixed displacement gear type dling.
Piston dis- pump operating at 2,990 psi
729 in3 (12L) 475 in3 (7.86L)
placement
(210kg/cm2) and 10.8 gal/min Drum Clutches
Engine rpm at (40.9L/min) powers the remote Hydraulic two shoe clutch design that
full load 2,000 rpm 2,000 rpm control valves. uses a 30 in (762mm) diameter x 6.5 in
speed
(165mm) wide shoe that expands inter-
Remote Oil Cooler
Hi-idle rpm 2,200 rpm 2,050 rpm nally to provide load control. Swept area
Oil cooler, located behind the operator’s is 314.16 in2 (2 026.83cm2).
Gross engine 266 hp 284 hp cab, has a hydraulically driven, thermo-
hp (198kw) (212kw)
statically controlled fan to control oil
870 ft lb (1 830 ft lb (1 temperature.
Peak torque 060joule) @ 125joule) @ Optional Front−Mounted
1,400 rpm 1,500 rpm Pump Control Fine Inching" Mode Third Hoist Drum
Electrical sys-
24 volt 24 volt
Special pump setting, selectable from
tem the operator’s cab, that allows very slow Mounts in the boom base section and is
Fuel tank ca- 77 gal 77 gal movements of load hoist drums, boom used in conjunction with a fleeting
pacity (291.5L) (291.5L) hoist drum, and travel for precision sheave and 3-sheave idler assembly to
Batteries 2−12 volt 2−12 volt work. run the wire rope over the boom top sec-
tion.
Approximate Hydraulic Reservoir S Power up/down for luffer applications
fuel con- gal/hr (L/hr) gal/hr (L/hr)
sumption
42 gal (159.0L), equipped with sight lev- where a second load line is needed
el gauge. Diffusers built in for deaeri- S 18.70 in (475mm) root diameter
100% hp 14.07 (53.26) 14.4 (54.51) ation. S 33.66 in (855mm) flange diameter
75% hp 9.33 (35.32) 11.7 (44.29) Filtration S 32.00 in (813mm) width
S Mounted on anti-friction bearings
50% hp 6.70 (25.36) 8.4 (31.80) Ten micron, full flow, line filter in the con-
25% hp 3.51 (13.29) 4.2 (15.89)
trol circuit. All oil is filtered prior to enter-
ing the reservoir.
Fuel Tank Counterbalance Valves
Equipped with fuel sight level gauges, All hoist motors are equipped with coun-
flame arrester, and self-closing cap with terbalance valves to provide positive
locking eye for padlock. load lowering and prevent accidental
load drop if the hydraulic pressure is
suddenly lost.

Operator’s Manual
S Load Radius
Boom Hoist Drum Operator’s Cab S Boom Tip Height
S Audible Alarm
Contains a pilot controlled, bi-directional, Fully enclosed modular steel compart- S Pre-Warning Light
axial piston motor and a planetary gear re- ment is independently mounted and S Overload Light
duction unit to provide positive control un- padded to protect against vibration and S Load On Hook
der all load conditions. noise. S Function kick-outs including over load
S Spring applied, hydraulically released, S All tinted/tempered safety glass S Operator settable stops (ramped
disc type brake controlled automatically S Folding hinge entry door and sliding stops)
S Grooved lagging front glass window S Anti-Two Block Indicator
S Drum pawl controlled automatically S 19,000 BTU hot water heater S Boom hoist dead end load cell (no
S Mounted on anti-friction bearings S 18,600 BTU air conditioner lineriders)
S 14.99 in (38.07cm) root diameter S Door and window locks
S 30.71 in (78.00cm) flange diameter S Circulating fan Boom Hoist System
S 11.55 in (29.34cm) width S Sun visor
S Cloth seat Designed to lift off maximum boom or
S Defroster maximum boom plus jib and maximum
Swing System S Windshield wipers and washer luffing attachment unassisted. Operates
S Dry chemical fire extinguisher up to a maximum boom angle of 80_.
Pilot controlled bi-directional axial piston S Engine instrumentation panel (voltme- Boom hoist limit system limits maximum
motors and planetary gear reduction ter, engine oil pressure, engine water boom angle operation.
units to provide positive control under all temperature, fuel level, hydraulic oil S Pin-on bail frame
load conditions. temperature, hour meter, and service S 16-part reeving with 7/8 in (22mm)
S Spring applied, hydraulically re- monitor system) wire rope
leased, 360° multi-plate brake S Electronic drum rotation indicators for S Bridle assembly
S Free swing mode when lever is in neu- front and rear hoist drums S 30 ft (9.14m) live mast
tral position S Six way adjustable seat S Tubular boom backstops (telescopic
S Four position positive house lock S Hand and foot throttle type)
S Two-speed swing S Fully adjustable single axis controls S Sheaves contain sealed anti-friction
S Audio/Visual swing alarm S Swing lever with swing brake and bearings
S Maximum swing speed is 1.92 rpm horn located on handle S Boom speed from 10°−70° is 90 sec-
S Bubble type level onds with no load. Speed was deter-
S Ergonomic gauge layout mined using 100 ft (30.48m) of tube
Counterweight S Controls shut off lever boom.
S Right hand control stand is adjustable
Consists of a five-piece design that can by electric motor for operator comfort.
be easily lowered to the ground using Machinery Cab
the hydraulic counterweight removal
cylinders. Rated Capacity Limiter Hinged doors (one on right side, two on
S A" upper counterweight consists of System left side) for machinery access.
one, 14,000 lb (6 350kg) base slab Equipped with rooftop access ladder
and two, 13,000 lb (5 897kg) wing The rated capacity limiter system is a and skid resistant finish on roof.
weights. boom hoist load cell system. This system
S B" upper counterweight consists of provides the operator with useful geomet-
two, 13,000 lb (5 897kg) wing weights. rical data, to include: Catwalks
S C" upper counterweight consists of S Main Boom Length
two, 13,000 lb (5 897kg) wing weights. S Main Boom Angle Standard on right and left sides. Cat-
S Optional D" upper counterweight S Jib Length walks are removable for reduced travel
consists of two, 13,000 lb (5 897kg) S Jib Angle width.
wing weights. S Operating Mode
S Two side frame counterweights −
24,000 lb (10 886kg) each for 44 in
(1.12m) track shoes, 21,500 lb (9
752kg) each for 50 in (1.27m) track
shoes.
Total combined counterweight, ABCD"
plus side frames counterweights, is
166,000 lb (75 296kg) for 44 in (1.12m)
track shoes, 161,000 lb (73 030kg) for
50 in (1.27m) track shoes.

Operator’s Manual
Lower Structure
Track Rollers S 2-speed travel.
Carbody S Eleven sealed (oil filled) track rollers S Individual control provides smooth,
per side frame precise maneuverability including full
Lower Frame S Heat treated, mounted on anti-friction counter-rotation.
All welded high strength steel [100,000 bearings S Spring applied, hydraulically released
psi (689.48MPa) yield] box construction Tracks disc type brake controlled automatically
frame with precision machined surfaces S Maximum travel speed is 0.85 mph
Heat treated, self-cleaning, multiple (1.37km/h).
for turntable bearing and rotating joint.
hinged track shoes joined by one-piece S Designed to 30% gradeability
S 20 ft 4 in (6.20m) overall width
full floating pins; 50 shoes per side
S 11 ft 9.75 in (3.60m) overall length
frame
Take Up Idlers Jack System
Side Frames Cast steel, heat treated, self-cleaning,
System contains four hydraulic cylin-
mounted on sealed tapered roller bear-
Side Frames ders individually pinned on the carbody.
ings.
S Standard; four ground controlled,
All welded, precision machined and re- S Track Tension Adjustment − Idler
power hydraulic jacks, pinned to the
movable. Carbody cross axles posi- wheel adjusted by means of hydraulic
lower carbody frame, used to raise the
tioned by dowels and held in place with cylinder and hand pump. Idler wheel
crane to facilitate removal and instal-
adjustable wedge packs. shaft held in position with shims after
lation of the crawler side frames.
S 18 ft 10 in (5.74m) gauge adjustment is made.
S Individual controls are mounted on
S 28 ft 6 in (8.69m) overall length carbody.
S 44 in (1.12m) wide track shoes S Minimum height of carbody when
S Sealed (oil filled) drive planetaries Travel and Steering
resting on pontoons is 21.50 in
S Compact travel drives (54.61cm).
S Slide rails on top of each side frame Travel and Steering S Maximum height of carbody when
S Optional − 50 in (1.27m) wide track Each side frame contains a pilot con- resting on pontoons is 37.50 in
shoes trolled, bi-directional, axial piston motor (0.95m).
and a planetary gear reduction unit to
provide positive control under all load
conditions.

Operator’s Manual
Attachment and Options
S Six, 21 in, (0.53m) root diameter steel Tube Boom
Conventional Tubular Boom sheaves mounted on sealed anti-fric- Extensions Quantity For
50−280 ft (15.24−83.34m) tion bearings Max Boom
S Tip extension and jib connecting lugs ft m
Basic Boom on top section
10 3.05 1*
50 ft (15.24m) two-piece design that S Mechanical boom angle indicator
utilizes a 20 ft (6.10m) base section Tube Boom Extensions 20 6.10 1
and a 30 ft (9.14m) open throat top sec- The following table provides the lengths 30 9.14 2
tion with in-line connecting pins on 80 available and the suggested quantity to
in (2.03m) wide and 68 in (1.73m) deep 40 12.19 1
obtain maximum boom in 10 ft (3.05m) in-
centers. crements. Midpoint pendant connections 50 15.24 2
S Boom foot on 55 in (1.40m) centers are required at 110 ft (33.5m) for boom
S 4 in (10.16cm) diameter chords lengths of 250−280 ft (76.20−85.34m). * Assumes one 10 ft (3.05m) exten-
S Lugs on base section to attach carry- sion is the self-assembly section.
S Polyamide wear blocks on top of each
ing links extension
S Skywalk platform S Maximum tip height of 285 ft (86.87m)
S Appropriate length bar pendants S Boom connecting pins storage on
S Deflector roller on top section
stored on extension each extension
S Permanent skid pads mounted on top
section to protect head machinery
S Appropriate length bar pendants
stored on top section.
Main Boom Make-up

Boom Base Boom Extensions ft (m) Top
Length 20 Self Assy 10 20 30 40 50 30
ft (m) (6.14) Section* (3.05) (6.14) (9.10) (12.19) (15.24) (9.10)
50 (15.24) 1 1
60 (18.29) 1 1 1
70 (21.34) 1 1 1
80 (24.38) 1 1 1 1
90 (27.43) 1 1 1 1
100 (30.48) 1 1 1 1
110 (33.53) 1 1 1 1
120 (36.58) 1 1 1 1 1
130 (39.62) 1 1 1 1 1
140 (42.67) 1 1 1 1 1
150 (45.72) 1 1 1 1 1
160 (48.77) 1 1 2 1
170 (51.82) 1 1 1 1 1 1
180 (54.86) 1 1 1 2 1
190 (57.91) 1 1 1 2 1
200 (60.96) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
210 (64.01) 1 1 1 1 2 1
220 (67.06) 1 1 1 1 2 1
230 (70.10) 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
240 (73.15) 1 1 1 2 2 1
250 (76.20) 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
260 (79.25) 1 1 2 1 2 1
270 (82.30) 1 1 2 1 2 1
280 (85.34) 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
* 10 ft (3.05m) self assembly section.

Operator’s Manual
Luffing Boom Extensions The following table provides the lengths
Tubular Jib available and the suggested quantity to
The following table provides the lengths
30−100 ft (9.14−30.48m) available and the suggested quantity to obtain the maximum luffing jib in 10 ft
obtain the maximum luffing boom in 10 (3.05m) increments. Midpoint pendants
Basic Tube Jib are not required.
ft (3.05m) increments. Midpoint pen-
30 ft (9.14m) two-piece design that uti- dants are not required.
lizes a 15 ft (4.57m) base section and a Luffing Jib
15 ft (4.57m) top section with in-line Luffing Boom Extensions Quantity For
connecting pins on 32 in (0.81m) wide Extensions Quantity For Max Max Luffing Jib
Luffing Boom ft m
and 24 in (0.61m) deep centers.
ft m
S 2.25 in (57.15mm) diameter tubular 10 3.05 1
chords 10* 3.05 1
S One 21 in (0.53m) root diameter steel 20 6.10 1
20 6.10 1
sheave mounted on sealed anti-fric- 30 9.14 1
tion bearings 30 9.14 1
S 10 ft (3.05m) and 20 ft (6.10) jib exten- 40 12.19 1
40 12.19 1
sions are available to provide jib
50 15.24 2 Notes:
lengths of 30−100 ft (9.14−30.48m)
in 10 ft (3.05m) increments These extensions, combined with exten-
* 10 ft (3.05m) extension is the self-assem-
S Jib offset angles at 5°, 15°, and 25° bly section. Required for luffer operation. sions included in basic luffing jib, make
S The maximum tip height of tube boom up all jib lengths to 160 ft (48.77m).
+ jib [240 ft + 100 ft (73.15 + 30.5m)] Note: FE" type boom must be used. S 50 ft (15.24m) of extensions are
is 345 ft (105m). included with basic jib.
S Basic tube jib can be used as fixed jib S Deflector roller on top of each exten-
S Rear hoist drum becomes luffing jib sion
on luffing jib
hoist S Appropriate length pendants
S Optional third drum provides second S Maximum luffing jib tip height of 350.8 ft
Auxiliary Tip Extension working hoist line, if required. (107m)
5 ft (1.5m) S Designed for self-assembly
S Luffing jib hoist bridle and bail can re-
main reeved for crane transport Fixed Jib
Designed to use in place of jib to provide
S Job site mobility with attachment 30 ft (9.14m)
clearance between working hoist lines.
The extension is equipped with two ny- S Rolled out or rolled under erection
lon 21 in (0.53m) root diameter sheaves methods 30 ft (9.14m) two-piece design com-
mounted on sealed anti-friction bear- S Compact transport module mon with basic tube jib that utilizes a
ings. Maximum capacity is 20 Tons 15 ft (4.57m) base section and a 15 ft
(18.14mt). (4.57m) top section with in-line con-
Luffing Jib necting pins on 32 in (0.81m) wide and
80−160 ft (24.38−48.77m) 24 in (0.61m) deep centers.
Luffing Boom S 2.25 in (57.15mm) diameter tubular
80−190 ft (24.38−57.91m) Basic Luffing Jib chords
80 ft (24.38m) five-piece design utilizes a S One 21 in (0.53m) root diameter steel
S Common base and extensions as 4 ft (1.12m) luffing boom top section, 10 sheave mounted on sealed anti-fric-
open throat boom (FE" boom only) ft (3.05m) luffing jib base section, 20 ft tion bearings
S 10 ft (3.05m) luffing extension re- (6.10m) jib extension, 30 ft (6.10m) ex- S Fixed jib offset angle is 5°
quired for bail anchor tension, and 20 ft (6.10m) top section S Maximum luffing jib + fixed jib tip
S Working angles of 90°, 85°, 80°, 75°, with in-line connecting pins. Jib exten- height of 379.4 ft (115.6m)
70°, and 65° sions are 44 in (1.12m) wide and 54 in
S Working lengths of 80 ft (24.38m) to (1.37m) deep at the centers.
190 ft (57.91m) S 42.5 Tons (38.56mt) maximum capac-
ity
S Working lengths of 80 ft (24.38m) to
160 ft (48.77m)
S Top section includes mounting lugs
for all attachment options
S Five steel 21 in (0.53m) diameter luf-
fing jib head sheaves
S Pin-on nose wheel
S Ten-part luffing jib hoist
S 1 in (25.40mm) diameter type N"
pendants
Luffing Jib Extensions

Operator’s Manual
Fixed Jib
Luffing Jib
Offset Jib
‘FD’ Main
Boom ‘FD’ Luffing
Boom
Auxiliary Tip
Extension
‘FD’ Main
Boom
50−280 ft (15.24−83.34m) 50−240 ft (15.24−73.15m) 80−190 ft (24.38−57.91m) Luffing Boom

Main Boom With 5 ft (1.5m) Main Boom With 30−100 ft + 80−160 ft (24.38−48.77m) Luffing Jib
Tip Extension (9.14−30.48m) Offset Jib With 30 ft (9.14m) Fixed Jib

Operator’s Manual
Working Weights
Ctwt ABC" Ctwt ABCD"
Based on basic crane including the engine, turntable bearing, independent hydraulic powered Ctwt A" Ctwt AB" + A" Lower + A" Lower
drums, boom hoist limiting device, independent hydraulic swing and travel, counterweight, Ctwt Ctwt
swing brake, drum rotation indicators, and crawler lower with 44 in (1.12m) wide track shoes,
sealed track rollers, catwalks, hydraulic boom foot pin removal, plus the following: lb lb lb lb
(kg) (kg) (kg) (kg)
Lifting crane − includes 50 ft (15.24m) basic tubular boom, 30 ft (9.14m) live mast, 1,050 ft
198,217 224,217 298,217 324,217
(320.04m) of 7/8 in (22mm) diameter wire rope, 850 ft (259.08m) of 7/8 in (22mm) diameter
boom hoist rope, 125 Ton (113.4mt) hook block, and basic pendants. (89 910) (101 703) (135 269) (147 062)
psi 7.3 8.3 11.0 12.0

Ground Bearing Pressure
kg/cm2 0.51 0.58 0.77 0.84
Transport Weights
Base Crane: Rigid boom backstops, 77 gal (291L) of fuel, catwalks (both sides), 30 ft (9.14m) live mast, bail, boom hoist rope, boom base section, 10
ft (3.05m) self-assembly section, 1,050 ft (320.04m) of type LB" front hoist rope, and 850 ft (259.08m) of type RB" rear hoist rope.
Gross Weight Transport Loads
Item Description
lb (kg) #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
Base Crane 83,332 37 799 1
Add Side Frame with Wedge Packs − Two Required 36,410 16 515 1 1
Add A" Base Counterweight 14,000 6 350 1
Add A" Wing Counterweight − Two Required 13,000 5 897 1 1
Add B" Wing Counterweight − Two Required 13,000 5 897 1 1
Add C" Wing Counterweight − Two Required 13,000 5 897 1 1
Add D" Wing Counterweight − Two Required 13,000 5 897 2
Add A" Lower Counterweight − Two Required 24,000 10 886 1 1
Add Hydraulic Third Drum without Rope 2,000 907
Add 30 ft (9.14m) Top Section 4,488 2 036 1
Add 10 ft (3.05m) Extension w/Pins and Pendants 1,151 522
Add 20 ft (6.10m) Extension w/Pins and Pendants 1,862 845 1
Add 30 ft (9.14m) Extension w/Pins and Pendants 2,590 1 175 1 1
Add 40 ft (12.19m) Extension w/Pins and Pendants 3,292 1 493 1
Add 50 ft (15.24m) Extension w/Pins and Pendants 4,149 1 882 1 1
Add 30 ft (9.14m) Jib 2,209 1 002 1
Add 10 ft (3.05m) Jib Extension w/Pins
and Pendants 254 115 1
Add 20 ft (6.10m) Jib Extension w/Pins

and Pendants 439 199 3
Add 5 ft (1.52m) Auxiliary Tip Extension 671 304

Add 15 Ton (13.6mt) Hook Ball (Non-swivel) 1,200 544 1
Add 15 Ton (13.6mt) Hook Ball (Swivel) 1,215 551
Add 175 Ton (158.8mt) Six-sheave Hook Block 3,000 1 361 1
Remove 10 ft (3.05m) Self-Assembly Section 2,422 1 099
Remove 20 ft (6.10m) Boom Base Section −4,479 −2 032
Remove Main Hoist Rope 1,943 881
Remove Rear Drum Auxiliary Wire Rope −1,700 −771
Remove 50 gal (189L) of Fuel −362 −164
lb 83,332 43,549 41,759 40,590 28,452 42,292 29,780 43,488
Approximate Total Shipping Weight
kg 37 799 19 942 18 942 18 411 12 905 19 183 13 507 19 726
Notes:
Estimated weights vary by +/− 2%. Numbers in the load columns (numbers 1 − 8) represent quantities.
Estimated transport loads assume the load out consist of 280 ft (85.35m) of boom and 100 ft (33.48m) of jib and full counterweight.
Support loads were targeted at 45,000 lb (20 412kg), 8.5 ft (2.59m) wide, and 48 ft (14.63m) long trailer. This may vary depending on state laws,
empty truck/trailer weights, and style of trailer.

Operator’s Manual
Transport Drawings
13’ 3"
(4.04m)
24"
(0.61m)
34"
LOAD #1 − 83,332 lb (37 799kg) (0.86m)
Base crane
13’ 2"
(4.01m)
24"
(0.61m)
34"
LOAD #2 − 43,549 lb (19 753kg) (0.86m)
Side frame with wedge pack, 50 ft (15.24m) boom extension

with pins and pendants, and 175 Ton (158.8mt) hook block
13’ 2"
(4.01m)
24"
(0.61m)
34"
(0.86m)
LOAD #3 − 41,759 lb (18 942kg)
Side frame with wedge pack, 50 ft (15.24m) boom extension
with pins and pendants, and 15 Ton (13.6mt) hook ball

Operator’s Manual
11’ 8"
(3.56m)
24"
(0.61m)
34"
LOAD #4 − 40,590 lb (18 411kg) (0.86m)
A" base counterweight, 1 of 2 lower counterweights, and

30 ft (9.14m) boom extension with pins and pendants
11’ 10"
(3.61m)
24"
(0.61m) 34"
(0.86m)
LOAD #5 − 28,452 lb (12 905kg)
1 of 2 lower counterweights, 20 ft (6.10m) boom extension with pins and
pendants, and 30 ft (4.57m) boom extension with pins and pendants
11’ 10"
(3.61m)
24"
(0.61m) 34"
(0.86m)
LOAD #6 − 42,292 lb (19 183kg)
A" wing counterweight, B" wing counterweight, C" wing counterweight,
and 40 ft (12.14m) boom extension with pins and pendants

Operator’s Manual
10’ 10"
(3.30m)
24"
(0.61m) 34"
(0.86m)
LOAD #7 − 29,780 lb (13 507kg)

D" wing counterweight, three 20 ft (6.10m) jib extensions,
30 ft (9.14m) jib extension, and 10 ft (3.05m) jib extension
11’ 10"
(3.61m)
24"
(0.61m) 34"
(0.86m)
LOAD #8 − 43,488 lb (19 726kg)
A" wing counterweight, B" wing counterweight, C" wing
counterweight, and 30 ft (9.14m) top section with pins and pendants

Operator’s Manual
Load Hoist Performance
Front Drum − 1 in (25.4mm) Wire Rope
Full Load Line
Rope Maximum Line Pull No Load Line Speed Speed Pitch Diameter Layer Total
Layer
lb (kg) ft/min (m/min) ft/min (m/min) in (mm) ft (m) ft (m)
1 52,000 (23 587) 223 (68) 71 (21.6) 20.0 (508) 110 (33.5) 110 (33.5)
2 47,272 (21 442) 245 (75) 78 (23.8) 22.0 (559) 120 (36.6) 230 (70.1)
3 43,333 (19 656) 268 (82) 85 (25.9) 24.0 (610) 130 (39.6) 360 (109.7)
4 40,000 (18 144) 290 (88) 92 (28.0) 26.0 (660) 140 (42.7) 500 (152.4)
5 37,143 (16 848) 312 (95) 100 (30.5) 28.0 (711) 150 (45.7) 650 (198.1)
6 34,666 (15 724) 335 (102) 107 (32.6) 30.0 (762) 160 (48.8) 810 (246.9)
7 32,500 (14 742) 357 (109) 114 (34.7) 32.0 (813) 170 (51.8) 980 (298.7)
8 −−− −−− −−− 34.0 (864) 180 (54.9) 1,160 (353.6)
Rear Drum − 1 in (25.4mm) Wire Rope

Full Load Line
Layer
1 31,365 (14 227) 370 (113) 118 (36.0) 20.0 (508) 110 (33.5) 110 (33.5)
2 28,514 (12 934) 407 (124) 130 (39.6) 22.0 (559) 120 (36.6) 230 (70.1)
3 26,137 (11 856) 444 (135) 141 (43.0) 24.0 (610) 130 (39.6) 360 (109.7)
4 24,127 (10 944) 481 (147) 153 (46.6) 26.0 (660) 140 (42.7) 500 (152.4)
5 22,404 (10 162) 518 (158) 165 (50.3) 28.0 (711) 150 (45.7) 650 (198.1)
6 20,910 (9 485) 555 (169) 177 (53.9) 30.0 (762) 160 (48.8) 810 (246.9)
7 19,603 (8 892) 592 (180) 189 (57.6) 32.0 (813) 170 (51.8) 980 (298.7)
8 −−− −−− −−− 34.0 (864) 180 (54.9) 1,160 (353.6)
Boom Hoist Drum − 7/8 in (22.2mm) Wire Rope

Full Load Line
Layer
1 40,401 (18 326) 143 (43.6) 128 (39.0) 15.9 (404) 50 (15.2) 50 (15.2)
2 36,387 (16 505) 159 (48.5) 142 (43.3) 17.6 (447) 55 (16.8) 105 (32.0)
3 33,099 (15 013) 175 (53.3) 156 (47.5) 19.4 (493) 60 (18.3) 165 (50.3)
4 30,355 (13 769) 191 (58.2) 170 (51.8) 21.1 (536) 65 (19.8) 229 (69.8)
5 28,032 (12 715) 206 (62.8) 184 (56.1) 22.9 (582) 70 (21.3) 299 (91.1)
6 26,039 (11 811) 222 (67.7) 198 (60.4) 24.6 (625) 75 (22.9) 374 (114.0)
7 24,311 (11 027) 238 (72.5) 212 (64.6) 26.4 (671) 80 (24.4) 454 (138.4)
Third Drum − 1 in (25mm) Wire Rope

Full Load Line
Layer
1 20,656 (9 369) 442 (135) 105 (32) 19.7 (500) 150 (45.8) 150 (45.8)
2 18,752 (8 506) 486 (148) 116 (35) 21.7 (551) 165 (50.4) 316 (96.2)
3 17,169 (7 788) 531 (162) 127 (39) 23.7 (602) 181 (55.1) 496 (151.3)
4 15,833 (7 182) 576 (176) 138 (42) 25.7 (653) 196 (59.7) 692 (211.0)
5 14,690 (6 663) 621 (189) 148 (45) 27.7 (704) 211 (64.4) 903 (275.3)
6 −−− −−− −−− 29.7 (754) 226 (68.9) 1,129 (344.1)
Diameter Max. Permissible Load

Wire Rope Application Type Wire Rope Descriptions
in mm lb kg
6 Strand, Compacted Strand, Swaged, Preformed, I.W.R.C.,
Boom Hoist 7/8 22.2 LB 28,900 13 109 Right Lay, Regular Lay
6 X 26 (6 X 19 Class), Warrington Seale, E.I.P.S., Preformed,
Front Drum 1 25.4 DB 22,700 10 297 Right Regular Lay, I.W.R.C.
19 X 19 Rotation Resistant Compacted Strand − High
Third Drum (1-part) 1 25.4 RB 22,760 10 324 Strength − Preformed, Right Regular Lay
Third Drum (2-parts) 1 25.4 RB 45,520 20 648 Strength − Preformed, Right Regular Lay
Rear Drum 1 25.4 RB 17,520 7 947 Strength − Preformed, Right Regular Lay

Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6−1
Section 6 − Fundamental Terms i

Operator’s Manual
ii Section 6 − Fundamental Terms

Operator’s Manual
Boom Angle: The angle above or below horizontal of
Fundamental Terms the longitudinal axis of the boom.
Many terms are used which refer to crane function, as- Boom Angle Indicator: An accessory which meas-
sembly, operation and maintenance. The following list ures the angle of the boom relative to horizontal.
gives a brief definition as to how the terms are used in
Boom Chord: A main corner structural member of a
this Operator’s Manual and how they fit this particular
boom.
crane.
Boom Foot: Base of boom where it attaches to the up-
Accumulator: A container in which fluid is stored un-
per revolving frame.
der pressure as a source of hydraulic energy.
Boom Hoist: Rope drum and its drive, or other mecha-
Aeration: The condition when air is present in the hy-
nism, for controlling the angle of the boom.
draulic fluid. This causes the fluid to appear milky and
components to operate erratically because of the com- Boom Lattice: Structural truss members at angles to,
pressibility of air trapped in the fluid. and supporting the boom chords of a boom.
Annually: Once a year Boom Length: The distance along a straight line
through the centerline of the boom foot pin to the cen-
Anti-Two Block System: A system of electromechani-
terline of the boom head sheave shaft, measured along
cal devices used to prevent the crane operator from
the longitudinal axis of the boom.
two blocking the crane. See Two Block.
Boom Section: Individual lattice structures which are
Attachment: The lattice boom assembly and either an
pinned together to form the boom attachment. Crane
angle jib or tubular jib or the combination of both.
lattice booms are usually in two basic sections, top and
Audio/Visual Warning System: 1. Alarm device that base. Such booms may be lengthened by insertion of
signals the operator of low engine oil pressure, high en- one or more additional extension sections.
gine coolant temperature and high hydraulic oil and
Bridle: A frame equipped with sheaves and con-
transmission oil temperature. 2. Device utilizing buzzer
nected to the boom by stationary ropes called pen-
and/or lights as a signal of approaching two block and/
dants. The bridle is used in conjunction with the boom
or overload condition. See Rated Capacity Indicator.
hoist drum and bail to alter the crane’s boom angle.
Automatic Brake: Drum brake system that is applied
By-Pass: A secondary passage of fluid, air, or electri-
automatically any time the drum control lever is in neu-
cal flow, in addition to the main flow path.
tral.
Capacity Chart: A chart for the crane which gives
Backstop: A device used to limit the angle of the
rated lifting capacities for the crane under different load
boom, jib, or mast at the highest recommended angle.
conditions and setups. Capacity charts are found in
Backward Stability: Resistance to overturning of the the Crane Rating Manual.
crane in rearward direction.
Carbody: The crawler carrier upon which the revolving
Bail: A frame equipped with sheaves and connected upper frame is mounted.
to the gantry. The bail is used in conjunction with the
Carrier Roller: Rollers of track mechanism which are
boom hoist drum and bridle to alter the crane’s boom
not power driven but are used to guide the track along
angle.
the top of the side frame.
Band Brake: Circular external contracting type brake
Catwalk: Platforms attached to the crane that provide
having a strap lined with heat and wear resistant friction
a walkway along the sides of the upper.
material.
Cavitation: A condition where air is induced into a cav-
Base Section: The lower most section of a lattice
ity, line, or chamber normally filled with oil. This condi-
boom or jib.
tion can cause damage to pumps, cylinders, valves,
Basic Boom: Lattice boom attachment made up of etc.
only the base and top sections of the boom.
Check Valve: A valve which permits flow in one direc-
Basic Jib: Jib attachment made up of only the base tion only.
and top section of the jib.
Chord: A main corner structural member of a boom.
Boom: Lattice structure consisting of multiple sec-
Circuit: A complete or partial path over which electrical
tions, pinned together to a specific length and their
current, air, or hydraulic fluid may flow.
support system.
Section 6 − Fundamental Terms 6−1

Operator’s Manual
Clamshell Bucket: A device consisting of two or more Double Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid
similar scoops hinged together and used for digging force can be applied in either direction.
and moving material. Drag Rope (Inhaul Rope): Rope for pulling in bucket
Closing Line: The rope reeved from hoist drum to con- during dragline operations.
trol closing of clamshell bucket. Dragline: Cranes with dragline attachments are gen-
Clutch: A friction, electromagnetic, hydraulic or pneu- erally used to excavate material from below the grade
matic device for engagement or disengagement of on which the crane is placed. A dragline bucket is
power. loaded by the drag rope pulling it toward the crane, it is
Compressibility: The change in volume of a fluid or lifted and carried by the hoist rope reeved over the
gas when it is subjected to a unit change in pressure. boom point sheave, and is balanced by the dump rope
interconnecting the drag and hoist ropes.
Concrete Bucket: Bucket for handling wet concrete,
fitted with bail or bridle, usually handled on lifting crane Drum Lagging: See Winch Drum.
for hoisting to dumping location. Drum Rotation Indicator: A device that is used to indi-
Counterbalance Valve (Holding Valve): A valve cate winch drum motion and can also be used to moni-
which regulates fluid flow by maintaining resistance in tor speed.
one direction, but allows free flow in the other direction. Extension (Boom Or Jib): Sections of the boom or jib
Counterweight: Weight used to supplement the which come in various lengths and are used to in-
weight of the crane in providing stability for lifting loads. crease the overall length of the boom or jib.
Cracking Pressure: The pressure at which a pressure Fairleader: A combination of sheaves and or rollers
actuated valve begins to open to allow flow. mounted at the front of the crane to guide the drag
rope.
Crane Configuration: The relative position and ar-
rangement of the parts or elements of the crane e.g. Filter: A device which functions to remove insoluble
amount of counterweight, attachment position, etc. contaminants from a fluid by a porous media.
Crane Rated Capacity: The maximum weight allowed Flow Divider: A valve which divides a flow of oil into
to be lifted with the crane setup in a particular crane two streams.
configuration. Force: Any cause which tends to produce or modify
Crane Rating Manual: A compilation of the necessary motion. In hydraulics, total force is expressed by the
information needed to plan a safe lift with the crane. It product of pressure (P) and the area of the surface (A)
includes instructions such as the allowable lifting ca- on which the pressure acts. ( Force = P X A)
pacity charts, Working Range Diagrams, Working Area Frame: Structure on which either upper or carrier ma-
Diagram, etc. chinery is attached.
Crane Set Up: The act or instance of preparing the Free-Fall: Lowering of the hook and/or load without
crane for operation which entails the positioning of the using power. The motion is caused by gravity and must
crane and its elements. It concerns such details or be controlled by a brake.
items such as finding a suitable location to perform the Friction: The property which tends to resist the relative
lift, setting the outrigger position, leveling, cribbing or motion of one surface in contact with another surface.
blocking of the crane, etc. It always exerts a Drag" in the direction opposite of the
Cylinder: A device which converts fluid power into me- motion, thus consumes power.
chanical force and motion. It usually consists of a Full Flow: In a filter, the condition where all the fluid
moveable element such as a piston and piston rod, must pass through the filter element.
which operates within a cylindrical bore.
Full Load Speed: The speed at which an engine runs
Delivery: The volume of fluid discharge by a pump in a when it is delivering its full rated horsepower.
given time, usually expressed in gallons per minute
(gpm) or liters per minute (L/min). Function Limiter (Function Lockout, Hydraulic Cut-
outs, Hydraulic Kickouts): Devices incorporated into
Derricking: Operation of changing boom angle in a the anti-two block system or rated capacity indicator
vertical plane. See Boom Hoist. system which will disable the crane function of winch
Displacement: The quantity of fluid which can pass up, telescope out and/or boom down (as applicable)
through a pump, motor, or cylinder in a single revolu- as two block or overload situations approach.
tion or stroke.
6−2 Section 6 − Fundamental Terms

Operator’s Manual
Gradeablity: The slope which a crane can climb ex- Live Mast: Frame hinged at or near the boom foot and
pressed as a percentage. (45° equals 100% slope.) extending above the cab for use in connection with
Ground Pressure: Weight of crane divided by the area supporting a boom. Head of mast is usually supported
of the surface directly supporting the crane. and raised or lowered by the boom hoist ropes.
Head Machinery: An arrangement of sheaves on the Load Indicator: A device for measuring and display-
end of an attachment used to reeve wire rope. ing the net load being lifted.
High Idle: Governed engine speed at full throttle and Load Line: Another term for Hoist Rope". In lifting
no load. crane service it refers to the main hoist. The secondary
hoist is referred to as a Whip Line".
Hoist: Function of lifting and lowering the loads.
Load Moment Indicator: See Rated Load Indicator.
Hoist Drum: A rotating cylindrical spool with side
flanges used to wrap the winch rope during the raising Load Radius: See Radius.
and lowering of the load with the winch. Lock-Out: The stoppage of control of a given function.
Hoist Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the winch Lower Roller: See Track Roller.
and the attachments for lifting loads. LS: A track driven crawler crane.
Holding Valve: See Counterbalance Valve. Luffing Attachment: A crane attachment adaptable to
Hook Ball: Ball with hook attached used in lifting serv- a basic crane. The attachment consists of a vertical luf-
ice. It is used with one part of line only. fing boom which is capable of being offset, with a luf-
Hook Block: Block with hook attached used in lifting fing jib (usually the basic crane boom) affixed to the up-
service. It may have a single sheave for two or three per part of the luffing boom.
part line, or multiple sheaves for four or more parts of Mat: Support, usually of timber or wire construction,
line. for supporting pontoons or tracks on soft surfaces to
House Assembly: The housing which covers the ma- add stability and/or distribute crane loads (reduce
chinery mounted on the upper revolving frame ground pressure).
Hydraulic Reservoir (Sump Tank): The storage tank Midpoint Pendants: Wire rope pendants used to sup-
for hydraulic fluid. port the center portion of a long lattice boom at lift off.
Idler Roller: Rollers of track mechanism which are not Motor (Hydraulic): 1. A rotary motion device which
power driven but are used to maintain proper tension changes hydraulic energy into mechanical energy.
on the track. 2. A rotary actuator.
Inhaul Rope: See Drag Rope. Oil Cooler: A heat exchanger used to remove heat
from the hydraulic or transmission fluid.
Instability: A tipping condition" in which the mo-
ments acting to overturn a crane exceed the moments Open Center Circuit: A circuit where the pump con-
acting to resist overturning. tinuously circulates fluid through the control valves
when they are in a neutral position.
Jib: A pendant supported extension attached to the
boom head to provide added boom length for handling Operational Aid: An accessory that provides informa-
specified loads. The jib may be in line with the boom or tion to facilitate operation of a crane or that takes con-
offset. trol of particular crane functions without action of the
operator when a limiting condition is sensed.
Lattice Boom: Boom of open construction with angle
or tubular lattice between main corner members Pawl: A pivoting locking lever which will permit move-
(chords) in the form of a truss. ment in only one direction. Movement in the opposite
direction can be achieved only by manually releasing
Lifting Capacity: The rated load for any given load ra- the mechanism.
dius and boom angle under specified operating condi-
tions and crane configurations. Pendant: A supporting rope, which under tension,
maintains a constant distance between its points of at-
Line Pull: The rope pull generated off a rope drum or tachment.
lagging at a specified pitch diameter.
Pick And Carry: The crane operation of lifting a load
Line Speed: The rope velocity at a rope drum or lag- and traveling with it suspended.
ging at a specified pitch diameter.

Operator’s Manual
Pilot Pressure: Hydraulic pressure used to actuate or Reservoir: A container for storage of fluid in a fluid
control hydraulic components. power system.
Pinion: The small gear in a gear train which drives the Restriction: A reduced cross-sectional area in a line
other gears. which produces a pressure drop.
Pitch Diameter: Root diameter of drum, lagging, or Rigging Switch (System Override Switch): A switch
sheave, plus the diameter of the rope. which can be used to override any or all of the function
Planetary: A set of gears used to either speed up or limiters (cutouts) which have been activated on the
slow down the input vs the output to gain speed or crane during crane rigging/set up.
power whichever is applicable. Rope: Refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified.
Platform: A device (basket, work platform, bucket, See Wire Rope".
cage, etc.) designed and fabricated with its intended Rotating Joint: Component which transfers fluid, air,
use being to position personnel. or electricity between a stationary and a rotating mem-
Pontoon: The support which attaches to the outrigger ber.
jack to increase the supporting area. Schematic: A diagram or representation of a system
Poppet: A disc, ball or cone shaped part of certain showing everything in a simple way. No attempt is
valves, which when closed against a seat, prevents made to show the various devices in their actual rela-
flow. tive positions. A schematic points out the operation of
a circuit for troubleshooting purposes.
Port: The open end of a passage. May be within or at
the surface of a hydraulic component housing or body. Seasonally: Four times per year.
Power Take-Off (PTO): Device used for the transfer or Semiannually: Twice per year.
transmission of engine power to the operating func- Shall: The word shall is to be understood as mandato-
tions of the crane. ry.
Pressure: Force per unit of area usually expressed in Shim Pack (Wedge Pack): Wedging mechanism
pounds per square inch (psi) or Kilopasscals (kPa). used to secure the crawler side frames to the carbody.
Pressure Drop: The reduction in pressure between Should: The word should is to be understood as advi-
two points in a line or passage due to the energy lost in sory.
maintaining flow. Side Frame: Supporting structure of the track mecha-
Pressure Reducing Valve: A valve which limits the nism. Side frames are attached to the crawler carbody
maximum pressure at its outlet regardless of the inlet and may be extendable and/or removable.
pressure. Single Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid
Pump (Hydraulic): A device which converts mechani- power can only be used in one direction. Another force
cal force and motion into hydraulic fluid flow. must be used to return the cylinder.
Radius: The horizontal distance from the vertical pro- Speed-O-Matic (S-O-M): A term which applies to the
jection to the ground of the centerline of rotation of the hydraulic control system originally developed to apply
crane, with no load, to the center of gravity of the hook two shoe clutches for transmission of power on Link-
or suspended load. Belt products.
Rated Capacity Indicator (RCI): A device that auto- Spool: Term applied to almost any moving cylindrically
matically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating shaped part of a hydraulic component which moves to
and warns the crane operator of an overload condition. direct flow through the component.
Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL): A device that automat- Sprocket: The driving element of the track mecha-
ically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating and nism. Receiving power through the drive mechanism,
prevents movements of the crane that would result in the sprocket meshes with the track to travel the crawler.
an overload condition. Strainer: A filtering device for the removal of coarse
Rated Load Indicator: See Rated Capacity Indicator. solids from a fluid.
Reeving: Passing of ropes over pulleys and/or Stroke: The length of travel of a piston or spool.
sheaves. Suction Line: The hydraulic line connecting the pump
Relief Valve: A pressure operated valve which by- inlet port to the hydraulic reservoir.
passes pump delivery to the reservoir, limiting system Sump Tank: See Hydraulic Reservoir.
pressure to a predetermined maximum value.

Operator’s Manual
Support Line: The cable reeved from second hoist Two Block: The condition when the crane’s hook
drum for holding clamshell bucket suspended during block, ball, any other load attachment means, or the
dumping and lowering operations. load itself, comes into contact with any of the attach-
Surge: A very sudden rise in the hydraulic or air pres- ment’s load sheaves or other physical entity on the at-
sure or electrical potential in a circuit. tachment.
Swing (Slew): The rotation of the upper with the car- Two Block Warning System: A system of electrome-
rier remaining stationary. chanical devices used to warn the crane operator of im-
pending two block condition.
Swing Brake: A brake which is used to resist the rota-
tion of the upper during normal, stationary crane op- Upper: The portion of the crane located above the
erations. turntable bearing.
Swing Lock: A mechanical lock that engages with the Upper Revolving Frame: The main structure of the
upper in any position over the crawler. Use of the swing upper section of the crane which serves as mounts for
lock is mandatory when traveling or transporting the other components of the upper.
crane and during pick and carry operations. Upper Roller: See Carrier Roller.
Swing Motor: Hydraulic device which uses a plane- Valve: A device for controlling flow rate, flow direction,
tary to rotate the upper on the carrier. or pressure of a fluid.
Tagline: A wire rope or cable attached to the bucket Viscosity: The resistance to flow. High viscosity indi-
and a spring loaded, counterweighted, or powered cates a high resistance; low viscosity, a low resistance.
unit keeping it in tension to retard rotation and pendu- Wedge Pack: See Shim Pack.
lum swaying of the otherwise freely suspended bucket.
Whip Line: Secondary hoist line. Also see Load
Tailswing: The distance from the centerline of rotation Line".
of the upper frame to the extreme rear swing arc of the
counterweight. Winch: Function of lifting and lowering loads.
Third Drum: A third hoist drum, in addition to two main Winch Drum: A rotating cylindrical spool with side
hoist drums, often used in pile driving. flanges used to wrap the winch rope during the raising
and lowering of the load with the winch.
Top Section: The upper most section of a lattice boom
or jib which also contains the head machinery of the at- Winch Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the winch
tachment. and the attachments for lifting loads.
Torque: Turning or twisting force usually measured in Wire Rope: A flexible, multiwired member usually con-
foot-pounds (ft-lb) or Newton meters (Nm). sisting of a core member around which a number of
multiwired strands are helically wrapped.
Track: Assembled crawler track shoes and connect-
ing pins around idler rollers and drive sprockets; that Wiring Diagram: A diagram which includes all the de-
part of crawler which contacts the ground. vices in an electrical system and shows their functional
relationships to each other. Such a diagram gives the
Track Roller: Rollers of track mechanism which are necessary information for physically tracing circuits
not power driven, but are used to support the side when troubleshooting is necessary.
frame and guide the track along the ground.
Working Weight: Weight of crane with full radiator, half
Tubular Jib: Multiple section lattice extensions sup- full fuel tank and attachments installed.
ported by pendants and attached to the main boom
head.
Turntable Bearing: A large bearing which attaches
the upper to the carrier allowing the upper to rotate on
the carrier.

Operator’s Manual

1029 - 248 Hylab 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1029 - 248 Hylab 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1029 - 248 Hylab 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

Crane Serial Number

BOOK1029 N5112006RSW Preface

Section 1 − Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1−1 Thru 1−106

Section 2 − Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 2−1 Thru 2−30

Section 3 − Periodic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3−1 Thru 3−24

Section 4 − Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 4−1 Thru 4−42

Section 5 − General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 5−1 Thru 5−32

Section 6 − Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 6−1 Thru 6−6

Operating Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2

General Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2

Operator Awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−2

Boom Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−8

Electrical Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−12

Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−15

Signalmen And Bystanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−15

Crane Inspections And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−16

Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−18

Crane And Area Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−18

Weights, Lengths, And Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−19

Leaving The Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−25

Personnel Handling Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−25

Additional Requirements for Offshore Cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−27

Inspection and Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−27

Crane Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−28

Operation And Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−28

Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−29

Operator’s Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−29

Overhead Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−31

Load Moment Limiter Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−31

Left Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−33

Right Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−35

Front Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−36

Air Conditioner Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−38

Section 1 − Operating Instructions i

Engine Throttle Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39

Pump Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39

Boom Hoist Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−39

Boom Limit Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41

Boom Hoist Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41

Luffing Boom Backstop Limit (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41

Boom Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−41

Boom Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42

Drum Control Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42

Front And Rear Drum Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−42

Operating In AUTO BRAKE" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−43

Operating In FREE" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−43

Third Drum Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44

Drum Rotation Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44

Upper Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44

Swing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44

Swing (Park) Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−44

Travel Swing Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−45

To Swing The Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−45

Steering And Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46

Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46

Anti-Two Block System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−46

Load Moment Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1−49